JP2020199204A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest even if game balls do not enter a normal variable device in a special state.SOLUTION: In a high-base state as a special state, a variable winning ball device is easily controlled to an open state. Even if no game balls enter the variable winning ball device, a normal pattern operation hole is provided. Game balls flowing down a right area enter the normal pattern operation hole at a higher ratio than they are discharged from an out port. Therefore, a ratio of entry into the normal pattern operation hole can be increased. A ratio of selection of "normal ready-to-win losing" or "super-ready-to-win" as a variation display period longer than "non-ready-to-win losing (reduction variation)" is higher during a first period than during a second period. In the meantime, a ratio of selection of "non-ready-to-win losing (high-speed variation)" as a variation display period shorter than "non-ready-to-win losing (reduction variation)" is higher in the second period than in the first period.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9-1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.

As a conventional game machine, a gate as a predetermined area through which a game ball can pass and a normally variable device that may be opened by passing through the gate are directly connected by a flow passage of the game ball. There was (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In such a case, in the time saving state as a special state, the ratio of the game ball that has passed through the predetermined area usually enters the variable device is high.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-4181

However, in the game machine of Patent Document 1, if the game ball does not normally enter the variable device even though it has passed through the gate as a predetermined area in the time saving state, there is a risk of causing a decrease in interest.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and provides a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest even when a game ball does not normally enter the variable device in a special state. With the goal.

(1) Any of a plurality of set values (setting values 1 to 6 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player and have different advantages. It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to the set value.
Variable display means (microcomputer 100 for game control, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing variable display (variable display), and
A game area in which the game medium can flow down (for example, a game area formed in the game board 2) and
A discharge area (for example, an out port 51) capable of discharging a game medium (for example, a game ball) to the outside of the game area,
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the game state, and
It is equipped with a value-giving means (for example, a payout control board) that gives value.
The state control means can be controlled to any gaming state including at least a normal state (for example, a normal state), a special state (for example, a high base state), and the advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state). Yes,
The game area includes a first area (for example, a left side area) and a second area (for example, a right side area) different from the first area.
In the second region,
Based on the variable display result of the normal identification information (for example, the normal symbol), the first state in which the game medium is easy to enter (for example, the open state) and the second state in which the game medium is difficult or impossible to enter (for example, closed). A normal variable device (for example, a variable winning ball device 6B) that can be changed to a state) and
A specific area (for example, a normal drawing operating port 50) capable of variably displaying the ordinary identification information when the game medium enters is provided.
Based on being controlled to the special state by the state control means, the normal variable device is more likely to be controlled to the first state than the normal state (for example, in the high base state, the variable winning ball device 6B is It is easier to control to the open state than the normal state),
The value-giving means imparts a value equal to or less than a predetermined value required for the game medium to enter the specific area based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area (for example, a game to the normal drawing operating port 50). If the ball enters, there will be one payout),
The specific area is provided at a position downstream of the ordinary variable device (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-1, the normal drawing operating port 50 is provided at a position downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B). ,
The game medium that has flowed down the second region in the special state has a higher rate of entering the specific region than being discharged in the discharge region (for example, a game ball that has flowed down the right side region in the high base state). , The rate of entering the normal operation port 50 is higher than that of being discharged at the out port 51),
The selection ratio of the variable display pattern (variation pattern) is common regardless of the set value (as shown in FIG. 13-6, the determination value of the variation pattern determination table is common regardless of the set value).
In the special state (high probability / high base state (probability change state)), a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) after the first period (the game state shifts to the high probability / high base state (probability change state)). (The period until the special figure game is executed, or until the big hit game state is reached before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed), and the second period after the first period (the game state is high). The period (51 times or more or 101 times or more) after the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) without becoming a big hit game state after shifting to the certain / high base state. Yes,
In the first period, the selection ratio of the variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined period is higher than that in the second period (as shown in FIGS. 13-6 (A1) and (C1), the display result is ". When it becomes "out of reach", in the first period [excluding final fluctuation], "normal reach out of reach" (variation display), which is a fluctuation display period longer than "non-reach loss (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds). The rate of selecting "out of super reach" (variation display period is 60 seconds) is higher than that of the second period),
In the second period, the selection ratio of the variable display pattern having a shorter variable display period than the predetermined period is higher than that in the first period (as shown in FIGS. 13-6 (A1) and (C1), the display result is When it becomes "off", in the second period, "non-reach out (high-speed fluctuation)" (variation display), which is a fluctuation display period shorter than "non-reach out (shortening fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds). The rate at which the period (1 second) is selected is higher than that of the 1st period [excluding the final fluctuation])
A game machine characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a decrease in interest even when the game medium does not enter the normally variable device in a special state. Further, when the game state is a special state, sound playability can be realized and the interest of the game can be improved.

(2) The game machine of (1) above.
The discharge region is provided at the bottom of the second region (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-1, the out port 51 is provided at the bottom of the right region).

According to such a configuration, even if the game medium does not normally enter the variable device in a special state, the ratio of entering the specific area can be made higher than the ratio of entering the discharge area. The decrease can be reduced.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
When the game medium enters the specific area, the value-imparting means grants the same number of game media as the number of entering (for example, when the game ball enters the normal drawing operating port 50, the game medium enters. There is one payout, which is the same as the number).

According to such a configuration, even if the game medium does not enter the normally variable device in the special state, the same number of game media as the number of the game media that have entered is given, so that the deterioration of the interest can be reduced. ..

(4) The gaming machines of (1) to (3) above.
Based on the variable display result of the special identification information being a specific result (for example, a jackpot display result), the first state (for example, the open state) in which the game medium is easy to enter and the game medium are difficult or impossible to enter. A special variable device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can be changed to a second state (for example, a closed state) is further provided.
The specific area is provided at a position downstream of the special variable device (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-1, the normal drawing operating port 50 is provided at a position downstream of the special variable winning ball device 7. ing).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a decrease in interest even when the game medium does not enter the normally variable device in a special state. In addition, since the rate of entering a specific area is higher than that of being discharged in the discharge area, even if the game medium does not enter the special variable device, the ball loss when the game medium does not enter the special variable device is reduced. be able to.

(5) The gaming machines of (1) to (4) above.
The variable display of the ordinary identification information can also be executed by the game medium entering in a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41) different from the specific area (for example, the passing gate 41 different from the normal drawing operating port 50). The variable display of the normal symbol is also executed by the entry of the game ball in.)

According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a decrease in interest even when the game medium does not enter the normally variable device in a special state.

(6) The game machine of (5) above.
The predetermined area is provided on the upstream side of the ordinary variable device (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-1, the passing gate 41 is provided on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 6B).
The game medium that has entered the predetermined area can continuously enter the normal variable device (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-1, the game ball that has entered the passing gate 41 continuously enters the variable winning position directly underneath. It is possible to enter the ball device 6B).

According to such a configuration, since the game medium that has entered the predetermined area continuously enters the normal variable device, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being wasted.

(7) The gaming machines of (1) to (6) above.
When the game medium enters the ordinary variable device, the value-imparting means grants the same number of game media as the number of entering (for example, when the game ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B, the game medium enters. There is one payout that is the same as the number you made).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game medium from increasing too much during the special state.

(8) The gaming machines according to (1) to (7) above.
The game medium that has flowed down to the second region in the special state has a higher ratio of entering the specific region than the ratio of entering the normal variable device (for example, a game ball that has flowed down to the right region in the high base state). The rate of entry into the normal drawing operating port 50 is higher than the rate of entry into the variable winning ball device 6B).

According to such a configuration, while preventing the ratio of entering the normal variable device from becoming too high during the special state, even if the game ball does not enter the normal variable device, the game goes to a specific area. The entry of the medium can alleviate the disadvantageous situation for the player.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to the following means A1 and thereafter. Conventionally, it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the technician as shown in JP-A-2018-47306 in the game machine, and depending on the set value. A game machine that selects a variable pattern has been proposed.

However, in a gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values, if the set value is high, the period required until the next big hit occurs is short, and the gambling becomes too high. There is a problem that sound playability cannot be realized. Further, when the set value is low, there is a problem that the period required until the next big hit occurs is long and the interest is lowered.

This was done in view of the above situation, and the purpose is to realize sound playability and improve the interest in a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values.

The game machine of means A1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination).
Variable display means (microcomputer 100 for game control, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing variable display (variable display), and
A game state control means (CPU103) for controlling a game state is provided.
The game state control means (CPU103) is
An advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a special state (high accuracy / high base state (probability change state), high accuracy / second KT state) that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player. (Small hit RUSH state)) and can be controlled,
The selection ratio of the variable display pattern (variation pattern) is common regardless of the set value (as shown in FIG. 13-6, the determination value of the variation pattern determination table is common regardless of the set value).
In the special state (high probability / high base state (probability change state)), a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) after the first period (the game state shifts to the high probability / high base state (probability change state)). (The period until the special figure game is executed, or until the big hit game state is reached before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed), and the second period after the first period (the game state is high). The period (51 times or more or 101 times or more) after the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) without becoming a big hit game state after shifting to the certain / high base state. Yes,
In the first period, the selection ratio of the variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined period is higher than that in the second period (as shown in FIGS. 13-6 (A1) and (C1), the display result is ". When it becomes "out of reach", in the first period [excluding final fluctuation], "normal reach out of reach" (variation display), which is a fluctuation display period longer than "non-reach loss (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds). The rate of selecting "out of super reach" (variation display period is 60 seconds) is higher than that of the second period),
In the second period, the selection ratio of the variable display pattern having a shorter variable display period than the predetermined period is higher than that in the first period (as shown in FIGS. 13-6 (A1) and (C1), the display result is When it becomes "off", in the second period, "non-reach out (high-speed fluctuation)" (variation display), which is a fluctuation display period shorter than "non-reach out (shortening fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds). The rate at which the period (1 second) is selected is higher than that of the 1st period [excluding the final fluctuation])
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize sound playability and improve the interest of the game when the game state is a special state.

The game machine of means A2
It is a game machine of means A1 and
Equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) for controlling the effect
The game state control means (CPU103) is a game state different from the special state (high probability / high base state (probability change state)) and is a predetermined state (low probability / high base state (time saving state)) that is advantageous to the player. )) Can be controlled,
The effect control means can execute a common effect in the predetermined state and the first period (as shown in FIGS. 13-4 (B1) and 13-4 (C1), the effect control CPU 120 is a jackpot game. After the end, the game state is controlled to the low probability / low base state (time saving state), and the game state is controlled to the high probability / high base state (probability change state). Even in one period, the production mode is controlled by the chance time, so the common "evening image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the common "chance time" characters are displayed at the top of the screen. ing)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the game state is a predetermined state.

The game machine of means A3
A gaming machine of means A1 or means A2,
Equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) for controlling the effect
The effect control means can execute a suggestion effect suggesting a transition from the first period to the second period (as shown in FIGS. 13-13 (1) and (5) to (7). , 1st period [final change] (The 50th special figure game after the change display result of the 1st special symbol became "big hit", or the change display result of the 2nd special symbol became "big hit". In the 100th special figure game later), the effect control CPU 120 executes a continuous challenge effect that suggests a transition from the first period to the second period (the high base state of the game state continues). Is)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period.

The game machine of means A4
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A3.
The game state control means (CPU103) can control a game state different from the advantageous state and a special state (small hit game state) that is advantageous to the player.
The special state is a game state in which a game value is easily given by the special state (high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is controlled to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur, and a low base state is set. By controlling, the opening time of the variable winning ball device is shortened, and the special variable winning ball device is controlled so that the game ball can easily win a prize.)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special state.

The game machine of means A5
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A4.
The game state control means (CPU103) is
After the end of the advantageous state (big hit gaming state), a predetermined state (high accuracy / first KT) that is different from the special state (high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state)) and is advantageous to the player. It can be controlled to the state (probability change state))
It is possible to control the special state in response to the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times in the predetermined state (after the end of the big hit game, the state shifts to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state), and the variation is 100 times. If the next big hit does not occur in the display, the continuous challenge effect is executed in the 100th fluctuation display, and the 101st fluctuation display shifts to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state)).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the game state is a predetermined state.

The game machine of means A6
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A4.
The game state control means (CPU103) is
After the end of the advantageous state (big hit gaming state), a predetermined state (high accuracy / first KT) that is different from the special state (high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state)) and is advantageous to the player. It can be controlled to the state (probability change state))
In the predetermined state, it is possible to control the game state different from the advantageous state and to the special state which is advantageous to the player a predetermined number of times (high accuracy after the end of the big hit game). If the first KT state (probability change state) is entered and the next big hit does not occur in the fluctuation display until the number of small hits occurs 50 times, the fluctuation display in which the number of small hits occurs is the 50th. Executes the continuous challenge production of the successful mode in, and shifts to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) from the next and subsequent fluctuation display of the fluctuation display in which the number of small hits occurs 50 times)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the game state is a predetermined state.

The game machine of means A7
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A6.
Equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) for controlling the effect
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a special effect (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The execution rate of the special effect in the first period is different from the execution rate of the special effect in the second period (in the first period, whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed is determined for each variation display. Therefore, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect for each variation display is 10%. On the other hand, in the second period, whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed is determined only in the final variation of the second period. , The execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect for each variation display excluding the final variation in the second period is 0%, and the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect of the final variation in the second period is 10%).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The game machine of means A8
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A7.
Equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) for controlling the effect
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a plurality of types of special effects (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect) as special effects suggesting set values.
The type of special effect that can be executed in the first period and the type of special effect that can be executed in the second period are different (when the game state is a high accuracy / high base state [first period]). (YES in step S21TM1000), step S21TM1010 determines whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, and step S21TM1050 determines whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect. As shown, when the gaming state is the high accuracy / high base state [second period] (YES in step S21TM1060), whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined in step S21TM1080).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The game machine of means A9
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A8.
The effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the effect,
It is equipped with a corresponding display means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (hold display, active display) corresponding to a variable display (variable display).
The effect control means can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display (the effect control CPU 120 can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the hold display or the active display).
The execution rate of the change effect in the first period is different from the execution rate of the change effect in the second period (the execution rate of the change effect is higher in the first period than in the second period. )
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The game machine of means A10
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A9.
The effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the effect,
It is equipped with a corresponding display means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (hold display, active display) corresponding to a variable display (variable display).
The effect control means can execute an action effect that acts on the corresponding display (the effect control CPU 120 can execute an action effect that acts on the hold display or the active display).
The execution rate of the action effect in the first period is different from the execution rate of the action effect in the second period (the execution rate of the action effect is higher in the first period than in the second period. )
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The game machine of means A11
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A10.
The effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the effect,
A determination means (CPU103) for determining whether or not the advantageous state (big hit game state) is controlled before the variable display (variable display) is executed is provided.
The effect control means can execute a notice effect based on the determination by the determination means (the effect control CPU 120 pre-reads to foretell the jackpot expectation in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. Notice production is possible),
The execution rate of the advance notice effect in the first period is different from the execution rate of the advance notice effect in the second period (the execution rate of the look-ahead advance notice effect is higher in the first period than in the second period. Yes)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

Further, as shown in JP-A-2018-47306 (FIG. 19), it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player, and the setting value varies according to the set value. A game machine that selects a pattern has been proposed. When the game machine can be set to any one of a plurality of set values, as described in JP-A-2018-47306 (FIG. 19), and is controlled to a state advantageous to the player. There is room to improve the interest of. The inventions according to the means B1 to the means B11 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and are controlled to a state advantageous to the player in a game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values. The purpose is to improve the interest when it is being done.

The game machine of means B1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination).
Variable display means (microcomputer 100 for game control, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing variable display (variable display), and
A game state control means (CPU103) that controls a game state, and
A production control means (CPU 120 for production control) for controlling the production is provided.
The game state control means (CPU103) is
An advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a special state (high accuracy / high base state (probability change state), high accuracy / second KT state) that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player. (Small hit RUSH state)) and can be controlled,
The selection ratio of the variable display pattern (variation pattern) is common regardless of the set value (as shown in FIG. 13-6, the determination value of the variation pattern determination table is common regardless of the set value).
In the special state (high probability / high base state (probability change state)), a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) after the first period (the game state shifts to the high probability / high base state (probability change state)). (The period until the special figure game is executed, or until the big hit game state is reached before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed), and the second period after the first period (the game state is high). The period (51 times or more or 101 times or more) after the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) without becoming a big hit game state after shifting to the certain / high base state. Yes,
The effect control means can execute a specific effect for notifying whether or not the effect is controlled to the advantageous state (the effect control CPU 120 has a variation pattern accompanied by super reach (“super reach loss”, “super”. In "Reach jackpot"), after the reach state is established, a battle effect is executed to notify whether or not the ally character and the enemy character have won the jackpot by performing a battle),
The execution rate of the specific effect in the first period is higher than the execution rate of the specific effect in the second period (as shown in FIG. 13-6 (A1) when the variation display result is “missing”). In addition, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], the rate at which "out of super reach" is selected as the fluctuation pattern is [10%], whereas as shown in FIG. 13-6 (C1), In the second period, the rate at which "out of super reach" is selected as the fluctuation pattern is [0%]).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the game state is a special state.

The game machine of means B2
It is a game machine of means B1
The game state control means (CPU103) is a game state different from the special state (high probability / high base state (probability change state)) and is a predetermined state (low probability / high base state (time saving state)) that is advantageous to the player. )) Can be controlled,
The effect control means can execute a common effect in the predetermined state and the first period (as shown in FIGS. 13-4 (B1) and 13-4 (C1), the effect control CPU 120 is a jackpot game. After the end, the game state is controlled to the low probability / low base state (time saving state), and the game state is controlled to the high probability / high base state (probability change state). Even in one period, the production mode is controlled by the chance time, so the common "evening image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the common "chance time" characters are displayed at the top of the screen. ing)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the game state is a predetermined state.

The game machine of means B3
A game machine of means B1 or means B2.
The effect control means can execute a suggestion effect suggesting a transition from the first period to the second period (as shown in FIGS. 13-13 (1) and (5) to (7). , 1st period [final change] (The 50th special figure game after the change display result of the 1st special symbol became "big hit", or the change display result of the 2nd special symbol became "big hit". In the 100th special figure game later), the effect control CPU 120 executes a continuous challenge effect that suggests a transition from the first period to the second period (the high base state of the game state continues). Is)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period.

The game machine of means B4
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B3.
The game state control means (CPU103) can control a game state different from the advantageous state and a special state (small hit game state) that is advantageous to the player.
The special state is a game state in which a game value is easily given by the special state (high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is controlled to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur, and a low base state is set. By controlling, the opening time of the variable winning ball device is shortened, and the special variable winning ball device is controlled so that the game ball can easily win a prize.)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special state.

The game machine of means B5
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B4.
The game state control means (CPU103) is
After the end of the advantageous state (big hit gaming state), a predetermined state (high accuracy / first KT) that is different from the special state (high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state)) and is advantageous to the player. It can be controlled to the state (probability change state))
It is possible to control the special state in response to the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times in the predetermined state (after the end of the big hit game, the state shifts to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state), and the variation is 100 times. If the next big hit does not occur in the display, the continuous challenge effect is executed in the 100th fluctuation display, and the 101st fluctuation display shifts to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state)).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the game state is a predetermined state.

The game machine of means B6
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B4.
The game state control means (CPU103) is
After the end of the advantageous state (big hit gaming state), a predetermined state (high accuracy / first KT) that is different from the special state (high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state)) and is advantageous to the player. It can be controlled to the state (probability change state))
In the predetermined state, it is possible to control the game state different from the advantageous state and to the special state which is advantageous to the player a predetermined number of times (high accuracy after the end of the big hit game). If the first KT state (probability change state) is entered and the next big hit does not occur in the fluctuation display until the number of small hits occurs 50 times, the fluctuation display in which the number of small hits occurs is the 50th. Executes the continuous challenge production of the successful mode in, and shifts to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) from the next and subsequent fluctuation display of the fluctuation display in which the number of small hits occurs 50 times)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the game state is a predetermined state.

The game machine of means B7
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B6.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a special effect (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The execution rate of the special effect in the first period is different from the execution rate of the special effect in the second period (in the first period, whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed is determined for each variation display. Therefore, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect for each variation display is 10%. On the other hand, in the second period, whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed is determined only in the final variation of the second period. , The execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect for each variation display excluding the final variation in the second period is 0%, and the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect of the final variation in the second period is 10%).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The game machine of means B8
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B7.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a plurality of types of special effects (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect) as special effects suggesting set values.
The type of special effect that can be executed in the first period and the type of special effect that can be executed in the second period are different (when the game state is a high accuracy / high base state [first period]). (YES in step S21TM1000), step S21TM1010 determines whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, and step S21TM1050 determines whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect. As shown, when the gaming state is the high accuracy / high base state [second period] (YES in step S21TM1060), whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined in step S21TM1080).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The game machine of means B9
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B8.
Equipped with a corresponding display means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (hold display, active display) corresponding to a variable display (variable display).
The effect control means can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display (the effect control CPU 120 can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the hold display or the active display).
The execution rate of the change effect in the first period is different from the execution rate of the change effect in the second period (the execution rate of the change effect is higher in the first period than in the second period. )
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means B10
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B9.
Equipped with a corresponding display means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (hold display, active display) corresponding to a variable display (variable display).
The effect control means can execute an action effect that acts on the corresponding display (the effect control CPU 120 can execute an action effect that acts on the hold display or the active display).
The execution rate of the action effect in the first period is different from the execution rate of the action effect in the second period (the execution rate of the action effect is higher in the first period than in the second period. )
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means B11
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B10.
A determination means (CPU103) for determining whether or not to be controlled in the advantageous state (big hit game state) before the variable display (variable display) is executed is provided.
The effect control means can execute a notice effect based on the determination by the determination means (the effect control CPU 120 pre-reads to foretell the jackpot expectation in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. Notice production is possible),
The execution rate of the advance notice effect in the first period is different from the execution rate of the advance notice effect in the second period (the execution rate of the look-ahead advance notice effect is higher in the first period than in the second period. Yes)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

Further, as shown in JP-A-2018-47306 (FIG. 19), it is possible to set any of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player, and an effect suggesting the set value. A game machine that executes the above has been proposed. With respect to a gaming machine as described in JP-A-2018-47306 (FIG. 19), there is room for improving the interest of the production regarding the suggestion of setting. The inventions according to the means C1 to the means C11 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object thereof is to improve the interest of the production regarding the suggestion of the setting.

The game machine of means C1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination).
Variable display means (microcomputer 100 for game control, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing variable display (variable display), and
A game state control means (CPU103) that controls a game state, and
It is provided with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a special effect (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect) related to setting suggestion.
The game state control means (CPU103) is
An advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a special state (high accuracy / high base state (probability change state), high accuracy / second KT state) that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player. (Small hit RUSH state)) and can be controlled,
The selection ratio of the variable display pattern (variation pattern) is common regardless of the set value (as shown in FIG. 13-6, the determination value of the variation pattern determination table is common regardless of the set value).
In the special state (high probability / high base state (probability change state)), a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) after the first period (the game state shifts to the high probability / high base state (probability change state)). (The period until the special figure game is executed, or until the big hit game state is reached before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed), and the second period after the first period (the game state is high). The period (51 times or more or 101 times or more) after the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) without becoming a big hit game state after shifting to the certain / high base state. Yes,
The selection ratio of the specific variable display pattern is different between the first period and the second period (as shown in FIGS. 13-6 (A1) and (C1) when the variable display result is "missing"). , The selection rate of the fluctuation pattern with super reach (“super reach loss”) in the first period is higher than the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern with super reach (“super reach loss”) in the second period) ,
The execution ratio of the special effect is different between the first period and the second period (in the first period, since it is determined whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed for each variation display, the first period for each variation display is determined. The execution rate of the 1 setting suggestion effect is 10%. On the other hand, in the second period, since it is determined whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed only in the final change of the second period, the final change of the second period. The execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect for each variation display excluding is 0%, and the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect of the final variation in the second period is 10%).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The game machine of means C2
It is a game machine of means C1
The game state control means (CPU103) is a game state different from the special state (high probability / high base state (probability change state)) and is a predetermined state (low probability / high base state (time saving state)) that is advantageous to the player. )) Can be controlled,
The effect control means can execute a common effect in the predetermined state and the first period (as shown in FIGS. 13-4 (B1) and 13-4 (C1), the effect control CPU 120 is a jackpot game. After the end, the game state is controlled to the low probability / low base state (time saving state), and the game state is controlled to the high probability / high base state (probability change state). Even in one period, the production mode is controlled by the chance time, so the common "evening image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the common "chance time" characters are displayed at the top of the screen. ing)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the game state is a predetermined state.

The game machine of means C3
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2.
The effect control means can execute a suggestion effect suggesting a transition from the first period to the second period (as shown in FIGS. 13-13 (1) and (5) to (7). , 1st period [final change] (The 50th special figure game after the change display result of the 1st special symbol became "big hit", or the change display result of the 2nd special symbol became "big hit". In the 100th special figure game later), the effect control CPU 120 executes a continuous challenge effect that suggests a transition from the first period to the second period (the high base state of the game state continues). Is)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period.

The game machine of means C4
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C3.
The game state control means (CPU103) can control a game state different from the advantageous state and a special state (small hit game state) that is advantageous to the player.
The special state is a game state in which a game value is easily given by the special state (high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is controlled to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur, and a low base state is set. By controlling, the opening time of the variable winning ball device is shortened, and the special variable winning ball device is controlled so that the game ball can easily win a prize.)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special state.

The game machine of means C5
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C4.
The game state control means (CPU103) is
After the end of the advantageous state (big hit gaming state), a predetermined state (high accuracy / first KT) that is different from the special state (high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state)) and is advantageous to the player. It can be controlled to the state (probability change state))
It is possible to control the special state in response to the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times in the predetermined state (after the end of the big hit game, the state shifts to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state), and the variation is 100 times. If the next big hit does not occur in the display, the continuous challenge effect is executed in the 100th fluctuation display, and the 101st fluctuation display shifts to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state)).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the game state is a predetermined state.

The game machine of means C6
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C4.
The game state control means (CPU103) is
After the end of the advantageous state (big hit gaming state), a predetermined state (high accuracy / first KT) that is different from the special state (high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state)) and is advantageous to the player. It can be controlled to the state (probability change state))
In the predetermined state, it is possible to control the game state different from the advantageous state and to the special state which is advantageous to the player a predetermined number of times (high accuracy after the end of the big hit game). If the first KT state (probability change state) is entered and the next big hit does not occur in the fluctuation display until the number of small hits occurs 50 times, the fluctuation display in which the number of small hits occurs is the 50th. Executes the continuous challenge production of the successful mode in, and shifts to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) from the next and subsequent fluctuation display of the fluctuation display in which the number of small hits occurs 50 times)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the game state is a predetermined state.

The game machine of means C7
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C6.
The execution rate of the special effect in the first period is different from the execution rate of the special effect in the second period (in the first period, whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed is determined for each variation display. Therefore, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect for each variation display is 10%. On the other hand, in the second period, whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed is determined only in the final variation of the second period. , The execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect for each variation display excluding the final variation in the second period is 0%, and the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect of the final variation in the second period is 10%).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The game machine of means C8
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C7.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a plurality of types of special effects (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect).
The type of special effect that can be executed in the first period and the type of special effect that can be executed in the second period are different (when the game state is a high accuracy / high base state [first period]). (YES in step S21TM1000), step S21TM1010 determines whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, and step S21TM1050 determines whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect. As shown, when the gaming state is the high accuracy / high base state [second period] (YES in step S21TM1060), whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined in step S21TM1080).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The game machine of means C9
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C8.
Equipped with a corresponding display means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (hold display, active display) corresponding to a variable display (variable display).
The effect control means can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display (the effect control CPU 120 can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the hold display or the active display).
The execution rate of the change effect in the first period is different from the execution rate of the change effect in the second period (the execution rate of the change effect is higher in the first period than in the second period. )
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means C10
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C9.
Equipped with a corresponding display means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (hold display, active display) corresponding to a variable display (variable display).
The effect control means can execute an action effect that acts on the corresponding display (the effect control CPU 120 can execute an action effect that acts on the hold display or the active display).
The execution rate of the action effect in the first period is different from the execution rate of the action effect in the second period (the execution rate of the action effect is higher in the first period than in the second period. )
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The game machine of means C11
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C10.
A determination means (CPU103) for determining whether or not to be controlled in the advantageous state (big hit game state) before the variable display (variable display) is executed is provided.
The effect control means can execute a notice effect based on the determination by the determination means (the effect control CPU 120 pre-reads to foretell the jackpot expectation in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. Notice production is possible),
The execution rate of the advance notice effect in the first period is different from the execution rate of the advance notice effect in the second period (the execution rate of the look-ahead advance notice effect is higher in the first period than in the second period. Yes)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

Some conventional gaming machines can change the probability that the variable display result will be a big hit (probability of being controlled to an advantageous state) by changing the set value (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). .. The gaming machine in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 includes, for example, a determination random number value generating means capable of generating a determination random value within a predetermined numerical range for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state. Based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set in the game machine, it is determined whether or not to control the advantageous state. , It is conceivable to make the probability of controlling the advantageous state different by making the number of advantageous state determination values different for each set value set in the game machine. However, when the number of advantageous state judgment values is different for each set value set in the game machine in this way, if the advantageous state judgment value is set over a plurality of numerical values, it matches the judgment random value advantageous state judgment value. Since it is necessary to execute the determination as to whether or not to perform the determination a plurality of times, there is a problem that the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state becomes large. The invention according to the means 1 to the means 21 has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing a processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state. To do.

The gaming machine described in means 1
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 10-32)
A random number value generation means for determination (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a random number value for determination for determining whether or not to control in the advantageous state, and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 10-41) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the determination that the advantageous state determination means controls the advantageous state.
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 to 10-20, the set value is set. The part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different due to the difference in the number of jackpot judgment values according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237). ) Is set at least
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to each setting) that is not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value.
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-17 and 10-18, a jackpot numerical range). Is the part set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is in the normal state or the probabilistic state)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the means 2 is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
A storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing set value information capable of specifying a set value set by the setting means is provided.
The advantageous state determining means reads out the set value information stored in the storage means each time it determines whether or not to control the advantageous state (for example, the CPU 103 performs the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 10-41). 207SGS550 process), the advantageous state determination value included in the non-common numerical range corresponding to the set value specified from the read setting value information, together with the advantageous state determination value included in the common numerical range. , Is set as an advantageous state determination value for determining whether or not the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means matches (for example, 207SG556 of the special symbol normal processing shown by the CPU 103 in FIGS. 10-41). In the process of, the part that sets the display result judgment table according to the set value read in the process of 207SG550)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value is repeatedly set every time it is determined whether or not the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determination means, so that an inappropriate advantageous state determination value is used. It is possible to prevent an inappropriate judgment from being made.

The gaming machine of the means 3 is the gaming machine according to the means 2.
The storage means can store the set value information read from the storage means by the advantageous state determination means as the determination used set value information (for example, the special symbol normal processing shown by the CPU 103 in FIGS. 10-41). In the process of 207SGS566, the set value in the process of 207SGS550 is updated and stored as the determined used set value).
A collation that can collate every predetermined period whether or not the set value information stored in the storage means is the same as the determined used set value information stored in the immediately preceding determination by the advantageous state determination means. It is characterized in that the CPU 103 further includes means (for example, in the process of 207SGS552 shown in FIG. 10-41, a portion for comparing the set value specified in the process of 207SGS550 with the determined used set value).
According to this feature, it is possible to identify that an inappropriate advantageous state determination value is set by inappropriate setting value information.

The gaming machine of the means 4 is the gaming machine according to the means 3.
The collation means collates each time it determines whether or not the advantageous state determining means controls the advantageous state for the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-41, the CPU 103 displays a variable display. The part that executes the processing of 207SGS552 each time it is executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since collation is performed every time it is determined by the advantageous state determining means whether or not to control the advantageous state, it is possible to more accurately identify that an inappropriate advantageous state determination value is set.

The gaming machine of the means 5 is the gaming machine according to the means 3 or the means 4.
When the collation result of the collation means is not the same, the error notification means capable of executing the error notification that the set value information is abnormal (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the error notification process (207SGS439)). The image display device 5 is provided with a portion for displaying the notification image 207SG005M4 according to the error) by executing the above.
According to this feature, it is possible to make the surroundings of the game machine recognize that the set value information is abnormal, and it is possible to quickly deal with the abnormal set value information.

The gaming machine of the means 6 is the gaming machine according to the means 5.
The game control means controls the game to an incapable game state when the collation results of the collation means are not the same, and also provides error notification information indicating that the set value information is abnormal. Output to the error notification means (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-41, when the CPU 103 determines that the set value and the determined used set value do not match as the comparison result of the 207SGS552, the process proceeds to loop processing. And the part that executes the processing of 207SGS554 and sends an error specification command to the effect control board 12),
The error notification means can execute the error notification based on the output of the error notification information by the game control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is the error notification process (207SGS439) from the CPU 103. A part that determines whether or not an error specification command has been received, and executes error notification according to the received error specification command when an error specification command is received)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate game from being executed due to a determination based on inappropriate set value information.

The gaming machine of the means 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 6.
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
The advantageous state determining means determines whether or not to control the advantageous state for each variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-41, each time the CPU 103 executes the variable display, the variable display result determination module is used. Use to determine variable display results),
When the execution condition of the variable display is satisfied, the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means can be stored as the pending storage means (for example, the CPU 103 performs the start winning determination process in FIGS. 10-39). The part that executes the processing of 207SGS510) and
Prior to the determination by the advantageous state determining means, it is possible to predetermine whether or not it is determined that the advantageous state is controlled based on the hold memory (for example, the winning prize shown by the CPU 103 in FIG. 10-40). The part that executes the hourly random value judgment process) and
With more
The pre-determination means performs the pre-determination by executing a process common to a process for determining whether or not the advantageous state determination means controls the advantageous state (for example, when the CPU 103 wins a prize). The part that judges the variable display result using the variable display result judgment module also in the random value judgment process)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a part of the processing of the advantageous state determination means and the pre-determination means can be shared, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The gaming machine of the means 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 7.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state.
A storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing set value information capable of specifying a set value set by the setting means, and
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 10-41) and the special state determining means for determining
With more
The game control means can be controlled to the special state based on the determination that the special state determination means controls the special state (for example, the game control means is special based on the fact that the variable display result is a small hit. Figure The part that updates the process flag value to 8 "and controls it to the small hit game state),
The special state determination value is continuously common from a special reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range regardless of the set value set by the setting means. The same number is set so as to be a numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, regardless of the set value, the range from 32767 to 33094 is the small hit determination with 32767 as the small hit reference value. The part that is set as the common numerical range of values),
The special state determination means determines whether or not to control the special state based on the special state determination value included in the common numerical range regardless of the set value set by the setting means. Each time, the set value information stored in the storage means is read, and a special state determination value included in the common numerical range corresponding to the set value specified from the read set value information is set (for example, FIG. As shown in 10-17 to 10-20, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is in the range of 32767 to 33094 regardless of the set value, and the variable special figure. When is the second special symbol, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is in the range of 32767 to 33421 regardless of the set value, but the CPU 103 always reads the set value from the RAM 102 when executing the variable display. A part that sets a display result judgment table according to the read set value and judges whether or not the variable display result is a small hit)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature unit, the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state can be reduced, and the advantageous state determination means sets the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value specified from the set value information. In some cases, since the process of setting the advantageous state determination value and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value specified from the set value information can be shared, the capacity of the processing program can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 8.
The non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is not set for the set value having the lowest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-17 to 10-20, pachinko game If the set value set for machine 1 is 1, the part where the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is not set)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, for the setting value that is most disadvantageous to the player, it is sufficient to determine whether or not to control only the common numerical range out of the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range in an advantageous state. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the means 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 9.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 10-32)
A random number value generation means for determination (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a random number value for determination for determining whether or not to control in the advantageous state, and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 10-41) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the determination that the advantageous state determination means controls the advantageous state.
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 to 10-20, the set value is set. The part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different due to the difference in the number of jackpot judgment values according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237). ) Is set at least
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to each setting) that is not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value.
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-17 and 10-18, a jackpot numerical range). Is the part set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is in the normal state or the probabilistic state)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.
Further, for example, when the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the determination random value and the advantageous state determination generated by the determination random value value generation means are provided. While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control the advantageous state a plurality of times based on each numerical range of the value, in the present invention, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are predetermined criteria. Since it is set to be a continuous numerical range from the value, the advantageous state determination means is a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range of the judgment random value and the advantageous state judgment value generated by the judgment random value generation means. Since it is only necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control the advantageous state only once based on the continuous numerical range including the range, it is necessary to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the advantageous state. Can be done.

The gaming machine of the means 11 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 10.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 10-32)
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 207SG154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 10-41) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
It is possible to control to the advantageous state based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determining means, and the probability of being determined to control to the advantageous state is the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value. Game control that can control the normal state corresponding to the normal number, which is a number, or the special state corresponding to the special number, which is the number of advantageous state determination values increased with respect to the normal number based on the advantageous state. Means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 to 10-20, the set value is set. The part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different due to the difference in the number of jackpot judgment values according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237). ) Is set at least
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to each setting) that is not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value.
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set so as to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, when the set value is 2, 1020 The range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, is set as a continuous numerical range),
The advantageous state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the predetermined reference value in the predetermined numerical range regardless of whether it is the normal state or the special state (for example,. As shown in FIGS. 10-17 and 10-18, the jackpot numerical range is a portion set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is in the normal state or the probabilistic state. )
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.
Further, for example, when the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the determination random value and the advantageous state determination generated by the determination random value value generation means are provided. While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control the advantageous state a plurality of times based on each numerical range of the value, in the present invention, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are predetermined criteria. Since it is set to be a continuous numerical range from the value, the advantageous state determination means is a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range of the judgment random value and the advantageous state judgment value generated by the judgment random value generation means. Since it is only necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control the advantageous state only once based on the continuous numerical range including the range, it is necessary to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the advantageous state. Can be done.
Further, for example, whether or not the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value (the determination random value is the advantageous state determination value). When determining to control to an advantageous state based on (whether or not the value is within the numerical range of), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value becomes a predetermined reference value, which is advantageous. The state determining means determines whether or not to control the advantageous state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the predetermined reference value according to whether the state is the normal state or the special state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the means 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 11.
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), which is an advantageous state (for example, for example) that is advantageous to the player. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state).
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 10-32)
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 207SG154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 10-41) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 10-41) and the special state determining means for determining
When the advantageous state determining means determines that the advantageous state is controlled, the advantageous state can be controlled, and when the special state determining means determines that the special state is controlled, the special state can be controlled. A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 to 10-20, the set value is set. The part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different due to the difference in the number of jackpot judgment values according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical range (for example, a range of 1020-1237, which is a common jackpot determination value) that is common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. Numerical range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to 1238) that is not set in the first common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value corresponding to each set value.
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, when the set value is 2 as shown in FIG. 10-17). Is a portion in which the range from the 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value).
As the special state determination value, regardless of the set value set by the setting means, from the second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range. The same number is set so as to be a continuous second common numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, 32767 is set as a small hit reference value from 32767 to 33094 regardless of the set value. The part where the range of is set as the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value)
When the variable display of the first identification information is executed, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control the special state with the first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (for example). , As shown in FIGS. 10-17 and 10-18, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, the small hit game state is entered with 328 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. (Part for determining whether to control), when executing the variable display of the second identification information, whether or not to control the special state with the second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is determined. Judgment (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, the small hit judgment value is small with 655 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. The part that determines whether or not to control the winning game state),
Although the number of the first special state determination value and the second special state determination value are different, they are set to be in a continuous numerical range from the common second reference value (for example, FIGS. 10-17 to 10-17). As shown in 10-20, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 328, and when the variable special figure is the second special symbol. The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 655, but the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is set to 32767, which is a common value, as the small hit reference value regardless of the fluctuation special chart. Part)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control in a special state.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means is advantageous. While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control the advantageous state a plurality of times based on each numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are executed. Is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, so that the advantageous state determination means is the first of the determination random value and the advantageous state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Since it is only necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control the advantageous state only once based on the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, it is determined whether or not to control the advantageous state. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.
Further, for example, whether or not the judgment random value generated by the judgment random value generation means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state judgment value (the judgment random value is the special state judgment value). When determining to control to a special state based on (whether or not the value is within the numerical range of), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value is the second reference value. Since the special state determining means can determine whether or not to control the special state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the second reference value according to the fluctuation special figure. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state.

The gaming machine of the means 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 12.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player and a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. And
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 10-32)
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 207SG154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 10-41) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 10-41) and the special state determining means for determining
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determining means, and the special state is determined based on the determination that the special state determining means controls the special state. (For example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 to 10-20, the set value is set. The part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different due to the difference in the number of jackpot judgment values according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical range (for example, a range of 1020-1237, which is a common jackpot determination value) that is common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. Numerical range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to 1238) that is not set in the first common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value corresponding to each set value.
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, when the set value is 2 as shown in FIG. 10-17). Is a portion in which the range from the 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value).
The special state determination value is continuous from a second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value having the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state. The same number is set regardless of the set value set by the setting means so as to be in the second common numerical range (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-17 and 10-18, a small hit. The numerical range is different from the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and if the variable special figure is the first special symbol, 32767 is always used as the small hit reference. The value is set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33094, and if the variable special figure is the second special symbol, 32767 is always set as the small hit reference value and is set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33421).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control in a special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state judgment value does not change due to the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value that changes according to the set value, the special state judgment value is changed according to the set value. Since the numerical range of can always be specified in the same range, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means is advantageous. While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control the advantageous state a plurality of times based on each numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are executed. Is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, so that the advantageous state determination means is the first of the determination random value and the advantageous state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Since it is only necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control the advantageous state only once based on the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, it is determined whether or not to control the advantageous state. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.
Further, for example, when a common numerical range of the special state determination value is provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, each numerical range of the determination random value and the special state determination value generated by the determination random value value generation means While it is necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control to the special state a plurality of times, in the present invention, the common numerical range of the special state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the common numerical range of the determination random value and the special state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Since it is only necessary to execute it once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state.

The gaming machine of the means 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 13.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player and a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. And
A setting value in a plurality of stages including at least an advantageous determination value and a disadvantage determination value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 10-32).
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 207SG154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 10-41) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 10-41) and the special state determining means for determining
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determining means, and the special state is determined based on the determination that the special state determining means controls the special state. The probability of being determined to control to the advantageous state is the number of advantageous state determination values corresponding to the set value, which is the normal state (for example, the normal state or the time saving state) corresponding to the normal number or the advantageous state. A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling a special state (for example, a probability change state) corresponding to a special number which is the number of advantageous state determination values increased with respect to the normal number based on the state. The part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in 5) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 to 10-20, the set value is set. The part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different due to the difference in the number of jackpot judgment values according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical range (for example, a range of 1020-1237, which is a common jackpot determination value) that is common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. Numerical range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to 1238) that is not set in the first common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value corresponding to each set value.
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, when the set value is 2 as shown in FIG. 10-17). Is a portion in which the range from the 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value).
The advantageous state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value in the predetermined numerical range regardless of whether it is the normal state or the special state (for example). , As shown in FIGS. 10-17 and 10-18, the numerical range of the jackpot is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is in the normal state or the probabilistic state. part),
The special state determination value is a second reference different from the first reference value in a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the special state in the set value having the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state. The set value set by the setting means and the same number are set regardless of whether the normal state or the special state is set so as to be a continuous second common numerical range from the value (for example,). As shown in FIGS. 10-17 to 10-20, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the numerical range of the jackpot determination value when 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of 1020 to 1346. In a range different from the numerical range of 1020 to 1674, if the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, 32767 is always small regardless of whether the set value or the gaming state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probability change state. The hit reference value is set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33094, and if the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the set value and the gaming state are in the normal state, the time saving state, or the probabilistic state. The part that is always set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33421 with 32767 as the small hit reference value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control in a special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state judgment value is not affected by the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value that changes according to the set value to be set, the special state judgment means is set to the set value. Since the numerical range of the special state determination value can always be specified within the same range, the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state can be reduced.
Further, since the numerical range of the special state determination value does not change according to the set value to be set, the special state determination means always sets the numerical range of the special state determination value regardless of the set value. Since the same numerical range may be specified, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, it is advantageous to the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means. While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control the advantageous state a plurality of times based on each numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are used. Is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, so that the advantageous state determination means is a common numerical value of the determination random value and the advantageous state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Since it is only necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control the advantageous state only once based on the continuous numerical range including the range and the non-common numerical range, the process of determining whether or not to control the advantageous state is performed. The load can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the second common numerical range of the special state determination value is provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, each numerical value of the determination random value and the special state determination value generated by the determination random value value generation means. While it is necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control the special state a plurality of times based on the range, in the present invention, the second common numerical range of the special state determination value is a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means controls the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the second common numerical range of the special state determination value. Since it is only necessary to execute the determination of whether or not it is performed once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state.

The gaming machine of the means 15 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 14.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 10-32)
A random number value generation means for determination (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a random number value for determination for determining whether or not to control in the advantageous state, and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 10-41) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the determination that the advantageous state determination means controls the advantageous state.
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 to 10-20, the set value is set. The part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different due to the difference in the number of jackpot judgment values according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237). ) Is set at least
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to each set value) that is not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set to include the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value corresponding to (values 2 to 6 excluding 1).
The common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 and 10-56, 1020 is used as a jackpot reference value, and 1020 to 1237. The part where the range is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value),
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical range (for example, FIGS. 10-55 and 10). As shown in −56, when the set value is 2 to 6, the range from 60000 to the value corresponding to the set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value with 60000 as the reference value).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range are set as the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, and only the non-common numerical range is changed to control the advantageous state for each set value. Since the probability of being played can be made different, it is possible to reduce the development load of the game machine regarding the set value. In particular, in the present invention, the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is set to the minimum value of the non-common numerical range and is set to a value larger than the maximum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, or is advantageous. By setting the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the state judgment value to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range and setting it to a value smaller than the minimum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, the non-common value is set according to the set value. Even if the number of advantageous state judgment values included in the numerical range increases, the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value do not overlap, so the development load of the gaming machine regarding the set value should be further reduced. Can be done.

The gaming machine of the means 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 14.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
One of the setting values of the plurality of stages having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to 6 which is the most advantageous setting value for the player. Setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIGS. 10-32)
A random number value generation means for determination (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a random number value for determination for determining whether or not to control in the advantageous state, and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 10-41) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the determination that the advantageous state determination means controls the advantageous state.
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 to 10-20, the set value is set. The part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different due to the difference in the number of jackpot judgment values according to),
As the advantageous state determination value, a common numerical range common to each set value that can be set by the setting means (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) in a predetermined numerical range. Non-common numerical range of jackpot determination values, which is a range from 1238 to a value corresponding to each set value (all values 1 to 6), which is different for each set value that can be set by the setting means. ) And is set,
The common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 and 10-56, 1020 is used as a jackpot reference value, and 1020 to 1237. The part where the range is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value),
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical range (for example, FIGS. 10-55 and 10). As shown in −56, when the set value is 2 to 6, the range from 60000 to the value corresponding to the set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value with 60000 as the reference value).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range are set as the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, and only the non-common numerical range is changed to control the advantageous state for each set value. Since the probability of being played can be made different, it is possible to reduce the development load of the game machine regarding the set value. In particular, in the present invention, the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is set to the minimum value of the non-common numerical range and is set to a value larger than the maximum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, or is advantageous. By setting the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the state judgment value to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range and setting it to a value smaller than the minimum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, the non-common value is set according to the set value. Even if the number of advantageous state judgment values included in the numerical range increases, the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value do not overlap, so the development load of the gaming machine regarding the set value should be further reduced. Can be done.

The gaming machine of the means 17 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 16.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player and a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. And
A setting value in a plurality of stages including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, a setting value which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player. A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIGS. 10-32).
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 207SG154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 10-41) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 10-41) and the special state determining means for determining
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determining means, and the special state is determined based on the determination that the special state determining means controls the special state. (For example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 to 10-20, the set value is set. The part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different due to the difference in the number of jackpot judgment values according to),
The advantageous state determination value has at least a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) common to each set value that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. Has been set and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to each setting) that is not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value.
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set so as to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, when the set value is 2, 1020 The range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, is set as a continuous numerical range),
The same number of the special state determination values is set in a continuous range from the range of the advantageous state determination value regardless of the setting value set by the setting means (for example, FIGS. 10-53 and 10). As shown in −54, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range including 328 judgment values in succession to the numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of the set value. part)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control in a special state.
In particular, in the present invention, since the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value and the numerical range of the special state determination value are continuously set, the determination random value generated by the determination random number value generation means is used to determine the advantageous state. Whether or not the value or the value is between the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state judgment value (whether or not the value is within the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value or the value within the numerical range of the special state judgment value When determining to control to an advantageous state or a special state based on (whether or not there is), the determination random value generated by the determination random value value generating means is the minimum value in the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value. Whether or not the value is between and the maximum value of the numerical range of the special state judgment value, or the judgment random value generated by the judgment random value value generation means is the maximum value of the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value. By determining whether or not the value is between the value and the maximum value in the numerical range of the special state determination value, it is possible to determine at once whether or not to control the advantageous state or the special state. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control and the processing load for determining whether or not to control a special state.

The gaming machine of the means 18 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 17.
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), which is an advantageous state (for example, for example) that is advantageous to the player. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state).
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 10-32)
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 207SG154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 10-41) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 10-41) and the special state determining means for determining
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determining means, and the special state is determined based on the determination that the special state determining means controls the special state. (For example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 to 10-20, the set value is set. The part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different due to the difference in the number of jackpot judgment values according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical range (for example, a range of 1020-1237, which is a common jackpot determination value) that is common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. Numerical range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to 1238) that is not set in the first common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value corresponding to each set value.
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, when the set value is 2 as shown in FIG. 10-17). Is a portion in which the range from the 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value).
As the special state determination value, regardless of the set value set by the setting means, from the second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range. The same number is set so that it is a continuous second common numerical range.
The advantageous state determination value is set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value in the predetermined numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, regardless of the set value. 32767 is set as a small hit reference value, and the range from 32767 to 33094 is set as a common numerical range of small hit determination values).
When the variable display of the first identification information is executed, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control the special state with the first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (for example). , As shown in FIGS. 10-17 and 10-18, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, the small hit game state is entered with 328 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. (Part for determining whether to control), when executing the variable display of the second identification information, whether or not to control the special state with the second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is determined. Judgment (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, the small hit judgment value is small with 655 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. The part that determines whether or not to control the winning game state),
Although the number of the first special state determination value and the second special state determination value are different, the setting having the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state so as to be a continuous numerical range from the common second reference value. The value is set in a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-17 to 10-20, when the variation special figure is the first special symbol, the small hit determination is made. The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of values is 328, and when the variable special figure is the second special symbol, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of small hit judgment values is 655, but small hits. The numerical range of the judgment value is small 32767 in a range different from the numerical range of 1020-1346, which is the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value in the probability variation state when 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a hit reference value, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, it is set in the numerical range of 32767 to 33094, and when the variable special figure is the second special symbol, it is set in the numerical range of 32767 to 33421. Part)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control in a special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state judgment value is not affected by the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value that changes according to the set value to be set, the special state judgment means is set to the set value. Since the numerical range of the special state determination value can always be specified within the same range, the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means is advantageous. While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control the advantageous state a plurality of times based on each numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are executed. Is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, so that the advantageous state determination means is the first of the determination random value and the advantageous state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Since it is only necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control the advantageous state only once based on the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, it is determined whether or not to control the advantageous state. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.
Further, for example, when a common numerical range of the special state determination value is provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, each numerical range of the determination random value and the special state determination value generated by the determination random value value generation means While it is necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control to the special state a plurality of times, in the present invention, the common numerical range of the special state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the common numerical range of the determination random value and the special state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Since it is only necessary to execute it once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state.
Further, for example, whether or not the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value (the determination random value is the advantageous state determination value). When determining to control to an advantageous state based on (whether or not the value is within the numerical range of), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value is the first reference value. The advantageous state determining means determines whether or not to control the advantageous state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the first reference value, depending on whether the state is the normal state or the special state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.
Further, for example, whether or not the judgment random value generated by the judgment random value generation means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state judgment value (the judgment random value is the special state judgment value). When determining to control to a special state based on (whether or not the value is within the numerical range of), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value is the second reference value. Since the special state determining means can determine whether or not to control the special state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the second reference value according to the fluctuation special figure. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state.

The gaming machine of the means 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 18.
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), which is an advantageous state (for example, for example) that is advantageous to the player. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state).
A setting value in a plurality of stages including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, a setting value which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player. A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIGS. 10-32).
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 207SG154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 10-41) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 10-41) and the special state determining means for determining
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determining means, and the special state is determined based on the determination that the special state determining means controls the special state. The probability of being determined to control to the advantageous state is the number of advantageous state determination values corresponding to the set value, which is the normal state (for example, the normal state or the time saving state) corresponding to the normal number or the advantageous state. A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling a special state (for example, a probability change state) corresponding to a special number which is the number of advantageous state determination values increased with respect to the normal number based on the state. The part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in 5) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 to 10-20, the set value is set. The part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different due to the difference in the number of jackpot judgment values according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical range (for example, a range of 1020-1237, which is a common jackpot determination value) that is common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. Numerical range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to each setting) that is not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value.
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, when the set value is 2 as shown in FIG. 10-17). Is a portion in which the range from the 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value).
As the special state determination value, regardless of the set value set by the setting means, from the second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range. The same number is set so as to be a continuous second common numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, regardless of the set value, 32767 is used as a small hit reference value from 32767 to 33094. The part where the range is set as the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value),
The advantageous state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value in the predetermined numerical range regardless of whether it is the normal state or the special state (for example). , As shown in FIGS. 10-17 and 10-18, the numerical range of the jackpot is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is in the normal state or the probabilistic state. part),
The number of the special state determination values is the same as the set value set by the setting means regardless of whether it is the normal state or the special state (for example, FIGS. 10-17 to 10-). As shown in 20, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the numerical range of 1020-1346 or 1020-1674, which is the numerical range of the big hit determination value when 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In a different range, if the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, 32767 is always set as the small hit reference value of 3267 to 33094 regardless of whether the set value or the gaming state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probabilistic state. It is set as a continuous numerical range, and if the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, 32767 is always the small hit reference value regardless of whether the set value or the game state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probabilistic state. Part set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33421),
The number of the special state determination values is the same regardless of the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-17 to 10-20, the numerical range of the small hit is If the variable special figure is the first special symbol, it is always set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33094 with 32767 as the small hit reference value regardless of the set value to be set, and the variable special figure is the second. If it is a special symbol, regardless of the set value, 32767 is always set as a small hit reference value as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33421),
When the variable display of the first identification information is executed, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control the special state with the first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (for example). , As shown in FIGS. 10-17 and 10-18, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, the small hit game state is entered with 328 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. (Part for determining whether to control), when executing the variable display of the second identification information, whether or not to control the special state with the second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is determined. Judgment (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, the small hit judgment value is small with 655 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. The part that determines whether or not to control the winning game state),
Although the number of the first special state determination value and the second special state determination value are different, the setting having the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state so as to be a continuous numerical range from the common second reference value. The value is set to a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the special state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-17 to 10-20, the variable special figure is the first special symbol. In some cases, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 328, and when the variable special figure is the second special symbol, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 655. However, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is different from the numerical range of 1020 to 1346, which is the numerical range of the large hit determination value in the probability variation state when 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the range, 32767 is set as a small hit reference value, and when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, it is set in the numerical range of 32767 to 33094, and when the variable special figure is the second special symbol, it is set to 32767 to 33421. The part set in the numerical range of)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control in a special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state judgment value is not affected by the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value that changes according to the set value to be set, the special state judgment means is set to the set value. Since the numerical range of the special state determination value can always be specified within the same range, the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means is advantageous. While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control the advantageous state a plurality of times based on each numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are executed. Is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, so that the advantageous state determination means is the first of the determination random value and the advantageous state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Since it is only necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control the advantageous state only once based on the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, it is determined whether or not to control the advantageous state. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.
Further, for example, when a common numerical range of the special state determination value is provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, each numerical range of the determination random value and the special state determination value generated by the determination random value value generation means While it is necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control to the special state a plurality of times, in the present invention, the common numerical range of the special state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the common numerical range of the determination random value and the special state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Since it is only necessary to execute it once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state.
Further, for example, whether or not the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value (the determination random value is the advantageous state determination value). When determining to control to an advantageous state based on (whether or not the value is within the numerical range of), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value becomes a predetermined reference value, which is advantageous. The state determining means determines whether or not to control the advantageous state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the predetermined reference value according to whether the state is the normal state or the special state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.
Further, for example, whether or not the judgment random value generated by the judgment random value generation means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state judgment value (the judgment random value is the special state judgment value). When determining to control to a special state based on (whether or not the value is within the numerical range of), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value is the second reference value. Since the special state determining means can determine whether or not to control the special state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the second reference value according to the fluctuation special figure. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state.

The gaming machine of the means 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 19.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player and a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. And
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 10-32)
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 207SG154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 10-41) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 10-41) and the special state determining means for determining
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determining means, and the special state is determined based on the determination that the special state determining means controls the special state. (For example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 to 10-20, the set value is set. The part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different due to the difference in the number of jackpot judgment values according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical range (for example, a range of 1020-1237, which is a common jackpot determination value) that is common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. Numerical range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to each setting) that is not set by the first common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value (value of 2 to 6 excluding 1).
The first common numerical range is set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, when the set value is 2, 1020 is the jackpot reference value. The part from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, is set as a continuous numerical range).
The non-common numerical range is set so as to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range (for example, FIG. 10-55). And as shown in FIGS. 10-56, when the set value is 2 to 6, the range from 60000 to the value corresponding to the set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value with 60000 as the reference value. Part),
The special state determination value is the first reference value and the specific reference value in a range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value regardless of the set value set by the setting means. The same number is set so as to be a continuous second common numerical value range from the second reference value different from the above (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 and 10-56, the numerical value of the small hit determination value. In a range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, regardless of the set value, if the variable special figure is the first special symbol, it is always set in the range of 32767 to 33094. If the variable special figure is the second special symbol, it is always set in the range of 3267 to 33421)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control in a special state. In particular, in the present invention, since it is always determined whether or not to control the special state based on the numerical range of the same small hit determination value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state. In addition, the amount of data related to the process of determining whether or not to control the special state can be suppressed.

The gaming machine of the means 21 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 19.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player and a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. And
Setting means that can be set to any of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, 1 to 6) having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, the setting value change shown by the CPU 103 in FIGS. The part that executes the process) and
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 207SG154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 10-41) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 10-41) and the special state determining means for determining
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determining means, and the special state is determined based on the determination that the special state determining means controls the special state. (For example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 to 10-20, the set value is set. The part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different due to the difference in the number of jackpot judgment values according to),
As the advantageous state determination value, a first common numerical range common to each set value that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237). And the non-common numerical value range that is different for each set value that can be set by the setting means (for example, 1238 to the value corresponding to each set value (all values 1 to 6)). Numerical range) and is set,
The common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, when the set value is 2, 1020 is set as the jackpot reference value. The part where the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, is set as a continuous numerical range),
The non-common numerical range is set so as to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the common numerical range (for example, FIGS. 10-55 and FIG. As shown in 10-56, when the set value is 2 to 6, the range from 60000 to the value corresponding to the set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value with 60000 as the reference value. ),
The special state determination value is the first reference value and the specific reference value in a range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value regardless of the set value set by the setting means. The same number is set so as to be a continuous common numerical range from the second reference value different from (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 and 10-56, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is , In a range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, regardless of the set value, if the variable special figure is the first special symbol, it is always set in the range of 32767 to 33094. If the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, it is always set in the range of 3267 to 33421)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control in a special state. In particular, in the present invention, since it is always determined whether or not to control the special state based on the numerical range of the same small hit determination value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state. In addition, the amount of data related to the process of determining whether or not to control the special state can be suppressed.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific items described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific items together with the invention-specific items described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each big hit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), (C). Is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for detachment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the received command buffer at the time of a moving prize. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a view showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory view of display contents. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration of a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the random value value determination processing at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows a part of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the lookahead notice setting process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the display pattern of the lookahead notice effect. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect determination processing in the rear variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect pattern of the jackpot suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. is there. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production pattern of the jackpot suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production pattern of the setting suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect decision processing in front part variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display when the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is decided, and (B) is the figure which shows the execution of the setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect in front variable display in the case, (C) is the figure which shows the effect pattern of the character effect and timer effect which is executed as suggestion effect in front variable display. (D) is a figure which shows the jackpot expectation degree of a character effect and a timer effect, and the execution expectation degree of a setting suggestion effect. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the character effect, (B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the timer effect, and (C) shows the content of each effect pattern of the timer effect. It is a figure. It is a figure which shows the effect execution period in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio as the suggestion effect in front variable display of a character effect and a timer effect in a modification, and the execution expectation degree of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the hold memory display and the effect image in the modification. It is a figure which shows the execution period of the setting suggestion effect in the variable display of a normal reach, a non-reach without shortening, and a non-shortening non-reach in a modification. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the feature part 131F. It is a figure which shows the general drawing process processing in a feature part 131F. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol start winning process in a feature part 131F. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the game information display part. It is a figure which shows the mode for each big hit type in a special symbol display device. It is a figure which shows the shift mode of the 1st hold indicator and the 2nd hold indicator. It is a figure which shows the mode for each big hit type in a round display. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a probabilistic state. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the 2nd special figure in a normal state or a time saving state. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the 2nd special figure in a probabilistic state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each big hit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), (C). Is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for detachment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an effect control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a view showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory view of display contents. It is a time chart which shows the display time of the item displayed on the display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of a display monitor. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing. (A) is a flowchart showing RAM clear processing, and (B) is a schematic diagram of RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off detection process. It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of a display monitor. (A) is a diagram showing the display mode of the display monitor at the time of cold start, and (B) shows the display mode of the display monitor when a setting value abnormality error occurs or when the power failure during the setting change is restored. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram showing a change in the display mode of the special symbol display device, the hold display device, the right-handed lamp, and the round display during the setting change processing, and (B) is a diagram showing a change in the display mode when a setting value abnormality error occurs or The change in the display mode of the special symbol display device when recovering from the power failure during the setting change is shown. It is a figure which shows a part of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the random value value determination processing at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display result determination module. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the information stored in RAM and the state which is cleared. It is explanatory drawing which shows the initial design for each received command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification mode at the time of activation of a pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example of the operation control at the time of non-detection and the operation control for actual operation confirmation. It is a figure which shows the operation speed in the operation of the operation control at the time of non-detection and the operation control for actual operation confirmation. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the change of a set value and the confirmation end timing of a set value, and the number of executions of a 1st movable body initialization process and a 2nd movable body initialization process. It is a figure which shows the display mode of an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off detection process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of an effect control process process. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in a modification. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in a modification. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in a modification. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value change processing in a feature part 10F. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value change processing in a feature part 10F. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop start processing in a feature part 10F. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop end processing in a feature part 10F. It is a figure exemplifying the effect control command in a feature part 40F. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main processing in a feature part 40F. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-side game stop processing in a feature part 40F. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table which is referred in the low probability state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table which is referred in a high probability state. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of hold display and active display in the low accuracy / low base state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of hold display and active display in the low accuracy / high base state. Yes, (C) is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of hold display and active display in a high accuracy / high base state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the game flow about each effect mode. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table referred to in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], and (B) is an explanation showing a fluctuation pattern determination table referred to in the first period [final fluctuation]. FIG. 6C is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table referred to in the second period. Special Figure 1 is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects after the end of the big hit game state. Special Figure 2 It is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects after the end of the big hit game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing at the time of a change start. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the execution / non-execution determination table of the first setting suggestion effect, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the execution / non-execution determination table of the cut-in notice effect, and (C) is the second setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution presence / absence determination table of. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode relating to the first setting suggestion effect in the first period, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode relating to the first setting suggestion effect in the second period. is there. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning the 2nd setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode regarding the continuous challenge production.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal pattern game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

A normal symbol display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)

The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol (a symbol that is out of the normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "out of the normal symbol". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". In addition, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big prize opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number cut (time cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called the low accuracy high base state, the probability variation state is called the high accuracy high base state, and the normal state is also called the low accuracy low base state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like, turning off the light, operating the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern is in the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as small hit game state) and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach off") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach off"). In addition, when the display result is "off", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination that is not a big hit combination ("reach loss"). The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as "") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "out of reach").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp on / off mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, see See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when it is set as "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or an outlier symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change process, the process of making settings for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is measured based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. Ends processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). In addition, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the jackpot middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the jackpot game state is terminated. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of the prize. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature section 153SG)
Next, the game machine in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-1 to 8-31.

First, FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-3, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 153SG001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board (gauge) constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 153SG003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 153SG003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 153SG003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 153SG003 centering on the left side and the door closing position which closes the front surface. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 153SG003a, and when the glass door frame 153SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the game machine frame 153SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a game machine clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and a player other than the clerk can open the game machine frame 153SG003 and glass. The door frame 153SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 153SG002L is a game area in which the (left-handed) game ball launched relatively weakly by the operation of the ball striking handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 153SG002R is the left game area 153SG002L by the operation of the ball striking handle 30. This is a game area in which a (right-handed) game ball launched more strongly than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 153SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

Further, a general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 153SG002L, and in the right game area 153SG002R, a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general winning ball device 6B are arranged from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 153SG002R. A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 153SG002L can win a prize in the first starting winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 153SG002R is variable. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10, and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is possible to pass through the passing gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 153SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. For this reason, the game ball flowing down the left game area 153SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 153SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It has become.

Further, a first reserved storage display area 153SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 153SG005U are set at two positions on the left and right below the display area of the image display device 5. In the first reserved storage display area 153SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 153SG005U, a reserved storage display for identifiablely displaying the reserved storage number (special figure reserved storage number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the main substrate 11 in the feature portion 153SG of the present embodiment is housed in the substrate case 153SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the state. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 153SG051 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the set value change state, and the like are used. A setting changeover switch 153SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value, and an open sensor 153SG090 that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 153SG003 are provided. Although details will be described later, the set value change state in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment is a state in which a clerk of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state). ).

The setting changeover main body portion provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting changeover switch 153SG052 is housed in the board case 153SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting changeover switch 153SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the board case 153SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 153SG201.

Since the board case 153SG201 having the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting changeover switch 153SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame 153SG003 when the gaming machine frame 153SG003 is closed. It can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame 153SG003. Further, since the lock switch 153SG051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 153SG051. Further, the lock switch 153SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later by using a setting key. Although the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, one key may be used in combination.

Further, in the board case 153SG201, a display monitor 153SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged. The display monitor 153SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case 153SG201. That is, the display monitor 153SG029 is arranged in front of the board case 153SG201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 153SG003 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 153SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, the pachinko game machine 1 has a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the game area) of the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment. 1 First special symbol display device 153SG004A capable of variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 153SG004B capable of variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st hold display capable of displaying 1st hold storage number Instrument 153SG025A, 2nd hold indicator 153SG025B capable of displaying the 2nd hold storage number, normal symbol display 153SG020 capable of executing variable display of the normal symbol, normal symbol hold indicator 153SG025C capable of displaying the normal symbol hold storage number, In the game state where the round display 153SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (big hit type) of the big hit game during the big hit game, and the game ball such as the high base state (time saving state) or the big hit game state is launched toward the right game area 153SG002R. A game information display unit 153SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 153SG 132 that lights up, a probability variation lamp 153SG 133 that lights up in the probability variation state, and a time reduction lamp 153SG 134 that lights up in the high base state (time reduction state) are collectively arranged.

The first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B are each composed of 8-segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B, if the variable display result of the special symbol is off or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

In the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 153SG004A has a variable display result with two types of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. Derived display is possible. Further, in the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 153SG004B is variablely displayed by two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. The result and derivation can be displayed.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B are all different, but the first special symbol display device 153SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed in the above and the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 153SG004B may overlap.

In the first hold indicator 153SG025A and the second hold indicator 153SG025B, LEDs of four segments are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. In these first hold display 153SG025A and second hold display 153SG025B, if the number of hold storage is one, only the LED at the left end is lit, and each time the number of hold storage increases, it is the second from the left. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LED on the hold display corresponding to the variable display is set in a predetermined shift direction (characteristic of the present embodiment) according to the decrease (consumption) of the hold memory. In the unit 153SG, the lights are turned off toward the left).

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure holding storage is preferentially executed. It has become like. Therefore, for example, when there is one 1st special figure hold memory and 2 2nd special figure hold memories (only the LED at the left end of the 1st hold indicator 153SG025A is lit and the 2nd hold is on. (When the two LEDs on the left of the display 153SG25B are lit), the first special figure hold is held after the second special figure hold memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory. Variable display based on memory is executed.

Further, the round display 153SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). As the jackpot types in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A which is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B which is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C which is a 15-round jackpot. Therefore, which segment of the segments constituting the round display 153SG131 is lit differs depending on the jackpot type.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED are included.

FIG. 8-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 153SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 8-4 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 153SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 153SG004B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number in order to display the special figure reserved storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (commands for designating a winning determination result) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" and the judgment result of the big hit type (probability change, non-probability change, etc.) as the judgment result at the time of winning. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating a determination result of whether the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is the variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. It is a command.

The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating the newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (recovery of power failure, also referred to as hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and started (cold start).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program to perform the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 8-5, in the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determination, the random value MR4 for determining the display result of the general map, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In the present embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 8-5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each random value is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 8-6 shows the fluctuation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, 1 variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a “small hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the super reach fluctuation patterns Super Reach α and Super Reach β Is set shorter than. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is In this case, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set to be "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, so that the big hit expectation is set to be high. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into, for example, non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, and the like. Rather than determining the variation patterns to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation patterns belonging to the determined type after determining them first, only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern type is provided to determine these fluctuations. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value for determining the pattern type, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the fluctuation content (effect content) is predetermined for each fluctuation pattern, but the present invention illustrates this. The variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value, even if the variation pattern is the same. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 out of normal reach, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. As a fluctuation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach out of reach, when the set value is 3, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to make a fluctuation pattern that is out of super reach.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as the work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the side of the main board 11 by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-7 to 8-11, which are prepared by the CPU 103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), and FIG. In addition to the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in -8 (A) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table and the small hit A variation pattern determination table, an out-of-bounds variation pattern determination table, a general map display result determination table (not shown), a general map variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value is composed of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. In other words, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the amusement park side. Become.

8-7 (A) and 8-7 (B) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. The feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment uses individual display result determination tables for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , The display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1253 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1383 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1272 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As described above, in each display result judgment table, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are set than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Probability to be determined (in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and set. Compared to 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the probability of being determined becomes high (in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1 / when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, the probability that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the case of the normal state or the time saving state. Is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the determination value becomes high.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the multiplying factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different (for example, setting). If the value is 1, the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is The magnification is about 1.56 times, and if the set value is 3, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value is set to be constant (for example, 5 times). May be good.

Further, in each display result determination table for the first special figure, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the gaming state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the first special regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that they have the same value, which is different from the display result judgment table for figures. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the gaming state is set to 1/100.

It should be noted that the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the set value. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be different depending on the set value. Further, the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" and the small hit gaming state is different according to the variable special map. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state may be the same probability regardless of the variable special figure.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to the "big hit" and "small hit" in each display result judgment table, the display result for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the determination table, the range of the hit determination values from 1020-1237 is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is to judge the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values up to 1020-1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while the small The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1346 is assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In addition, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6, and 32767 is set as the reference value of the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value) of 32767 to 33094. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of the hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is to judge the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values up to 1020-1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while the small The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1346 is assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the big hit judgment values are not included in the common numerical range. Numerical values within the range including the common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set based on the hit determination value 1020. The judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the continuous numerical range of 1 is based on the hit judgment value 32767 regardless of the game state and the set value (common). The variable display result is judged by using the judgment value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit judgment value.

Further, in each of these display result judgment tables, when the fluctuation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is Same). In addition, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, there is a probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the "big hit". Judgment values are assigned so that the lower the value and the larger the value of the set value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5> Set value 4> Set value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is decided to be A to jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 8-7 indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A or the second special symbol display device 153SG004B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 153SG004A or the second special symbol display device 153SG004B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

The feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment provides a total of six set values, 1 to 6, as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

8-8 (A) and 8-8 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 8-8 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 8-8 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is variably displayed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 8-9. In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, the jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state and the game shifts to the low probability high base state, and the jackpot game After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and the jackpot B and the jackpot C (also referred to as the probabilistic jackpot) for shifting to the high-accuracy high-base state are set.

The jackpot game state by "big hit A" is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Figure Ends when the game is in a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot B or the jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is the big hit B or the big hit C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs in.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is 2. There may be less than one type, or four or more types.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is assigned to jackpot A. 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is assigned to jackpot A. 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the winning opening in which the game ball has won is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. , The jackpot type is determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is not limited to this. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the variable display result to "big hit" and the variable display result to be "small hit". The jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is determined in advance and the deviation pattern judgment table used when it is decided in advance that the variable display result is "off" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random value within the range that the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIGS. 8-10 (A) and 8-10 (B), the jackpot variation pattern determination table is a jackpot variation pattern determination table (big hit A) used when the jackpot type is jackpot A. (For big hit) and the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (for big hit B and big hit C) used when the big hit type is for big hit B and big hit C are prepared in advance, and these big hit fluctuation pattern judgment tables (for big hit C) are prepared in advance. In the fluctuation pattern judgment table for (for A) and jackpot (for jackpot B and jackpot C), the fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), 1 to 400 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are normal reach jackpot fluctuation patterns (PB1). -1) is assigned, and 401 to 850 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). Assigned.

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), 1 to 200 of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997 are fluctuations in the normal reach jackpot. It is assigned to the pattern (PB1-1), and 201 to 550 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-). It is assigned to 3).

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern of small hits from 0 to 997 in the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 ( It is assigned to PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern of the small hit is 2 or more. Fluctuation pattern may be provided.

Further, the deviation pattern determination table includes the deviation pattern determination table A used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control, and the low base. The deviation pattern determination table B used when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and the deviation variation used when the total number of holding storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for deviation used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is implemented are prepared in advance.

In the deviation pattern determination table A, the non-reach deviation variation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), in the deviation pattern determination table A (for low-base medium total pending storage number of 1 or less), 1 to 450 out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997. Are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are out of super reach α. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) out of reach α and the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β is assigned as the determination value. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), in the deviation pattern determination table B (for 2 to 4 low-base medium total reserved storage numbers), 1 to 1 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997. Up to 500 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out of reach. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β.

Further, in the variation pattern determination table C for loss, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) out of reach α and the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β is assigned as the determination value. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (C), in the deviation pattern determination table C (for low-base medium total pending storage number of 5 or more), 1 to 550 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3. Are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-reach. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation variation pattern corresponding to the time reduction control are performed. (PA2-2), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (D), in the deviation pattern determination table D (for high base and medium), 1 to 550 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are non-reach deviation variations. It is assigned to the pattern (PA1-4), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) out of normal reach, and 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α. 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β.

As described above, when the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio for determining the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern is set higher than the ratio for determining the super reach variation pattern. When the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, 701 to 900 of the determination values are the fluctuation patterns of the super reach α deviation, and 901 to 997 are the deviation patterns of the super reach β, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. If each of the fluctuation patterns is assigned, that is, if the variable display result is out of alignment, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined at a common determination ratio, so that the variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is not executed. It is possible to prevent the effect from being reduced.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as the deviation pattern, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α deviation and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the deviation of the super reach β are completely the same between the set values. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α outlier and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of super reach β are between each set value. May differ by a small margin (for example, about 1%).

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. If the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination ratios of all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, and the fluctuation of either non-reach and normal reach may be the same. Only the pattern determination rate may be the same.

The non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter variation time than the non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 8-6). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By winning a start prize while the player is in the game, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize that is not stored on hold to occur, and when the number of stored memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long and the non-reach is out of reach. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes longer, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being less interesting due to the variable display not being executed.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 (A) to 8-11 (C), the variation is made by using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the total number of reserved storages. Although the form of determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first The variation pattern may be determined using a variation pattern determination table for deviation depending on the number of reserved memory of the special symbol and the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed).

Further, the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which there is a one-to-one correspondence between whether or not to execute the reach effect and which reach effect is to be executed for each determined fluctuation pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach effect based on the special figure variation time of the variation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach effect is executed. You may decide whether to do it by lottery.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8-1 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

Next, the display of the display monitor 153SG029 in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8-12 (A), the display monitor 153SG029 includes a first display unit 153SG029A, a second display unit 153SG029B, a third display unit 153SG029C, and a fourth display unit 153SG029D. The first display unit 153SG029A to the fifth display unit 153SG29E are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 153SG029A to the fifth display unit 153SG29E can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display different colors or so-called rainbows while changing these colors in an extremely short cycle.

The display control of the display monitor 153SG029 in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment is executed by using the areas not subject to the test in all the areas of the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko gaming machine 1. ..

As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (B) and 8-12 (C), the display monitor 153SG029 has a base value calculated in a normal state (low accuracy and low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states. Base L (real-time value during measurement), base 1 which is a base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each out 6000 balls in the first out 6000 balls in all game states, and base 1 in all game states. Base 2 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the second out 6000 balls, and the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the third out 6000 balls in the all-game state. It is possible to display the base 3 which is the base value calculated in. The base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 are displayed on the display monitor 153SG029 as a percentage.

When the base L is actually displayed on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 153SG029A and "L." is displayed on the second display unit 153SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "bL." Of the base L. Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 153SG029C and the fourth display unit 153SG029D. When the base 1 is displayed on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 153SG029A and "1." is displayed on the second display unit 153SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b1." Of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 153SG029C and the fourth display unit 153SG029D. When the base 2 is displayed on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 153SG029A and "2." is displayed on the second display unit 153SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b2." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 153SG029C and the fourth display unit 153SG029D. When the base 3 is displayed on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 153SG029A and "3." is displayed on the second display unit 153SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b3." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 153SG029C and the fourth display unit 153SG029D.

In the display monitor 153SG029 of the present embodiment, the control of sequentially displaying the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 is executed by the control of the main board 11 (CPU103). For example, the main board 11 executes control to switch the display of the display monitor 153SG029 in the order of base L → base 1 → base 2 → base 3 at 5-second intervals. The display color of each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in white, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. When it is "2", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in blue, and when the set value set on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in yellow. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in green, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4". If it is "5", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in red, and if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "6", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in purple. indicate. Therefore, the clerk of the amusement park can specify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 only by checking the display color of the display monitor 153SG029 without the CPU 103 executing the setting value changing process described later. ing.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 8-2 has an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation, for example, for effect control as shown in FIG. 8-13 (A). A data holding area 153SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 153SG190 shown in FIG. 8-13 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 153SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 153SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 153SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 153SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 153SG191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 153SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 153SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 153SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 153SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 153SG193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 153SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 153SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the data constituting the start winning command buffer 153SG194A as shown in FIG. 8-13 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 153SG194. The reception command buffer 153SG194A at the time of starting winning is stored in the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display are provided. In addition, the start winning command buffer 153SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, and the variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer 153SG194A are the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage separately is secured in association with the hold storage number notification command.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in a variable manner while being shifted upward one by one. It is designed to be cleared in the decorative symbol fluctuation stop processing executed when the is finished.

Further, the start winning command buffer 153SG194A in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment has a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the hold storage display in the pre-reading notice setting process (FIG. 8-18) described later. The storage area of the hold display flag in which is set is secured for each storage area (entry).

In the hold display flag, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold storage display is stored when the execution of the hold display notice effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process described later. As a result, when the hold storage display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D and the second hold storage display area 153SG005U, and the execution of the hold display notice effect is decided. Is "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (star)) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold memory display of a special mode (for example, a square (◇) or a star (☆)) different from the normal display mode. By setting "3" (blue camera) or "4" (red camera) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold memory display in a special mode (for example, a blue or red camera), it is usually set. The reserved storage display in a mode different from the display mode of is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 153SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 153SG005U, and there is a possibility that the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage display will be a big hit. It is foretold that there is a high possibility of reaching and a setting suggestion effect suggesting a set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is likely to be executed.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 153SG194A. Then, at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 153SG194A. I will go. At the time of starting winning, the start opening winning designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The symbol specification command, the variable category specification command, and the hold storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. 8-13 (B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the hold storage of the variation display that ended immediately before each time the variation display of the decorative symbol was started. The entry (entry with the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2" corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started is deleted. The stored contents of the entries after the hold storage of the variable display that starts are shifted from those stored in the entry corresponding to -1 ”. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed in the stored state shown in FIG. 8-13 (B), each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted and the buffer number is deleted. Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". Each command that is shifted and stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variablely displayed at that time.

Next, the game control main process in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-14 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (153SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (153SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether or not the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (153SGSa003; N) or the RAM 102 is not normal (153SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 153SGSa017, and if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (153SGSa003; Y, 153SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6, that is, whether the set value of a normal value is stored in the RAM 102 (153SGSa005).

If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is not any of 1 to 6 (153SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 153SGsa017, and if the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6 (153SGsa005; N). Y) indicates whether or not the setting value changing flag indicating that the setting value changing process described later was being executed before the power failure (the power failure occurred during the execution of the setting value changing process) is set. (153SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (153SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 153SGSa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear processing described later has been executed is set. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (153SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (153SGSa008).

When the clear switch is ON (153SGSa008; Y), the RAM clear flag is set and the process proceeds to 153SGSa011 (153SGSa010). When the clear switch is OFF (153SGSa008; N), 153SGSa010 is not executed and 153SGSa011 is set. move on.

In 153SGsa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa011). When the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor 153SG090 is ON (153SGSa012). When the release sensor 153SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the lock switch 153SG051 ON and the gaming machine frame 153SG003 open (153SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether or not (153SGSa013a).

When the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa013a; Y), the set value change process (153SGsa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to proceed to 153SGSa013d, and the RAM clear flag is set. If is not set (153SGSa013a; N), the set value confirmation process (153SGsa013c) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 153SGSa013d.

In the set value change process (153SGSa013b), the CPU 103 first displays the set value currently set on the display monitor 153SG029. Next, every time the setting changeover switch 153SG052 is operated, the setting value is updated and displayed on the display monitor 153SG029. Then, based on the fact that the lock switch 153SG051 is turned off, the set value displayed on the display monitor 153SG029 is updated and stored in the RAM 102, and the set value newly updated and stored in the RAM 102 can be specified. The command is output to the effect control CPU 120.

Further, in the set value confirmation process (153SGSa013c), the CPU 103 displays the set value currently set on the display monitor 153SG029. Then, the display of the set value on the display monitor 153SG029 may be terminated based on the fact that the lock switch 153SG051 is turned off.

When the lock switch 153SG051 is OFF (153SGSa011; N) or the release sensor is OFF (153SGSa012; N) in 153SGSa011, the process proceeds to 153SGSa013d without executing the processes of 153SGSa013a to 153SGSa013c.

In 153SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared (whether or not the RAM clear process (153SGSa009) is executed) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time ( 153SGSa013d). When the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (153SGSa013e) is executed and then the process proceeds to 153SGsa014. When the RAM clear flag is not set (153SGSa013d; N), the RAM clear process (153SGSa013e) Proceed to 153SGSa014 without executing.

In the RAM clear process (153SGSa013e), the CPU 103 executes a process of setting "00H" to all addresses except the address where the set value is stored and the address where the RAM clear flag is stored (set). .. That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in 153SGSa001 to 153SGSa013e and 153SGSa017 to 153SGSa021 described later, if there is no abnormality in the RAM 102, the address in which the set value is stored and the RAM clear flag are stored. It is designed to clear the contents of all addresses except the dress you are wearing.

In 153SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set again (153SGSa014). When the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa014; Y), the process proceeds to 153SGSa022, and when the RAM clear flag is not set (153SGSa014; N), the internal state of the main board 11 is stopped (power cut). Performs recovery processing to return to the state of (153SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be. Then, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered (started by hot start) in the state before the power failure, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 153SGSa028. (153SGSa016).

Further, in 153SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated (153SGSa017). When the clear switch is ON (153SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether or not the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa018) and whether or not the release sensor 153SG090 is ON (153SGSa019).

When the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa018; Y) and the release sensor 153SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or a normal setting value is not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a formal procedure by an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 153SG003 is opened and the lock switch 153SG051 is turned on, the pachinko game is operated while operating the clear switch. When the machine 1 is started), the set value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (153SGSa020), and if the set value changing flag is set, the set value changing flag is cleared (153SGSa021). Then, the above-mentioned processes of 153SGSa009 to 153SGSa016 are executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (153SGSa017; N), the lock switch 153SG051 is OFF (153SGSa018; N), and the release sensor 153SG090 is OFF (153SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 153SGSa031.

Further, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 on the assumption that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start (153SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer is set according to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (153SGSa023), and the cold start notification is started by starting blinking of all segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029. (153SGSa024).

After executing 153SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by -1 (153SGsa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (153SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer is not timer-out (153SGsa026; N), the processes of 153SGsa025 and 153SGsa026 are repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer is timer-out (153SGsa026; Y), all segments on the display monitor 153SG029. Ends blinking (153SGSa027) and proceeds to 153SGSa028.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, an example is exemplified in which all the segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029 are blinked over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029 may be blinked at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, at least a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029 may be turned on.

Then, in 153SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (153SGSa028) that initially sets the random number circuit 104, and causes the game control microcomputer 100 to periodically interrupt the timer at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). Set the built-in CTC register (153SGSa029) and allow interrupts (153SGSa030). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

Further, in the 153SGSa031, the CPU 103 refers to the effect control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error) and that the CPU 103 recovers from the power failure during the setting change described later. And sends an error specification command according to the abnormality of the set value (153SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (153SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by -1 (153SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (153SGSa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer is not timer-out (153SGSa034; N), the processes of 153SGsa033 and 153SGSa034 are repeatedly executed, and when the error notification execution waiting timer is timer-out (153SGsa034; Y), the set value error error occurs. 1st display unit 153SG029A, 2nd display unit 153SG029B, 3rd display unit 153SG029C, 4th display unit 153SG029D "E." is displayed in each of the above (153SGSa035).

Further, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B (153SGSa036), and plays a game via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a field management computer, and the process proceeds to 153SGSa032 (153SGSa037). After that, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the process of 153SGsa032-153SGSa037 until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off (until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the game hall), thereby displaying the display monitor 153SG029. , The first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B execute notification of the occurrence of an error.

As described above, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment recovers from an abnormal set value being set or a power failure during the change of the set value, the display monitor 153SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B are used to notify the occurrence of an error, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can generate an error or set a value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the power failure during the change has been restored. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and the recovery from the power failure while changing the set value can be recognized by the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It has become.

In the game control main process of the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-14, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 153SGSa008 (153SGSa008; Y) or the set value is being changed in 153SGSa021. Although the embodiment in which the RAM clearing process (153SGSa009) is executed after clearing the flag is illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clearing process is not limited thereto. Is not when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 153SGSa008 (153SGSa008; Y) or after clearing the setting value changing flag in 153SGSa021 but when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 153SGSa014 (153SGSa014). It may be executed in Y).

FIG. 8-15 is a flowchart showing a start winning determination process (S101) executed by the CPU 103 in the special symbol process process shown in FIG. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting port switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is (153SGS101). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (153SGS101; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (153SGS101; Y). For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (153SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown). When the first special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in 153SGS102 (153SGS102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "1" (153SGS103). ).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in 153SGS101 (153SGS101; N), or when the first special figure hold storage number reaches the upper limit value in 153SGS102 (153SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by, it is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is on (153SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (153SGS104; Y), the second special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (153SGS104; Y). For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (153SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown). When the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in 153SGS105 (153SGS105; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "2" (153SGS106). ).

After executing any of the processes of 153SGS103 and 153SGS106, the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the storage value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (153SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (153SGS108). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is a stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), may be updated so as to be added by 1.

After executing the process of 153SGS108, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit (not shown). Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for the purpose and the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination is extracted (153SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (153SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit (not shown), while when the start port buffer value is "2". , Numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit (not shown).

Numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variation display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of 153SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol and the variable display time.

Following the processing of the 153SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting port winning designation command according to the starting port buffer value is performed (153SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 Make settings to send the second start port winning designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

Following the processing of the 153SGS111, the winning random number value determination processing is executed (153SGS112). After that, for example, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. (153SGS113). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

After executing the process of 153SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (153SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (Y at 153 SGS 114), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (153 SGS 115), and then the process proceeds to 153 SGS 104. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 153 SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (S116), and then the start winning process is performed. finish. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 8-16 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed by the 153 SGS 112 of FIG. 8-15 as the winning random number value determination process. In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is set by the special symbol normal process (S110 in FIG. 5). It is determined whether or not to control the big hit game state as "big hit", and whether or not to control the special figure display result to the small hit game state as "small hit". Further, in the variation pattern setting process (S111 in FIG. 5), the determination of the variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination processing of the 153SGS 112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). Therefore, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the special symbol display result, whether or not it is determined that the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the special symbol display result, and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol. Determines whether or not is in the predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. As a result, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, at the start of the variable display. It is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display mode of which category, and based on this judgment result. Then, as will be described later, the hold display advance notice effect is executed by the effect control CPU 120 or the like.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 8-16 (A), the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in, for example, a game control flag setting unit (not shown), thereby pachinko. The current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is specified (153SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state.

Following the processing of 153SGS121, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 is selected and set (153SGS122). At this time, if the start port buffer value is 1, the CPU 103 sets the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), and if the start port buffer value is 2, FIG. 8-7. The display result determination table for the second special figure shown in (B) may be set.

After that, referring to the numerical range of the jackpot (judgment range of the jackpot) according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the set display result determination table, the special figure extracted by 153 SGS109 in FIG. 8-15. It is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is within the jackpot determination range (153SGS123). In the jackpot determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the display result determination table selected by the processing of 153SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and each determination value. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing them one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating a minimum value (lower limit value) and a maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. By comparing, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, since it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variation display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as “big hit”.

If it is determined by the 153SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot is not achieved during variable display (153SGS123; N), it is set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the set display result determination table. With reference to the numerical range of small hits (judgment range of small hits) according to the set value, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted by 153SGS109 in FIG. 8-15 is It is determined whether or not it is within the small hit determination range (153SGS124). In the small hit judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the display result judgment table selected by the processing of 153 SGS 122 are set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and each judgment value. It suffices if it can be determined whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing with and one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the small hit judgment range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random value MR1 and the minimum value or the maximum value of the small hit judgment range. It suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the small hit determination range by comparing with. At this time, since it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the small hit determination range, it can be determined that the variation display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as “small hit”.

When it is determined by the 153SGS124 that it is not within the small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the small hit does not occur during the variable display (153SGS124; N), the variable display result becomes "missing". The transmission setting of the symbol designation command is executed (153SGS125), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (153SGS126). If the time reduction flag is not set (153SGS126; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set (153SGS127), and if the time reduction flag is set (153SGS126; Y), the deviation pattern is changed. The determination table D is selected and set (153SGSS128).

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), the deviation pattern determination table A is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (D), the deviation pattern determination table D is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the game state is a high base state in which the time saving control is executed. is there.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, in addition to the deviation pattern determination table A and the deviation pattern determination table D, the deviation used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4. The variation pattern determination table B for deviation and the variation pattern determination table C for deviation used when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 are prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. 8-11, these are out of alignment. Of the fluctuation pattern judgment tables A to C, in the deviation pattern judgment table A, a value from 0 to 450 within the range that the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern judgment can take is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern. In the deviation pattern determination tables B and C, a value exceeding 0 to 450 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. On the other hand, in the deviation pattern determination tables A to C, values from 701 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach within the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take.

Therefore, in the 153 SGS 132 described later, by determining the variation pattern (variation category) using the deviation pattern determination table A, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always performed even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination. Since it is a non-reach or super-reach variation pattern, the determination at the time of starting winning is performed using the deviation pattern determination table A.

As shown in FIG. 8-16 (A), when the 153SGS123 determines that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot during variable display (153SGS123; Y), the jackpot type determination The jackpot type is determined based on the random value MR2 for (153SGS130). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that composes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

Further, the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the jackpot type determined in the 153SGS130 is executed (153SG131), and the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern to any one of a plurality. Set (153SG132).

Further, when it is determined by the 153SGS124 that the small hit is within the small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the small hit is obtained during the variable display (153SGS124; Y), a symbol designation command corresponding to the small hit type is transmitted. Execute the setting (153SG129).

After executing any of the processes of 153 SGS 127, 153 SGS 128, 153 SGS 129, and 153 SGS 132, the numerical data showing the fluctuation pattern judgment table set in the processes of 153 SGS 127, 153 SGS 128, 153 SGS 129, and 153 SGS 132 and the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern judgment. Is used to determine the variation category according to the range of determination values including the random value MR3 (153SGS133). In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (B), when at least the variable display result is "off", the "non-reach" is common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. Variable categories that are variable display modes, variable categories that are variable display modes of "super reach", and "others" that are variable display modes other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hits) It suffices if a variable category is provided and it can be determined whether or not the variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, after making a setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the processing of 153SGS132 to the effect control board 12 (153SGS134), the random number value determination processing at the time of winning is terminated.

FIG. 8-17 is a part of the flowchart of the effect control process process (S76) in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment. In the effect control process process in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, after the pre-reading notice setting process (S161) shown in FIG. 7 is executed, it is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 153SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 153SG005U. Any one of S170 to S177 shown in FIG. 7 after executing the hold display update process for updating the display mode and the number of display of the hold storage display according to the start winning command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. 8-13 (B). It is designed to execute the processing of.

FIG. 8-18 is a flowchart showing a lookahead advance notice setting process (S161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 8-17. In the lookahead advance notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the contents of the start winning command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. 8-13 (B) (153SGS241), and there is an entry in which the hold display flag is not set. Whether or not it is determined (153SGS242). If there is no entry for which the hold display flag is not set, the read-ahead notice setting process is terminated. If there is an entry for which the hold display flag is not set, the value of the hold display flag is already set to one of 1 to 4. It is determined whether or not there is an entry set (153SGS243).

If there is already an entry in which the value of the hold display flag is set to any of 1 to 4, that is, if the hold display notice effect has already been executed, the hold display flag is set in the entry (153SGS242). Set the hold display flag of (entry determined not to be present) to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the hold display notice effect (that is, it is decided to display the hold storage display corresponding to the entry with "○"). The pre-reading notice setting process is terminated (153SGS251). As will be described later, the case where there is an entry in which the value of the hold display flag is already set to any of 1 to 4 is the case where the hold display notice effect has already been executed. That is, in the process of 153SGS243, when the hold display notice effect is already executed, the execution of the new hold display notice effect is restricted.

If there is no entry set in any of the values 1 to 4 of the hold display flag in 153SGS243, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the entry (in 153SGS242, the hold display flag is not set). ) Is determined whether or not the symbol designation command indicates a big hit (153SGS244). When the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a jackpot, the jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command of the entry (153SGS245), and extracted from, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 153SG193. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the hold display notice effect and the jackpot type specified in 153SGS245, by referring to the hold display notice effect determination table (not shown), the presence / absence of execution of the hold display notice effect and the hold display The display pattern when the advance notice effect is executed is determined (153SGS246).

In 153SG246, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the hold display notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 8-19 (A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-19 (A), the presence / absence of the hold display notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are different depending on the jackpot type specified in the processing of 153SGS245.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, four types of display patterns (notice types) of the hold display notice effect are provided: display pattern α, display pattern β, display pattern γ, and display pattern δ. Of these, when the display pattern of the hold display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D or the second hold storage display area 153SG005U as a white square (◇). When the display pattern of the hold display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D or the second hold storage display area 153SG005U in a white star shape (☆). When the display pattern of the hold display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern γ, the hold storage display is displayed on the first hold storage display area 153SG005D or the second hold storage display area 153SG005U by the blue camera, and the hold display is displayed. When the display pattern of the advance notice effect is determined to be the display pattern δ, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D or the second hold storage display area 153SG005U by the red camera. When it is decided not to execute the hold display notice effect, the hold storage display is displayed in a white circle (◯) in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D or the second hold storage display area 153SG005U.

Here, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (A), when the jackpot type is jackpot A (non-probability variable jackpot), non-execution of the hold display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and a rate of 55%. The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern α is decided, the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided at a rate of 20%, and the hold display notice effect in the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 10%. Is decided, and the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is decided at a rate of 10%. In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C (probability variation jackpot), non-execution of the hold display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and the hold display notice effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 20%. Execution is decided, execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided at a rate of 55%, execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 10%, and execution is decided at a rate of 10%. The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined.

Returning to 153SGS244, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the variation category from the variation category specification command of the entry (153SGS248) when the symbol designation command of the entry is a miss or a small hit, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the effect control. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the hold display notice effect extracted from the random counter of the counter setting unit 153SG193 and the big hit type specified in 153SGS249, refer to the hold display notice effect determination table at the time of small hit / miss (not shown). By doing so, it is determined whether or not the hold display notice effect is executed and the display pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (B), when the variable display result is out of alignment and the variable category is non-reach, the non-execution of the hold display notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern α is decided at a rate of 5%, the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 0%. The execution of the hold display notice effect is determined, and the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is out of order or small hit and the variable category is other (when the normal reach is out of order or small hit), it is decided that the hold display notice effect is not executed at a rate of 75%, and 20%. The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern α is decided at the ratio, the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided at the ratio of 5%, and the hold display notice effect in the display pattern γ is decided at the ratio of 0%. The execution of the effect is determined, and the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is out of alignment and the variable category is super reach, it is decided that the hold display notice effect is not executed at a rate of 55%, and the hold display notice effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 25%. Execution is decided, execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided at a rate of 10%, execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 5%, and execution is decided at a rate of 5%. The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 8-19 (A) and 8-19 (B), in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when the hold display notice effect is executed, the hold display notice effect is not executed. When the jackpot game state is controlled at a higher rate than when the hold display notice effect is executed in the display pattern β, the hold display notice effect is executed in the display pattern α. The jackpot type is set to be jackpot B or jackpot C (probability variation jackpot) at a high rate. With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the big hit type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. Is a probabilistic jackpot, and the player's expectation of becoming a probabilistic jackpot can be increased.

Since the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ are display patterns that suggest the execution of the setting suggestion effect described later, the degree of expectation that the display pattern α and the display pattern β are controlled to the big hit game state (big hit expectation). Is not set to be high, and the degree of expectation (probability variation big hit expectation) that the big hit type is big hit B or big hit C is the same.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the fluctuation patterns that can be determined when the variable display result is a big hit are the fluctuation patterns of normal reach and super reach, and as shown in FIG. 8-19, the display pattern γ and The case where the display pattern δ is determined is the case where the variable display result is a big hit or the variable display result is out of order and the variable category is super reach. That is, it is also suggested that the hold storage display of the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ (a mode of the blue or red camera) is a variable display of super reach that can execute the setting suggestion effect described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (B), when the fluctuation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time is shorter than the super reach. The hold memory display is not displayed in the form of a blue or red camera.

Returning to FIG. 8-18, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the hold display advance notice effect is determined after the processing of the 153SGS246 or 153SGS249 is executed (153SGS250). If it is decided to execute the hold display notice effect, the hold display flag of the entry is set to a value (any of 1 to 4) corresponding to the display pattern determined by the processing of 153SGS246 or 153SGS249 and read ahead. The notice setting process is terminated (153SGS247). If it is decided not to execute the hold display notice effect, the hold display flag of the entry is set to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the hold display notice effect, and the lookahead notice setting process is terminated ( 153SGS251).

FIG. 8-20 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is set (153SGS271). When the first variable start command reception flag is set (153SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer (not shown) are set. Various command data and various flags stored in association with each other (that is, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first special symbol being variably displayed) in the first to fourth first special figure hold storage The corresponding various command data and various flags) are shifted upward by one buffer number (153SGS272). Note that the contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 153SGS271 (153SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273). If the second variation start command reception flag is not set (153SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273; Y), the figure is shown. No start The various command data and various flags (that is, variable display is being displayed) stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the received command buffer at the time of winning. Various command data and various flags corresponding to the second special symbol (various command data and various flags corresponding to the first to fourth second special symbol hold storage) are shifted upward by one buffer number. (153SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing the 153SGS272 or 153SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (153SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (153SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. To do.

In the feature unit 153SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, three symbols as even symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination of the aligned decorative symbols (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, "111", "11", " It is determined from a combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to jackpot C, a combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbol) in which three symbols are aligned with "7" is determined as a stop symbol. To do. In addition, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, the chance eye indicating that it is a small hit as a stop symbol (third symbol is under a specific rule). It is determined from "334", "556", "778", etc.) that are not uniform. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the deviation, it is a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are not uniform as the stop symbol, and the combination other than the above-mentioned chance eyes (Out of design) is decided.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a stop symbol determination table in which random numbers for determining stop symbols are extracted and data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (153SGS277). If the variable display variation pattern is not the super reach variation pattern, the process proceeds to 153SGS285. If the variable display variation pattern is the super reach variation pattern, the rear variable display suggestion effect is displayed during the variable display reach effect. Is executed (153SGS278), which determines whether or not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect and which effect is to be executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect (153SGS278). That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in 153SGS277 to 153SG278, the rear variable display suggestion effect (big hit suggestion effect or setting suggestion effect) is a variable pattern of the super reach variation with a long special figure variation time. It can be executed only on the display, and is not executed on the variable display of the normal reach and non-reach fluctuation patterns with a short special figure fluctuation time.

In the variable display of the super reach in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-28, the variable display result becomes a big hit as a suggestion effect during the front variable display from the start timing of the variable display. It is possible to execute a character effect suggested by the character displayed on the image display device 5 or a timer effect suggesting that the variable display result is a big hit and a period until the start of execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. , A setting that suggests a jackpot suggestion effect that suggests that the variable display result is a jackpot or a setting value that is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display during the reach effect that is the latter half of the variable display. Suggestive effects can be performed. That is, the process of 153SGS278 is a process of determining whether or not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect and whether to execute the jackpot suggestion effect or the setting suggestion effect during the reach effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect. ..

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the rear variable display suggestion effect (either the jackpot suggestion effect or the setting suggestion effect) is determined in the process of the 153SGS278 (153SGS279). If it is decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of 153SGS278, the process proceeds to 153SGS285. The front variable display suggestion effect determination process for determining whether to execute the character effect or the timer effect as the variable display suggestion effect is executed (153SGS280). That is, the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment does not determine the execution of the front variable display suggestion effect unless the execution of the rear variable display effect is determined, that is, the setting suggestion effect cannot be executed. In the variable display of reach and normal reach, the timer effect and the character effect are not executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the character effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display (153SGS281). When it is decided to execute the character effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the period until the start of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display on the timer for waiting for the suggestion effect during the rear variable display (as shown in FIG. 8-28 (A)). Set the value according to (5 seconds after the start of the reach effect) and proceed to 153SG285 (153SGS282), and if it is decided to execute the timer effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, wait for the suggestion effect start during the rear variable display. During variable display at the rear of the timer, the period until the start of the suggestion effect (as shown in FIG. 8-28 (B), a value corresponding to the effect pattern of the timer effect (specifically, the effect pattern of the timer effect is the effect for 25 seconds). If the period is pattern TS-1, 5 seconds after the start of the reach effect, and if the timer effect pattern is the pattern TS-2, which is the effect period of 30 seconds, 10 seconds after the start of the reach effect). ) To proceed to 153SGS285 (153SGS283).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the fluctuation pattern in the 153 SGS 285. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (153SGS286).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like are arranged in order in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (153SGS287). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 153SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, while the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (153SGS288). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (153SGS289). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Each time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal, whereby variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (153 SGS290).

FIG. 8-21 is a flowchart showing a suggestion effect determination process (153SGS278) during the rear variable display in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 8-20. In the rear variable display suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-21, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the start winning command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. 8-13 (B) and has a hold display flag corresponding to the variable display. Specify the value of (153SGS301). In this process, when the first variable display start command reception flag is set, the value of the hold display flag of the entry of "1-0" of the start winning command buffer 153SG194A is specified, and the second variable is displayed. When the display start command reception flag is set, the entry of "2-0" in the start winning command buffer 153SG194A may be specified.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect and the effect to be executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect based on the value of the hold display flag specified in 153SGS301 (153SG302).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-22 (A), when the value of the hold display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "0", that is, the hold display notice effect is executed for the variable display. If not, 90% of the respondents decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect, 10% decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, and 0% decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect. Set as a suggestion effect during variable display Determines to execute the suggestion effect. Further, when the value of the hold display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "1" or "2", that is, the hold storage display is displayed as a white square or a star as a hold display notice effect for the variable display. If so, the non-execution of the rear variable display suggestion effect is decided at a rate of 50%, the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is decided as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a rate of 50%, and the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is decided at a rate of 0%. Set as a suggestion effect during variable display at the rear Determines to execute the suggestion effect.

Further, when the value of the hold display flag specified in the 153 SGS 301 is "3", that is, when the hold storage display is displayed by the blue camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, 30 %% Decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect, 35% decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, and 35% decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect. Decide to execute the setting suggestion effect. Then, when the value of the hold display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "4", that is, when the hold storage display is displayed by the red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, it is 0. %% Decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect, 30% decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, and 70% decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect. Decide to execute the setting suggestion effect.

That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when the hold display notice effect is executed for the variable display, it is more than the case where the hold display notice effect is not executed for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined at a high rate. Further, when the hold storage display is displayed by the blue or red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the hold display flag is "3" or "4"), It is higher than the case where the hold memory display is displayed as a white square or a star as a hold display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the hold display flag is "1" or "2"). It was set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display was determined by the ratio, and the hold memory display was displayed as a white square or star as a hold display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the setting suggestion effect is decided as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than the case.

In addition, pay attention to the case where the hold storage display is displayed by the blue or red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the hold display flag is "3" or "4"). Then, if the hold storage display is displayed on the red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, the hold memory display is displayed on the blue camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. The camera is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined at a higher rate than when it is displayed, and the hold memory display is blue as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than the case where it is displayed in.

From the above, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when the hold memory display is displayed in a quadrangle or a star shape as a hold display notice effect for the variable display, it is used as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display. While it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed, the hold memory display is displayed by the blue or red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. In that case, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the hold storage display is displayed on the red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, the hold memory display is displayed on the blue camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. Since the ratio of the setting suggestion effect being executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect is higher than the case where the setting suggestion effect is executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect, the game is further played. It is possible to draw people's attention.

Returning to FIG. 8-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined in the process of the 153SGS 302 (153SGS303). If it is decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of 153SGS302, the rear variable display suggestion effect determination process is terminated, and if it is decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of 153SGS302, further. , 153 SGS 302 determines whether or not the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display (153SGS304).

When it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of 153SGS302, the effect pattern of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined and stored based on the variable display result, and the rear variable display suggestion effect determination process is performed. Finish (153SGS305).

As the effect patterns that can be determined in the processing of the 153 SGS 305, as shown in FIG. 8-22 (B), a total of three effect patterns from pattern AS-1 to pattern AS-3 are provided. Among these effect patterns, pattern AS-1 is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: low) suggesting that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit (big hit expectation) is the lowest, and pattern AS-2 is It is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: medium) that suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit is higher than that of the pattern AS-1, and the pattern AS-3 has the highest ratio of the variable display result to a big hit. It is a production pattern (big hit expectation: high) that suggests that it is high.

Then, in the above-mentioned processing of 153SGS305, as shown in FIG. 8-23, when the variable display result is a big hit, the effect pattern of the big hit suggestion effect is changed to the pattern AS-1 at a rate of 10%. Is determined to be pattern AS-2 at a rate of 30%, and pattern AS-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

On the other hand, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display in the processing of the 153SGS 302, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the RAM 122 and sets a value (pachinko gaming machine 1) from the set value designation command received from the CPU 103. (Set value set in) is specified (153SGS306). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stores the effect pattern of the setting suggestion effect based on the specified set value, and ends the suggestion effect determination process during the rear variable display (153SGS307).

As the effect patterns that can be determined in the 153SG 307, as shown in FIG. 8-22 (B), a total of five patterns from the pattern SS-1 to the pattern SS-5 are provided. Of these patterns SS-1 to pattern SS-5, pattern SS-1 suggests that the set value may be an odd number (for example, 1, 3, 5), and pattern SS-2 has an even number of set values (for example, 1, 3, 5). For example, the pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility of 2, 4, 6), and the pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility that the set value is equal to or higher than the intermediate setting (for example, 3 or 5) closer to the odd number. Suggests that the set value may be greater than or equal to the even-numbered intermediate setting (eg, 4 or 6), and pattern SS-5 suggests that the set value may be the highest setting (eg, 6).

The patterns SS-1 and SS-2 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any of 1 to 4 (low setting), and therefore, any of the set values 5 and 6 (high setting). It is said that the degree of expectation is low, and for pattern SS-3 and pattern SS-4, when the set value is either 5 or 6, it is determined at a high rate, so that the set value 5 and It is said that the expectation of being 6 is high.

In the feature unit 153SG, the set values 1 to 4 are set as low settings and the set values 5 and 6 are set as high settings, but the set values 1 to 3 may be set as low settings and the set values 4 to 6 may be set as high settings. Then, the execution ratio of the effect pattern may be set with the setting values 1 and 2 being the low setting, the setting values 3 and 4 being the intermediate setting, and the setting values 5 and 6 being the high setting.

In the processing of the above-mentioned 153SGS307, as shown in FIG. 8-24, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern at a ratio of 60% to the pattern SS-. Determined to be 1, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-3 at a rate of 9%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 6%, pattern at a rate of 0% Decide on SS-5. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 60%, and 6 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 9% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 0% determines the pattern SS-5. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 50%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and 20 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 10% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 0% determines the pattern SS-5.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 50%, and 10 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 20% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 0% determines the pattern SS-5. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 30%, and 30 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 20% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 0% determines the pattern SS-5. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and 15 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 30% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 5% determines the pattern SS-5.

As described above, in the feature unit 153SG, it is suggested that the set value is one of 1 to 4 by executing the set value suggestion effect in the pattern SS-1 or the pattern SS-2, and the set value suggestion is made. It is suggested that the set value is 5 or 6 by executing the effect in the pattern SS-3 or the pattern SS-4. Then, when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern SS-5, it is confirmed that the set value is 6.

FIG. 8-25 is a flowchart showing a front variable display suggestion effect determination process (153 SGS280) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 8-20. In the front variable display suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-25, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result of the variable display (153SGS311). In addition, it is determined whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display (153SGS312).

If it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, whether or not the front variable display suggestion effect is executed and the suggestion during the front variable display based on the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect and the variable display result. The effect to be executed as the effect is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (153SGS313). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 40%, and a rate of 30%. Determines the execution of the character effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, and determines the execution of the timer effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display at a rate of 30%. If the variable display result is incorrect, 70% of the time, 70% of the time, the non-execution of the front variable display suggestion effect is decided, and 25% of the time, the character effect is decided as the front variable display, the suggestion effect. Then, at a rate of 5%, the execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display.

That is, when the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is out of order. The execution of the suggestion effect is determined, and if the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the character effect and the execution of the timer effect are determined at the same ratio as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, while the variable display result. If is off, the execution of the character effect is determined at a higher rate than the execution of the timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display, that is, the jackpot expectation of the timer effect is higher than the jackpot expectation of the character effect. It is set.

Further, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the rear variable display suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion effect and executes the front variable display suggestion effect based on the variable display result. The presence / absence and the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during the variable front display are determined from the character effect and the timer effect (153SGS314). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (B), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 30%, and the rate is 0%. Determines the execution of the character effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, and determines the execution of the timer effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display at a rate of 70%. If the variable display result is out of alignment, 80% of the time, 80% of the time, the non-execution of the front variable display suggestion effect is decided, and 0% of the time, the character effect is decided as the front variable display. Then, at a rate of 20%, the execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display.

That is, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is decided as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is out of order. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect is determined, and the execution of the character effect is not determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display regardless of whether the variable display result is a big hit or not. That is, the jackpot expectation of the timer effect is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the character effect.

For this reason, when the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the timer effect is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is out of order as a result. When the timer effect is executed as the effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the variable display result becomes a big hit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-25, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined after the execution of the 153 SGS 313 or the 153 SGS 314 (153 SGS 315). If it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the suggestion effect determination process during the front variable display is terminated, and if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the front part is further determined. It is determined whether or not the execution of the character effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the variable display (153SGS316).

If the execution of the character effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the effect pattern of the character effect is determined and stored based on the variable display result, and the suggestion effect determination process during the front variable display is terminated. (153SGS317).

As a character effect effect pattern that can be determined in the process of 153 SGS317, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (C), a total of two effect patterns, pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2, are provided. .. Among these effect patterns, pattern CS-1 is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit by displaying the character A (not shown) on the image display device 5 is the lowest. Yes, the pattern CS-2 is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: medium) suggesting that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit by displaying the character B (not shown) on the image display device 5 is higher than that of the pattern CS-1. ).

Therefore, in the processing of the 153SGS317, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern of the character effect to the pattern CS-1 at a rate of 20%. Is determined, and the pattern CS-2 is determined at a rate of 80%. On the other hand, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the effect pattern of the character effect is determined to be pattern CS-1 at a rate of 80%, and to pattern CS-2 at a rate of 20%.

Further, when the execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the timer effect based on the effect determined to be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. Is determined and stored, and the suggestion effect determination process during the variable display of the unit is terminated (153SGS318).

As a timer effect effect pattern that can be determined in the processing of the 153 SGS 318, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (C), a total of two effect patterns, pattern TS-1 and pattern TS-2, are provided. Among these effect patterns, the pattern TS-1 suggests that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit in the image display device 5 is higher than that of the character effect patterns CS-1 and pattern CS-2 (big hit expectation: high). ) And the effect that suggests the period until the start of execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display for 25 seconds together with the image of the character X. The pattern TS-2 is the ratio at which the variable display result becomes a big hit in the image display device 5. Is higher than the pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 of the character effect (big hit expectation: high), and the period until the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is started for 25 seconds together with the image of the character Y. (See FIGS. 8-27 (C), 8-29 (D), and 8-29 (E)).

Therefore, in the processing of the 153SGS318, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (B), when the rear variable display suggestion effect whose execution is determined is the jackpot suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 produces a timer effect. The pattern is determined to be pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80% and to pattern TS-2 at a rate of 20%. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80% and the pattern TS- at a rate of 20% when the suggestion effect during the rear variable display whose execution is determined is a setting suggestion effect. Decide on 2.

That is, when the timer effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2 rather than in the pattern TS-1 (that is, the timer). When the effect period of the effect is long and the character B is displayed on the image display device 5 rather than the character A), the rate at which the set suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is set higher. Therefore, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the player can pay attention to the effect period of the timer effect and the character displayed on the image display device 5. Further, when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, it is possible to expect the player to execute the setting suggestion effect as compared with the case where the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As described above, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (D), when the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect, the front variable display suggestion effect is performed. The jackpot expectation is set higher than when the character effect is executed, and the setting suggestion is set as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect. The production is to be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-20 to 8-28, when the execution of the front variable display suggestion effect during the variable display is determined, the effect control CPU 120 is determined in the variable display effect process (S172). Process data corresponding to the effect pattern of the suggestion effect during the front variable display may be set, and the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data according to the process timer in the subsequent variable display effect process (S172). Further, when it is determined to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect during the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the rear variable display suggestion effect start waiting timer every time the variable display process is executed. Then, based on the value of the timer for waiting for the suggestion effect during the rear variable display to become 0, the process data corresponding to the determined effect pattern of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is set. Then, in the subsequent variable display effect processing (S172), the effect device may be controlled according to the contents of the process data according to the process timer.

As shown in FIGS. 8-28 (A) and 8-28 (B), the jackpot suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect in the feature unit 153SG are during the execution period of the reach effect. It is executed for 7 seconds, which is a period longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 8-6). Therefore, even if the player takes his eyes off the image display device 5 for a moment, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the jackpot suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect.

Next, the effect mode during the variable display in the feature unit 153SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-29 to 8-31. First, as shown in FIGS. 8-29 (A) and 8-29 (B), a new start prize is generated during the variable display, and the hold memory display is displayed as a look-ahead notice effect based on the start prize. When the pattern is determined to be the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ, a new hold storage display is displayed in the mode of a blue or red camera in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D and the second hold storage display area 153SG005U. ..

Then, as shown in FIGS. 8-29 (C) to 8-29 (E), as a new variable display, when the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display, which is the mode of the camera, is started, the front part The timer effect as a suggestion effect is started during the variable display. At this time, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is the pattern TS-1, the image 153SG005X of the character X is displayed on the left side of the image display device 5 and the rear part is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-29 (D). The update display of the timer for 25 seconds, which is the period until the suggestion effect during the variable display, is started. Further, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is the pattern TS-2, as shown in FIG. 8-29 (E), the image 153SG005Y of the character Y is displayed on the left portion of the image display device 5, and the rear portion is variable. The update display of the timer for 30 seconds, which is the period until the suggestion effect during display, is started.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 8-30 (F) to 8-30 (H), when the variable display progresses together with the update display of the timer up to the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the super reach effect is started. Then, when the timer reaches 0 seconds during the execution of the super reach effect (the timer effect ends), the jackpot suggestion effect or the setting suggestion effect is started as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display.

Specifically, when the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, if the determined effect pattern is pattern AS-1, as shown in FIG. 8-30 (I). A message indicating that the jackpot expectation is low, such as "chance!", Is displayed on the image display device 5, and if the determined production pattern is pattern AS-2, it is shown in FIG. 8-30 (J). As described above, if a message indicating that the jackpot expectation such as “hot!” Is higher than that of the pattern AS-1 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the determined effect pattern is the pattern AS-3, FIG. As shown in −30 (K), a message indicating that the jackpot expectation such as “super hot!” Is higher than that of the pattern AS-2 is displayed on the image display device 5.

On the other hand, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the effect pattern of the setting suggestion effect is as shown in FIGS. 8-31 (L) to 8-31 (P). In the case of the pattern SS-1 to the pattern SS-4, the image display device 5 displays the setting value suggestion images 153SG005H, 153SG005I, 153SG005J, and 153SG005K of different characters, so that the pachinko game machine 1 is set. The setting value is suggested. Further, when the effect pattern of the set value suggestion effect is the pattern SS-5, the set value suggestion image 153SGS005L, which is a collection of all the characters displayed on the image display device 5 in the patterns SS-1 to the pattern SS-4, is the image display device. It is displayed at 5.

As described above, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as the look-ahead notice, the look-ahead notice is not executed or the hold memory display is displayed. The setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when is displayed as a white square or a star. For this reason, the player suggests the setting by a mobile terminal such as a smartphone, which is possessed in anticipation that the setting suggestion effect will be executed in advance when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera. You can now be ready to shoot the production. That is, the hold memory display of the aspect of the blue or red camera in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment is also an effect of urging the player to prepare for shooting the setting suggestion effect.

As described above, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a character effect and a timer effect having a higher expectation of a big hit than the character effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display suggesting the expectation of a big hit. As shown in −26 (D), when the timer effect is executed during the variable display, the setting suggestion effect is set as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed during the variable display. Will be executed. That is, when the timer effect is executed, the player pays more attention to whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit because the jackpot expectation is higher than when the character effect is executed. The setting suggestion effect is executed while the player is paying attention, and the player can prevent the setting suggestion effect from being overlooked.

Further, as the front variable display suggestion effect during variable display, in addition to the character effect, a timer effect that suggests the period until the start of the rear variable display suggestion effect can be executed, so that the setting suggestion effect can be performed. By executing the setting suggestion effect, the player can easily recognize the execution start timing of the setting suggestion effect.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as a timer effect, the period until the execution start of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is displayed as a numerical value (see FIGS. 8-29 (D) and 8-29 (E)). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a timer effect, for example, it is suggested that the rear variable display is performed by displaying an increase / decrease of a gauge, a meter, or the like. It is possible not to clearly notify the period until the start of execution of the effect (suggest only the approximate period).

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-29 (D) and 8-29 (E), an embodiment in which the timer effect is executed by the image display on the image display device 5 is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, and the display means other than the image display device 5. Any one aspect of the display in (1) or a plurality of aspects may be combined and executed.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-30 (H) and 8-31 (L), the timer displayed on the image display device 5 as a timer effect is 0. Based on this, a jackpot suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the setting suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. That is, even when the timer effect is executed, the jackpot suggestion effect may be executed instead of the setting suggestion effect, so that the unexpectedness can be produced and the game entertainment can be improved.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, based on the fact that the timer displayed on the image display device 5 becomes 0 as the timer effect, the setting suggestion effect and the jackpot suggestion effect are performed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. An embodiment in which only one of them can be executed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is based on the fact that the timer displayed on the image display device 5 as a timer effect becomes 0. , Both the setting suggestion performance and the jackpot suggestion production may be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display.

Further, the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the rear variable display suggestion effect is always executed when the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect but the rear variable display suggestion effect is not executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 (B) and 8-27 (C), as the effect pattern of the timer effect, the pattern TS-1 having an effect period of 25 seconds and the pattern having an effect period of 30 seconds TS-2 is provided, and when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, the setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. That is, it is suggested that when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, the setting suggestion effect is executed for a longer period of time than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-28, since the rear variable display suggestion effect including the setting suggestion effect is executed during the reach effect period, which is the latter half period in the variable display of the super reach, the setting suggestion effect by the player is performed. Can be further prevented from being overlooked.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the setting suggestion effect is executed during the reach effect period, which is the latter half period in the variable display of the super reach, is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, there may be a case where the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first half period in the variable display of the super reach.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-18 and 8-22, the display mode of the hold storage display is changed to a white square or star shape, a blue or red camera as a look-ahead notice. In the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display (the value of the hold display flag is 3 or 4), which is the mode of the camera whose display mode is blue or red, it is possible to execute the hold display notice effect that can be displayed by the mode or the like. It is possible to determine the execution of the setting suggestion effect at a higher rate than the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display (the value of the hold display flag is 1 or 2) whose display mode is a white square or a star. Therefore, in the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display (the value of the hold display flag is 3 or 4), which is the mode of the camera whose display mode is blue or red, the player decides whether or not the variable display result is a big hit. Since the setting suggestion effect is executed when the player is paying attention, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-29 and 8-31, the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment corresponds to the hold storage display which is the target of the hold display notice effect when the hold display notice effect is executed. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect in the variable display (variable display immediately after the hold display notice effect is finished). For this reason, the setting suggestion effect is executed when the player is paying attention to the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display, which is the target of the hold display notice effect, so that the player can miss the setting suggestion effect. It can be further prevented.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the hold display notice effect can be executed as a look-ahead notice is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold display notice is given as a look-ahead notice. It may be possible to execute an effect other than the effect, and suggest that the setting suggestion effect is executed as the effect mode of the effect.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display (variable display immediately after the hold display notice effect is finished) corresponding to the hold memory display which is the target of the hold display notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is more than the start of the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display which is the target of the hold display notice effect during the execution period of the hold display notice effect. It may be possible to execute the setting suggestion effect from the previous timing).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-19, the ratio of displaying the hold memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as the look-ahead notice effect is such that the hold memory display is displayed as a white square or a star as the look-ahead notice effect. Since it is set lower than the display ratio, the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, so that the hold memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape. It is possible to draw attention to the person and further prevent the technician from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the ratio of displaying the hold storage display in the form of a blue or red camera as the look-ahead notice effect is the ratio of displaying the hold memory display in the form of a blue or red camera, and the hold memory display is displayed as a white square or star shape as the look-ahead notice effect. Although the embodiment set lower than the display ratio in is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold storage display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pre-reading advance notice effect. The ratio may be set higher than the ratio of displaying the hold memory display as a white square or star shape as a look-ahead notice effect, or the hold memory display may be set as a look-ahead notice effect of a blue or red camera. The ratio of displaying in the mode and the ratio of displaying the hold memory display as a white square or star as a pre-reading notice effect may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as a hold display notice effect, the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera to prepare the player for shooting the setting suggestion effect. Since the player can prepare a form terminal such as a smartphone before the start of the setting suggestion effect, the success rate of shooting the setting suggestion effect by the player can be increased.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as a hold display notice effect, the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera to prepare the player for shooting the setting suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the hold storage display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a hold display notice effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are used. The player may be separately urged to prepare for shooting the setting suggestion effect by the sound output of the above, the display of the message image on the image display device 5, and the like.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the hold display notice effect is provided by the display pattern γ that displays the hold memory display in the form of a blue camera and the display pattern δ that displays the hold memory display in the form of a red camera. It is feasible, and as shown in FIG. 8-22 (A), when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera (when the value of the hold display flag is 3), the hold memory display is red. The rate at which the setting suggestion effect is executed is different from the case where the display is performed in the mode of the camera (when the value of the hold display flag is 4). In particular, when the hold memory display is displayed in the mode of the red camera, the setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when the hold memory display is displayed in the mode of the blue camera. When the display is displayed in the mode of the red camera, the player pays more attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed than when the hold memory display is displayed in the mode of the blue camera. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, the hold memory display is displayed until the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display starts. Although the embodiment in which the mode does not change has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the display mode of the hold memory display changes from the mode of the blue camera to the mode of the red camera. In addition, a case is provided in which the hold storage display corresponding to the variable display during execution is continuously displayed as the active display, and the display mode of the active display is changed from the mode of the blue camera to the mode of the red camera. You may. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention as to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed until the variable display is completed, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-20, the suggestion effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect is only in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach having a long special figure fluctuation time. Since it is feasible and it is not executed in the variable display of the normal reach or non-reach fluctuation pattern with a short special figure fluctuation time, it is suppressed that the setting suggestion effect is executed during the short variable display period, and the game It is possible to prevent the person from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-6 and 8-28, the execution period of the setting suggestion effect is set to 7 seconds, which is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern, so that the super reach is variable. It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect during the display (during the execution of the reach effect).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-19, when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display is a super reach capable of executing the setting suggestion effect. Since it is suggested that the display is variable, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed by displaying the hold memory display in the form of a blue or red camera. Can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-19, when the fluctuation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time is shorter than the super reach, the hold display is displayed. Since the hold memory display is not displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a notice effect, the player was paying attention to the fact that the hold memory display was displayed in the form of a blue or red camera. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion effect from being not executed and the interest from being lowered because the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display is a variable display such as non-reach or normal reach.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-20 to 8-28, during the variable display of the super reach, the suggestion effect during the front variable display including the timer effect can be executed, but it is more special than the variable display of the super reach. Figure The timer effect is not executed during the variable display of non-reach or normal reach with a short fluctuation time, so the timer effect is not executed during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect. The timer effect is not executed during the variable display of non-reach or normal reach. It is possible to prevent inconsistency in the production due to the execution of.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (D), when the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect, the front variable display suggestion effect is used. The jackpot expectation is set higher than when the character effect is executed, and the suggestion effect is set as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 8-32 as a modified example 153SG-1, execution of a timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display. Is set lower than the ratio for determining the execution of the character effect as the front variable display suggestion effect, and the front variable when the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect. It may be set to execute the setting suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the display suggestion effect.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as a pre-reading notice, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D and the second hold storage display area 153SG005U of the image display device 5 in a white square, star shape, or blue color. Although a mode in which a hold display notice effect to be displayed in the mode of a red camera or a red camera can be executed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and FIG. 8-33 (A) and FIG. 8-33 (A) as a modified example 153SG-2. As shown in FIG. 8-33 (B), when the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D or the second hold storage display area 153SG005U, the image display device 5 displays the first hold storage display area 153SG005D. When the predetermined effect image 153SG005E overlaps with the second hold storage display area 153SG005U, at least the hold storage display in the form of a blue or red camera is displayed with priority over the effect image 153SG005E (blue or red camera). The hold storage display of the above aspect may be displayed so as not to be hidden by the effect image 153SG005E). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the hold storage display of the blue or red camera mode due to the obstruction of the hold memory display of the blue or red camera mode by the effect image 153SG005E. be able to.

Further, the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment illustrates a mode in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed for 7 seconds only during the variable display of the super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modification 153SG-3, as shown in FIGS. 8-34 (A) and 8-34 (B), the setting suggestion effect can be executed for 7 seconds during the variable display of normal reach and non-reach without shortening. May be good. Further, during the variable display of the shortened non-reach, the period dedicated to the variable display of the shortened non-reach (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-34 (C), is the special figure variation time of the variable display of the shortened non-reach. The setting suggestion effect may be executed for 3 seconds (3 seconds shorter than 3.75 seconds to 5.75 seconds).

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-22 (A), the hold storage display is displayed in the mode of the blue camera and the mode of the red camera as the hold display notice effect. Although the embodiment in which the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is different from that in the case of being displayed in is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 153SG-4, the mode of the camera in which the hold memory display is blue. The determination ratio of at least one effect pattern in the setting suggestion effect may be different depending on whether it is displayed in the mode of the red camera or in the mode of the red camera. By doing so, the player can pay attention to whether the hold storage display is displayed in the form of the blue camera or the mode of the red camera as the hold display notice effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, two timings (25 seconds and 30 seconds after the start of the variable display) are provided as start timings of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display during the variable display of the super reach. Although the embodiment in which the setting suggestion effect is more easily executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect by executing the rear variable display suggestion effect from the timing, the present invention is not limited to this, and the modified example 153SG- As a value 5, when the start timing of the setting suggestion effect is 30 seconds after the start of the variable display, the setting suggestion effect is patterned at a higher rate than when the start timing of the setting suggestion effect is 25 seconds after the start of the variable display. It may be executed with an effect pattern suggesting a high set value such as SS-3 to pattern SS-5. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is executed according to the effect executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display and the display mode of the hold memory display displayed as the hold display notice effect. Although the form suggesting whether or not to be performed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is displayed as an effect executed as a suggestion effect during front variable display and a hold display notice effect. It may be suggested whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed only by one of the display mode of the hold storage display. Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect during the variable display for executing the timer effect as the front variable display suggestion effect is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result of the variable display for executing the timer effect is a big hit, the setting suggestion effect is set during the big hit game (advantageous state in the present invention) based on the variable display. May be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, when the hold display notice effect is already executed, the mode of restricting the execution of the new hold display notice effect is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. If the hold display notice effect is already executed, the execution of only a part of the new hold display notice effects may be restricted. For example, if the hold display notice effect is already executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ (when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera), a new hold display notice effect is displayed. Only what is executed in the display pattern α or the display pattern β (the hold memory display is displayed as a white square or a star) is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming difficult to understand due to the simultaneous execution of a plurality of hold display notice effects having different suggested contents. Further, when the hold display notice effect is already executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ in this way, it is restricted that the new hold display notice effect is executed in the display pattern α or the display pattern β. Therefore, the player can pay more attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed. In addition, if the hold display notice effect has already been executed in the display pattern α or the display pattern β (when the hold memory display is displayed as a white square or a star), a new hold display notice effect is displayed. Whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit by limiting only what is executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ (the hold memory display is displayed in the manner of a blue or red camera) The player can be even more noticed.

The feature unit 153SG of the embodiment illustrates a mode in which the hold display advance notice effect can be executed as the look-ahead effect in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead effect is not limited to this. As long as the effect can be executed from the timing before the variable display of the target starts, the effect other than the hold display notice effect may be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a character effect and a timer effect can be executed as a suggestion effect during the front variable display suggesting that the variable display result is a big hit has been illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, an effect other than the character effect or the timer effect may be executed as long as the effect suggests that the variable display result is a big hit.

[Main configuration and effect of feature unit 153SG]
Conventionally, it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, and it is possible to execute an effect (setting suggestion effect) that suggests which setting value is set. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). However, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-2010902, the player may overlook the setting suggestion effect because it is difficult to understand the opportunity for the setting value to be suggested by the setting effect. The feature unit 153SG is made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of preventing a player from overlooking a setting suggestion effect. The main configurations and effects of such a feature portion 153SG will be described. The feature unit 153SG has the following configurations and effects.

The gaming machine described in means 1
It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1)
The advantageous state suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 shows the variable display shown in FIG. 7) capable of executing the advantageous state suggestion effect (for example, the suggestion effect during the front variable display) suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled. The part that executes the middle production process) and
A setting suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is in variable display shown in FIG. 7) capable of executing a setting suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during rear variable display) that gives suggestions regarding setting of a set value. The part that executes the production process) and
With
The advantageous state suggestion effect executing means has a higher ratio of controlling the advantageous state suggestion effect to the first aspect (for example, a character effect as a suggestion effect during front variable display) and the advantageous state than the first aspect. It can be executed in the second aspect (for example, a timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display).
When the advantageous state suggestion effect is executed in the second aspect, the setting suggestion effect executing means has a higher ratio of the setting suggestion effect than when the advantageous state suggestion effect is executed in the first aspect. Can be executed after the execution of the advantageous state suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-26, when the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect, the character is used as the front variable display suggestion effect. It is characterized by the fact that the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than when the effect is executed).
According to this feature, the setting suggestion effect is executed when the player is paying attention to the subsequent development because the second aspect in which the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is relatively high is executed as the advantageous state suggestion effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of the means 2 is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
A display means capable of displaying (for example, an image display device 5) is provided.
The advantageous state suggestion effect executing means sets the advantageous state suggestion effect as a specific mode by displaying the period information on the display means and then updating and displaying the period information as the advantageous state suggestion effect of the second aspect. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a period suggestion effect (for example, a timer effect) that suggests a period up to.
According to this feature, the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect can be easily recognized by the player by executing the period suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of the means 3 is the gaming machine according to the means 2.
The setting suggestion effect executing means can execute at least one of the special suggestion effect suggesting that the period information is controlled to the advantageous state based on the specific mode and the setting suggestion effect. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 8-30 and 8-31, a portion in which a jackpot suggestion effect or a setting suggestion effect is executed based on the timer becoming 0).
According to this feature, not only the setting suggestion effect but also the special suggestion effect may be executed due to the execution of the period suggestion effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved by producing the unexpectedness.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine according to means 2 or means 3.
The advantageous state suggestion effect executing means can execute the period suggestion effect over a first period (for example, 25 seconds) or a second period (for example, 30 seconds) which is a period longer than the first period. ,
When the update display of the numerical information is executed over the second period, the setting suggestion effect executing means has a higher ratio than when the update display of the numerical information is executed over the first period. The setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27, when the timer effect is executed for 30 seconds, it is higher than when the timer effect is executed for 25 seconds. It is characterized by the fact that the setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate).
According to this feature, when the period suggestion effect is executed over the second period, the setting suggestion is given to the player for a longer period than when the period suggestion effect is executed over the first period. Since it is suggested that the effect is executed, it is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of the means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 4.
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol variation process shown in FIG. 5 or a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display in-process effect process shown in FIG. 7. ),
The setting suggestion effect executing means can execute the setting suggestion effect according to the fact that the execution period of the variable display becomes a specific period corresponding to a specific timing in the latter half period of the variable display (for example, FIG. 8-). As shown in 28, the effect control CPU 120 is at a timing (25 seconds or 30 seconds after the start of the variable display) at which the timer effect ends during the execution period of the reach effect during the variable display of the super reach. It is characterized by the fact that the setting suggestion effect can be executed according to the situation).
According to this feature, since the setting suggestion effect is executed in the latter half period of the variable display, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means 6
It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1)
The advantageous state suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 shows the variable display shown in FIG. 7) capable of executing the advantageous state suggestion effect (for example, the suggestion effect during the front variable display) suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled. The part that executes the middle production process) and
A setting suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is in variable display shown in FIG. 7) capable of executing a setting suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during rear variable display) that gives suggestions regarding setting of a set value. The part that executes the production process) and
With
The advantageous state suggestion effect executing means can execute the advantageous state suggestion effect in the first aspect and the second aspect in which the execution rate is lower than that of the first aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-32). The part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display from the character effect and the timer effect whose execution rate is lower than that of the character effect).
When the advantageous state suggestion effect is executed in the second aspect, the setting suggestion effect executing means has a higher ratio of the setting suggestion effect than when the advantageous state suggestion effect is executed in the first aspect. Can be executed after the execution of the advantageous state suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-26, when the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect, the character is used as the front variable display suggestion effect. It is characterized by the fact that the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than when the effect is executed).
According to this feature, since the advantageous state suggestion effect is executed in the second aspect, the setting suggestion effect is executed when the player is paying attention to the advantageous state suggestion effect of the second aspect. It is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

In addition, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

(Explanation of feature section 131F)
Next, the game machine in the feature unit 131F of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-1 to 9-3.

The feature portion 131F is characterized by the arrangement of various structures arranged in the game area where the game ball as a game medium provided on the game board 2 flows down. The game area includes a left game area corresponding to the left side of the game board 2 on which the (left-handed) game ball launched relatively weakly by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle 30 and a left game area by operating the ball hitting operation handle 30. A right-handed game area is provided in which a game ball launched (right-handed) stronger than the flowing game ball passes through an upper path of the image display device 5 and flows down.

A general winning opening 10 and a winning ball device 6A are provided in the left area. On the other hand, in the right side region, a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7, and a normal drawing operating port 50 are provided from the upstream side to the downstream side. At the bottom of the game area, an out port 51 is provided as a discharge area for discharging the game balls that have not won each winning port or the winning ball device to the outside of the game area. The discharge area is an area in which no prize ball is given even if a game ball enters and there is no payout.

The game ball flowing down the left game area can win a prize in the first starting prize opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A. Further, the game balls flowing down the right game area are the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and the operating opening formed by the normal drawing operating port 50. It is possible to win a prize and to pass through (enter) the passing gate 41. Here, when the game ball enters (wins) the normal figure operating port 50 (normal figure starting port), or when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 (when it enters), the variable display of the normal symbol is used. The Fuzu game is executed. In addition, when a game ball enters (wins a prize) in the normal drawing operation port 50, one game ball is paid out. There is no payout due to the passage of the game ball at the passing gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 9-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 52 are provided between the winning ball device 6A provided in the left side region and the normal drawing operating port 50 and the special variable winning ball device 7 provided in the right side region. It is arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left side area cannot enter the normal drawing operating port 50 and the special variable winning ball device 7, and the game ball flowing down the right side area cannot enter the winning ball device 6A. There is. Further, only a part of the obstacle nail 52 is shown.

Due to the arrangement of the obstacle nail 52, the game ball that flows down the right side region by hitting the right side wins the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7. Even if they do not, most of them enter the normal operation port 50. That is, the game balls that have not won the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by hitting right or the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 are discharged at the out opening 51 (out opening). It will enter the normal drawing operating port 50 at a higher rate than (reaching 51). Further, due to the arrangement of the obstacle nails 52, the game ball when hit right is higher in entering the normal drawing operating port 50 than in the ratio of passing through the passing gate 41.

[About paying out game balls]
Here, the payout of the game ball will be described. The CPU 103 passes through (enters) the first start opening switch 22A for detecting the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. ) Second start port switch 22B for detecting the game ball, count switch 23 for detecting the game ball that has passed (entered) the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and passing (entering) the general winning opening 10. The number of prize balls is increased according to the winning detection based on whether either the general count switch that detects the game ball that has been played or the game ball that has passed (entered) the game ball is turned on. The indicated payout control command (prize ball number signal) is output to the payout control board (not shown). The payout control board is equipped with a payout control microcomputer, and drives a ball payout device (not shown) in response to a payout control command to control the payout of prize balls.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 131F, when a game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, three game balls are paid out and the variable winning ball device 6B is formed. When a game ball enters the second starting winning slot, one gaming ball is paid out, and when the gaming ball enters the large winning slot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, 12 gaming balls are paid out. Is paid out, and when a game ball enters the general winning opening 10, three game balls are paid out, and when a game ball enters the normal drawing operating port 50, one game ball is paid out.

[About game status]
The feature unit 131F includes at least a low accuracy low base state as a normal state, a low accuracy high base state as a time saving state, a high accuracy high base state as a probability variation state, and a jackpot gaming state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. Is done. The gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled by the CPU 103. In the high base state, the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the normal figure game is higher than in the normal state. Therefore, the variable winning ball device 6 changes from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters the passing gate 41 and the normal drawing operating port 50 provided in the right side region by hitting right in the high base state. The rate of doing is higher than the normal state. That is, in the high base state, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B than in the normal state.

[About right-handed]
When a right-handed hit is made in the high base state, the game ball enters the passing gate 41 above the right region, or the game ball flows down without entering the passing gate 41. Further, in the high base state, the ratio of hitting the normal figure is higher than in the normal state, so when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the variable winning ball device 6B provided directly under the passing gate 41 has a higher ratio. To open from the closed state to the open state. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the high base state, the ratio of the game ball continuously entering the variable winning ball device 6B directly underneath is higher than in the normal state. When a game ball enters the passing gate 41, if it is out of the ordinary or spills from the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state, the game ball does not enter the variable winning ball device 6B and moves downward. Flow down. When a game ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B (when there is a winning in the second starting port), there is one payout as many as the number of entering.

If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state, the game ball that has not entered the variable winning ball device 6B wins a prize in the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7. If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, the game ball flows further downward. Due to the arrangement of the obstacle nail 52, most of the game balls that have flowed down enter the normal drawing operation port 50. When entering the normal drawing operating port 50, there is one payout as many as the number of entering. The game ball that has not entered the normal drawing operating port 50 reaches (enters) the out port 51 provided at the bottom of the right side area, and is discharged to the outside of the game area.

Due to the arrangement of the structures, in the big hit game state, even if the game ball does not enter the variable winning ball device 6B, the ratio of winning a prize to the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7. Is high. Even if the game ball does not win the big winning opening, the rate of entering the normal drawing operating port 50 is higher than the rate of entering the out opening 51. Therefore, even if the game ball does not enter the special variable winning ball device 7, it is possible to reduce the ball loss when the game ball does not enter the special variable winning ball device 7.

Further, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed regardless of whether the game ball enters the passing gate 41 or the game ball enters the normal drawing operation port 50. Then, from the upstream side, there is a relationship of the passing gate 41, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the normal drawing operating port 50. Therefore, even if the game ball does not enter the variable winning ball device 6B in the high base state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened by the game ball entering the normal drawing operating port 50 from the normal state. Therefore, even if it is difficult for the game ball to enter the passing gate 41 due to the positional relationship of the obstacle nail 52, it is possible to prevent the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable winning ball device 6B from being reduced.

Further, the game ball that has flowed down to the right side region in the high base state has a higher rate of entering the normal drawing operating port 50 than the rate of entering the variable winning ball device 6B due to the positional relationship of the obstacle nail 52. By doing so, the player can be informed even if the game ball does not enter the variable winning ball device 6B while preventing the rate of entering the variable winning ball device 6B from becoming too high during the high base state. The disadvantageous situation can be alleviated.

[About the general process process]
FIG. 9-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S26 shown in FIG. 4 as the normal symbol process process. In this normal symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the normal symbol start winning determination process (131FS001).

After executing the normal symbol start winning process, the CPU 103 determines the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the RAM 102. One of the processes of 131FS100 to 131FS106 is selected and executed according to the value.

In the normal symbol start winning process of 131FS001, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the gate switch 21 is on based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 provided in the passing gate 41. (131FS111). If the gate switch 21 is on (131FS111; Y), the number of reserved storages for the normal figure is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) with reference to the holding storage unit for the normal figure provided in the RAM 102. ) Is determined (131FS112). When the number of reserved memory in the normal figure is not the upper limit value (131FS112; N), the gate passing flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 is set and the process proceeds to 131FS117 (131FS113).

When the gate switch 21 is off at 131FS111 (131FS111; N) or when the normal figure hold storage number is the upper limit value at 131FS112 (131FS112), it is determined whether or not the normal figure operation port switch is on. (131FS114). If the normal figure operation port switch is on (131FS114; Y), the normal figure hold storage number becomes a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) with reference to the normal figure hold storage unit. Whether or not it is determined (131FS115). When the normal figure hold memory number is not the upper limit value (131FS115; N), the normal figure operating opening winning flag indicating that the game ball has won the normal drawing operating opening is set and the process proceeds to 131FS117 (131FS116).

When the normal symbol operation port switch is off (131FS114; N) or when the normal symbol hold storage number is the upper limit value (131FS115; Y), the normal symbol start winning process is terminated.

In 131FS117, the CPU 103 extracts the numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result from the numerical data updated by the random counter of the game control counter setting unit provided in the random number circuit 104 or the RAM 102. (131FS117). The numerical data extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of a free entry in the normal figure hold storage unit (131FS118).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the normal drawing operation port winning flag is set (131FS119). When the normal figure operating opening winning flag is set (131FS119; Y), the normal drawing operating opening winning flag is cleared (131FS120), and the number of prize balls notification command according to the winning of the normal drawing starting winning opening. Is set to be transmitted, and the normal symbol start winning process is completed (131FS121).

Further, when the normal figure start winning flag is not set (131FS119; N), it is further determined whether or not the gate passage flag is set (131FS122). When the gate passage flag is not set (131FS122; N), the normal symbol start winning process is completed, and when the gate passage flag is set (131FS122; Y), the gate passage flag is cleared and ( 131FS123), the transmission setting of the gate passage notification command is set, and the normal symbol start winning process is completed (131FS124).

The prize ball number notification command set to be transmitted in the processing of 131FS 121 and the gate passage notification command set to be transmitted in the processing of 131FS 124 are transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing a command control process (see FIG. 4). It is output (transmitted) to it. As described above, in the normal symbol start winning process in the present embodiment, different commands are transmitted to the effect control board 12 depending on whether the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 or won the normal symbol operating port. It has become.

As shown in FIG. 9-1, the normal symbol normal processing of S131FS100 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “0”. In this ordinary symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the ordinary symbol game by the ordinary symbol display 20 based on the presence or absence of the reserved data stored in the ordinary symbol holding storage unit. Further, in the normal symbol normal processing, the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result, whether or not the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is set as "hit". Make a decision (predetermined) before the event. Further, in the normal symbol normal processing, a fixed normal symbol (either a hit symbol or a missed symbol) in the normal symbol game is set by the normal symbol display 20 in response to the variation display result of the normal symbol in the normal symbol game. .. In the normal symbol normal processing, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to "1" when the variation display result of the normal symbol is determined in advance.

The normal symbol variation pattern setting process of 131FS101 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is "1". This normal symbol variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the variation pattern of the normal symbol to one of a plurality of types based on whether or not the game state is a time saving state. When the normal symbol variation pattern setting process is executed and the normal symbol variation display is started, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to "2". For example, in the present embodiment, when the game state is a time saving state (high accuracy high base state or low accuracy high base state), the normal symbol variation pattern (variation time of the normal symbol) is determined to be 1 second, and the game is played. When the state is a non-time saving state (low accuracy low base state or high accuracy low base state), the normal symbol fluctuation pattern (normal symbol fluctuation time) may be determined for a period longer than the time saving state such as 3 minutes. ..

The normal symbol variation processing of 131FS102 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is "2". This normal symbol variation process includes a process of setting the normal symbol display 20 to change the normal symbol, a process of measuring the elapsed time since the normal symbol starts to change, and the like. .. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the normal symbol variation time corresponding to the normal symbol variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol reaches the normal symbol fluctuation time, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to "3".

The normal symbol stop processing of 131FS103 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is "3". This normal symbol stop process includes a process of stopping the fluctuation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 20 and making a setting for stopping and displaying (deriving) the confirmed normal symbol that is the result of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol. ing. Then, it is determined whether or not the hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is on, and if the hit flag is on, the value of the normal figure process flag is updated to "4". The flag. On the other hand, when the hit flag is off, the value of the normal map process flag is updated to "0".

The pre-opening process per normal symbol of 131FS104 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is "4". In this pre-opening process for hitting the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 6B is set to the open state (opening control is executed) based on the fact that the variation display result of the normal symbol is "hit" or the game state. It includes processing to make settings. For example, when the gaming state is the time saving state (high accuracy high base state or low accuracy high base state), the opening period of the variable winning ball device 6B is determined to be 3 seconds, and the gaming state is the non-time saving state (low accuracy). In the case of low base state or high accuracy low base state), the opening period of the variable winning ball device 6B is 0.1 seconds, etc. It should be set to.

In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the case where the gaming state is in the non-time saving state, and the variable winning ball device 6B is used for a long period of time. The opening makes it easier for the game ball to win a prize in the second starting winning opening, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the game state is the time saving state, the game state is the non-time saving state. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the case of, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a longer period of time than in the case where the gaming state is in the non-time saving state, and the game state is more than in the non-time saving state. By executing at least one such as increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B is opened, it is sufficient to make it easier for the game ball to win the second starting winning opening than in the non-time saving state.

The processing during opening per normal symbol of 131FS105 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “5”. Whether or not it is time to return the variable winning ball device 6B from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening state of the variable winning ball device 6B in the processing during opening per normal symbol. It includes processing to determine whether or not. Then, when the variable winning ball device 6B is returned to the closed state, the value of the normal figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid.

The post-opening process per normal symbol of 131FS106 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “6”. This post-opening process for hitting a normal symbol includes a process for determining whether or not the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B is opened has reached the maximum number of times the variable winning device is opened. When the maximum number of times the variable winning device is opened is not reached, the value of the normal figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the maximum number of times the variable winning device is opened is not reached, the value of the normal figure process flag is "5". It is updated to 0 ”.

[Main configuration and effect of feature section 131F]
Next, the main configuration and effects of the above-mentioned feature unit 131F will be described.

(1) As shown in FIG. 9-1, the normal drawing operating port 50 is provided at a position downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B. When hitting right in the high base state, the variable winning ball device 6B is more easily controlled to the open state than in the normal state, so the rate at which the game ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B is higher than in the normal state, but there is an obstacle. The game ball may not enter the variable winning ball device 6B due to the positional relationship of the nails or the like. In addition, the game ball that has flowed down the right side region in the high base state has a higher rate of entering the normal drawing operating port 50 than being discharged at the out port 51 due to the positional relationship of the obstacle nails, the arrangement relationship of the structure, and the like. It has become. Therefore, even if the variable winning ball device 6B is not entered, the game machine often enters the normal drawing operating port 50 with one payout. By doing so, even if the game ball does not enter the variable winning ball device 6B in the high base state, it is possible to reduce the decline in the interest of the game by entering the normal drawing operating port 50. ..

Further, it is also conceivable that the ratio of the game ball passing through the passing gate 41 as a structure at the uppermost part when hitting to the right due to the positional relationship of the obstacle nails becomes excessively high. In such a case, the rate at which the game ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B directly below the passing gate 41 in the high base state also becomes excessively high. Therefore, when the game ball enters excessively, many variable displays are executed in a short time, and the interval between big hits becomes short. Then, there is a concern that the shooting property will become too high. In such a case, if the fluctuation time in the high base is lengthened, the shootability itself can be suppressed, but it is not preferable because there is a possibility that a feeling of extension may occur. Therefore, by arranging the obstacle nails so that the game ball does not excessively enter the passing gate 41 when hitting to the right, and by arranging the normal drawing operating port 50 at a position below the right flow path, the variable display can be appropriately displayed. It can be executed, and while suppressing the shooting property, it is possible to prevent the feeling of extension from occurring.

(2) As shown in FIG. 9-1, the out port 51 is provided at the lowermost part of the right side region. In this way, even if the game ball does not enter the variable winning ball device 6B in the high base state, the rate of entering the specific area can be higher than the rate of entering the out port 51. It is possible to reduce the decline in interest.

(3) When a game ball enters the normal drawing operating port 50, there is one payout, which is the same as the number of entering. By doing so, even if the game balls do not enter the variable winning ball device 6B in the high base state, the same number of game balls as the number of the game balls that have entered is given, so that the decrease in interest can be reduced. it can.

(4) As shown in FIG. 9-1, the normal drawing operating port 50 is provided at a position downstream of the special variable winning ball device 7. In this way, even when the game ball does not enter the variable winning ball device 6B in the high base state, it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the interest. Further, since the rate of entering the normal drawing operating port 50 is higher than that of being discharged at the out port 51, the game ball enters the special variable winning ball device 7 even if the game ball does not enter the special variable winning ball device 7. It is possible to reduce the ball loss when the ball is not reduced.

(5) The variable display of the normal symbol is also executed when the game ball enters at the passing gate 41 different from the normal symbol operating port 50. That is, there are a plurality of opportunities for variable display in the high base state. In this way, even when the game ball does not enter the variable winning ball device 6B in the high base state, it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the interest.

Further, even if the frequency of entry of the game ball into the normal drawing operating port 50 decreases due to the arrangement of the obstacle nails, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferable by increasing the passing ratio on the passing gate 41 side. It can be executed at a reasonable rate. On the contrary, even if the frequency of entry of the game ball into the passing gate 41 is reduced due to the arrangement of the obstacle nails, the second special symbol can be variably displayed by increasing the passing ratio on the normal drawing operating port 50 side. Can be carried out at a suitable ratio. In this way, the approach frequency between the normal drawing operating port 50 and the passing gate 41 can be adjusted depending on the arrangement of the obstacle nails.

Further, even if a failure such as a broken or bent obstacle nail occurs, the normal map change is executed if the game ball enters either the normal figure operating port 50 or the passing gate 41, so that the normal figure change. Can be increased in security for the execution of. Further, by separately providing the normal drawing operation port 50, it becomes easy to adjust the base value in the high base state by adjusting the obstacle nail, so that it is after the arrangement of the structure on the board surface is determined at the time of development. However, it is possible to easily adjust the base value by slightly changing the arrangement of the obstacle nails.

(6) As shown in FIG. 9-1, the passing gate 41 is provided on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 6B, and the game ball that has entered the passing gate 41 is continuously sent to the variable winning ball device 6B directly below. It is possible to enter. In this way, the game balls that have entered the passing gate 41 continuously enter the variable winning ball device 6B, so that waste of the game balls can be prevented.

(7) When a game ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B, one payout is provided, which is the same as the number of balls that have entered. In this way, it is possible to prevent the number of game balls from increasing too much during a high base.

(8) The rate of the game ball flowing down to the right side region in the high base state is higher than the rate of entering the variable winning ball device 6B. By doing so, while preventing the ratio of entering the variable winning ball device 6B from becoming too high during the high base, even if the game ball does not enter the variable winning ball device 6B, the normal drawing operating port By entering the game ball into 50, it is possible to reduce the disadvantageous situation for the player.

[Main modification of feature section 131F]
Although the feature portion 131F has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included. A modified example of the feature portion 131F will be described below.

(1) In the feature portion 131F, the ratio of the game ball passing through the passing gate 41 when hitting right in the high base is made lower than the passing ratio in the normal model, and the variable is provided directly under the passing gate 41. The game ball may not enter the winning ball device 6B too much. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which shortening fluctuations frequently occur due to the accumulation of four second reserved storage numbers. In such a case, it is desirable that the ratio of the game ball entering the normal operation port 50 is higher than the ratio of the game ball entering the passing gate 41. For example, the obstacle nails may be arranged so that most of the game balls that have not passed through the passing gate 41 enter the normal drawing operating port 50. In this way, when hitting to the right, the frequency of shortening fluctuations can be reduced to extend the overall time during the high base, and the payout due to the passing of the pachinko ball through the pachinko machine can be guaranteed. , It is possible to facilitate the design of the base value of the pachinko machine.

(2) In the feature unit 131F, the interval period between rounds during the big hit game may be longer (for example, 4 seconds) than that of a normal model. Then, even if the interval period is lengthened, the normal drawing operating port 50 is provided at a position downstream of the special variable winning ball device 7, and most of the game balls that did not enter the special variable winning ball device 7 are usually provided. The obstacle nails may be arranged so that the game ball passes through the actuating opening 50. In this way, during the interval period, the player launches the game ball to stop the launch of the game ball in order to prevent the game ball from entering the out opening 51 or the like. There is no need to do this, and the overall time during the jackpot game can be extended. This makes it possible to facilitate the design of the base value of the pachinko gaming machine.

(3) In the feature portion 131F, the movable wing piece of the electric tulip-shaped accessory in the variable winning ball device 6B was switched between the open state and the closed state by the rotational operation. However, the advance operation and the backward operation may be executed for the game area instead of the rotation operation. Further, the winning device corresponding to the second special symbol may have a non-movable structure like the winning ball device 6A. In such a case, the presence or absence of the game ball entering the winning device may be controlled by the structure operating in front of the winning device corresponding to the second special symbol.

(4) In the feature unit 131F, the number of game balls paid out when entering the variable winning ball device 6B and the normal drawing operating port 50 was one, which is the same as the number required for entry. However, the number to be paid out may be a number different from one at least one of the variable winning ball device 6B and the normal drawing operating port 50.

(5) In the feature unit 131F, the setting suggestion effect may be executed every time the total number of game balls that have entered the variable winning ball device 6B reaches a predetermined number (for example, 30 times). Further, the setting suggestion effect may be executed every time the total number of game balls that have entered the normal drawing operation port 50 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 30 times). Further, the setting suggestion effect may be executed every time the total number of the game balls that have entered the variable winning ball device 6B and the game balls that have entered the normal drawing operating port 50 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times). For example, if the setting suggestion effect is executed every time the total number of game balls that have entered the normal drawing operation port 50 reaches 30, it is possible to give fun to keep hitting right during a high base. , The fun of the game is improved. Further, instead of the number of times, the execution of the setting suggestion effect may be determined by a predetermined lottery when the game ball enters.

(6) In the feature unit 131F, the setting suggestion effect may be executed every time the total number of game balls that have entered the normal drawing operating port 50 during the big hit game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 30 times). In this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the production using the normal drawing operating port 50 during the big hit game.

(7) In the feature portion 131F, both the game ball flowing down the left side region and the game ball flowing down the right side region entered one out port 51 provided at the lowermost part of the game area as a discharge area. However, a plurality of discharge areas may be provided in the game area. Further, the flowing game ball may enter different discharge regions in the left side region and the right side region.

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
Each configuration relating to the feature portion may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to the other feature portion. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and a plurality of set values having different advantages (settings in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different). A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any of the values 1 to 6).
Variable display means (microcomputer 100 for game control, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing variable display (variable display), and
A game area in which the game medium can flow down (for example, a game area formed in the game board 2) and
A discharge area (for example, an out port 51) capable of discharging a game medium (for example, a game ball) to the outside of the game area,
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the game state, and
It is equipped with a value-giving means (for example, a payout control board) that gives value.
The state control means can be controlled to any gaming state including at least a normal state (for example, a normal state), a special state (for example, a high base state), and the advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state). Yes,
The game area includes a first area (for example, a left side area) and a second area (for example, a right side area) different from the first area.
In the second region,
Based on the variable display result of the normal identification information (for example, the normal symbol), the first state in which the game medium is easy to enter (for example, the open state) and the second state in which the game medium is difficult or impossible to enter (for example, closed). A normal variable device (for example, a variable winning ball device 6B) that can be changed to a state) and
A specific area (for example, a normal drawing operating port 50) capable of variably displaying the ordinary identification information when the game medium enters is provided.
Based on being controlled to the special state by the state control means, the normal variable device is more likely to be controlled to the first state than the normal state (for example, in the high base state, the variable winning ball device 6B is It is easier to control to the open state than the normal state),
The value-giving means imparts a value equal to or less than a predetermined value required for the game medium to enter the specific area based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area (for example, a game to the normal drawing operating port 50). If the ball enters, there will be one payout),
The specific area is provided at a position downstream of the ordinary variable device (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-1, the normal drawing operating port 50 is provided at a position downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B). ,
The game medium that has flowed down the second region in the special state has a higher rate of entering the specific region than being discharged in the discharge region (for example, a game ball that has flowed down the right side region in the high base state). , The rate of entering the normal operation port 50 is higher than that of being discharged at the out port 51),
The selection ratio of the variable display pattern (variation pattern) is common regardless of the set value (as shown in FIG. 13-6, the determination value of the variation pattern determination table is common regardless of the set value).
In the special state (high probability / high base state (probability change state)), a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) after the first period (the game state shifts to the high probability / high base state (probability change state)). (The period until the special figure game is executed, or until the big hit game state is reached before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed), and the second period after the first period (the game state is high). The period (51 times or more or 101 times or more) after the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) without becoming a big hit game state after shifting to the certain / high base state. Yes,
In the first period, the selection ratio of the variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined period is higher than that in the second period (as shown in FIGS. 13-6 (A1) and (C1), the display result is ". When it becomes "out of reach", in the first period [excluding final fluctuation], "normal reach out of reach" (variation display), which is a fluctuation display period longer than "non-reach loss (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds). The rate of selecting "out of super reach" (variation display period is 60 seconds) is higher than that of the second period),
In the second period, the selection ratio of the variable display pattern having a shorter variable display period than the predetermined period is higher than that in the first period (as shown in FIGS. 13-6 (A1) and (C1), the display result is When it becomes "off", in the second period, "non-reach out (high-speed fluctuation)" (variation display), which is a fluctuation display period shorter than "non-reach out (shortening fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds). The rate at which the period (1 second) is selected is higher than that of the first period [excluding the final fluctuation]).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a decrease in interest even when the game medium does not enter the normally variable device in a special state. Further, when the game state is a special state, sound playability can be realized and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the set value and the ordinary identification information may be associated with each other. For example, when the set value is high (4 to 6), the fluctuation time may be shorter or longer than when the set value is low (1 to 3). By doing so, the set value can be estimated from the fluctuation time of the ordinary identification information, and the interest is improved.

Further, the variable display pattern may be associated with an advantageous state or a special state. For example, when controlled to an advantageous state or a special state, the fluctuation time of the variable display may be set to a specific time or longer. By doing so, the player can expect more when the variable display time reaches a specific time, and the interest is improved.

Further, the setting suggestion effect may be performed in the first period in the special state. By doing so, it is possible to improve the gaming interest of the first period (the first half of the special state) in which the variable display pattern having a long variable display period is easily selected in order to realize sound game playability. In particular, the selection ratio of the variable display pattern is common regardless of the set value, and the set value cannot be determined by the selection ratio of the variable display pattern. Therefore, the setting suggestion effect can be performed to further improve the game entertainment.
Further, the normally variable device may perform the setting suggestion effect when the game medium changes to the first state in which it is easy to enter. For example, when the normally variable device changes to the first state, the image display device 5 performs a display effect (character display effect, etc.) in a plurality of types of modes (for example, three types of modes A, B, and C). The more advantageous the set value is to the player, the easier it is that the display effect is executed in a specific type of mode (for example, mode C). By doing so, when the variable device is normally changed to the first state, the display effect is performed in a plurality of types of modes, and the setting is set when the display effect is executed in a specific type of mode. Since the expectation that the value is advantageous to the player is increased, the game interest can be improved.
Further, when the setting suggestion effect is performed, the suggestion of the set value may be performed by a plurality of elements. By doing so, when multiple factors suggest a setting value that is favorable to the player, the player can be more confident that the setting value is favorable to the player, and at a certain factor, the setting value is favorable to the player. Even if a setting value that is advantageous to the player is not suggested, if an advantageous setting value is suggested by other factors, the player can maintain the expectation that the setting value is advantageous to the player. , The game entertainment can be improved.

Further, as another example of a gaming machine capable of improving the interest, one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) can be used. It is a settable game machine (pachinko game machine 1),
Variable display means (microcomputer 100 for game control, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing variable display (variable display), and
A game state control means (CPU103) for controlling a game state is provided.
The game state control means (CPU103) is
An advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a special state (high accuracy / high base state (probability change state), high accuracy / second KT state) that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player. (Small hit RUSH state)) and can be controlled,
The selection ratio of the variable display pattern (variation pattern) is common regardless of the set value (as shown in FIG. 13-6, the determination value of the variation pattern determination table is common regardless of the set value).
In the special state (high probability / high base state (probability change state)), a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) after the first period (the game state shifts to the high probability / high base state (probability change state)). (The period until the special figure game is executed, or until the big hit game state is reached before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed), and the second period after the first period (the game state is high). The period (51 times or more or 101 times or more) after the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) without becoming a big hit game state after shifting to the certain / high base state. Yes,
In the first period, the selection ratio of the variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined period is higher than that in the second period (as shown in FIGS. 13-6 (A1) and (C1), the display result is ". When it becomes "out of reach", in the first period [excluding final fluctuation], "normal reach out of reach" (variation display), which is a fluctuation display period longer than "non-reach loss (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds). The rate of selecting "out of super reach" (variation display period is 60 seconds) is higher than that of the second period),
In the second period, the selection ratio of the variable display pattern having a shorter variable display period than the predetermined period is higher than that in the first period (as shown in FIGS. 13-6 (A1) and (C1), the display result is When it becomes "off", in the second period, "non-reach out (high-speed fluctuation)" (variation display), which is a fluctuation display period shorter than "non-reach out (shortening fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds). The rate at which the period (1 second) is selected is higher than that of the first period [excluding the final fluctuation]). A form example of this game machine will be described below as another form example.

(Explanation of Feature 207SG of the Present Embodiment)

Next, the feature portion 207SG of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-7, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 207SG001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board (gauge) constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 207SG003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 207SG003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 207SG003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 207SG003 centering on the left side and the door closing position which closes the front surface. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 207SG003a, and when the glass door frame 207SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the game machine frame 207SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a game machine clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and a player other than the clerk can open the game machine frame 207SG003 and glass. The door frame 207SG003a cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-1, a first reserved storage display area 207SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 207SG005U are set at two positions on the left and right below the display area of the image display device 5. In the first hold storage display area 207SG005D and the second hold storage display area 207SG005U, the hold storage display for identifiablely displaying the hold storage number (special figure hold storage number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed. The left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is formed in the left game area 207SG002L where the game ball can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is a game. It is formed in the right game area 207SG002R where the ball can flow down.

The left game area 207SG002L is a game area in which the (left-handed) game ball launched relatively weakly by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 207SG002R is the left game area 207SG002L by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle 30. This is a game area in which a game ball launched (right-handed) stronger than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 207SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

Further, a general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 207SG002L, and in the right game area 207SG002R, a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general winning ball device 6B are arranged from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 207SG002R. A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L can win a prize in the first starting winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R is variable. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10, and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is possible to pass through the passing gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 207SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. For this reason, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 10-2 and 10-7, the main substrate 11 in the feature portion 207SG of this embodiment is housed in the substrate case 207SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the state. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 207SG051 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the set value change state, and the like are used. A setting changeover switch 207SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value, and an open sensor 207SG090 that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 207SG003 are provided. Although details will be described later, the set value change state in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment is a state in which a clerk of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state). ).

The setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is housed in the board case 207SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the board case 207SG201 so that the board case 207SG201 can be operated without opening the board case 207SG201.

Since the board case 207SG201 having the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame 207SG003 in the closed state, and a predetermined door key is pressed. It can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame 207SG003. Further, since the lock switch 207SG051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 207SG051. Further, the lock switch 207SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later by using a setting key. In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys is illustrated, but these may be shared by one key.

Further, in the board case 207SG201, a display monitor 207SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged. The display monitor 207SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case 207SG201. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 is arranged in front of the board case 207SG201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the gaming area) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature portion 207SG of this embodiment. 1 First special symbol display device 207SG004A capable of variable display of 1 special figure, 2nd special symbol display device 207SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st hold display capable of displaying 1st hold storage number Instrument 207SG025A, 2nd hold indicator 207SG025B capable of displaying the 2nd hold storage number, normal symbol display 207SG020 capable of executing variable display of the normal symbol, normal figure hold indicator 207SG025C capable of displaying the normal symbol hold storage number, In the game state where the round display 207SG131 that can display the number of rounds (big hit type) of the big hit game during the big hit game, and the game ball such as the high base state (time saving state) or the big hit game state is launched toward the right game area 207SG002R. A game information display unit 207SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 207SG132 that lights up, a probability variation lamp 207SG133 that lights up in the probability variation state, and a time reduction lamp 207SG134 that lights up in the high base state (time reduction state) are collectively arranged.

As shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of 8-segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is out of alignment or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

In the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A uses two types of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type to obtain a variable display result. Derived display is possible. Further, in the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is variably displayed by two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. The result and derivation can be displayed.

In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are all different, but the first special symbol display device 207SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed in the above and the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may overlap.

As shown in FIG. 10-5, the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B have 4-segment LEDs arranged side by side in the left-right direction. In these first hold display 207SG025A and second hold display 207SG025B, if the number of hold storage is one, only the LED at the left end is lit, and each time the number of hold storage increases, it is the second from the left. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LED on the hold display corresponding to the variable display is set in a predetermined shift direction (characteristic of this embodiment) in response to the decrease (consumption) of the hold memory. In part 207SG, the lights are turned off toward the left).

In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, when both the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure holding storage is preferentially executed. It has become like. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-6, for example, when there is one first special figure hold memory and two second special figure hold memories (only the LED at the left end of the first hold indicator 207SG025A). Is lit and the two LEDs on the left of the second hold indicator 207SG25B are lit), the second special figure hold memory is 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory. After that, the variable display based on the first special figure hold memory is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the round display 207SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). As the jackpot types in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A which is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B which is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C which is a 15-round jackpot. Therefore, which segment of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 is lit differs depending on the jackpot type.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED are included.

The effect control board 12 in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment includes a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322 that can operate between the origin position and the effect position during variable display and the like. The origin detection sensor 207SG331 capable of detecting that the 1 movable body 207SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 are located at the origin position of the second movable body 207SG322. The origin detection sensor 207SG332 capable of detecting this is connected.

FIG. 10-8 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 207SG in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10-8 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-8 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number in order to display the special figure reserved storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (commands for designating a winning determination result) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" and the judgment result of the big hit type (probability change, non-probability change, or sudden change) as the judgment result at the time of winning. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating a determination result of whether the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is the variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. It is a command.

The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating the newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (recovery of power failure, also referred to as hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and started (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that the operation for changing the set value has been started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the set value changed state). The command E104H is a set value change end notification command for notifying that the set value change operation has been completed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The command E105H is a set value confirmation start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started the setting value confirmation operation (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the set value confirmation state). The command E106H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the confirmation operation of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been completed.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program to perform the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 10-9, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determination, the random value MR4 for determining the display result of the general map, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 10-9, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each random value is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 10-10 shows the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, 1 variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a “small hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 10-10, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, the super reach fluctuation patterns Super Reach α and Super Reach β Is set shorter than. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is In this case, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In this embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set to be "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, so that the big hit expectation is set to be high. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into, for example, a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, and the like. Rather than determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after determining first, only the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern type is provided to determine these fluctuations. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value for determining the pattern type, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10, the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment illustrates a mode in which the fluctuation content (effect content) is predetermined for each fluctuation pattern, and the present invention illustrates this. The variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value, even if the variation pattern is the same. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 out of normal reach, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. As a fluctuation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach out of reach, when the set value is 3, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to make a fluctuation pattern that is out of super reach.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as the work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the side of the main board 11 by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 10-11 to 10-24, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 10-11 (A) and the second special figure display result shown in FIG. 10-11 (B). Judgment table (set value 2), first special figure display result judgment table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 10-12 (A), second special figure display result judgment table shown in FIG. 10-12 (B). (Setting value 2), the first special figure display result determination table (set value 3) shown in FIG. 10-13 (A), and the second special figure display result determination table (setting) shown in FIG. 10-13 (B). Value 3), the first special figure display result determination table (set value 4) shown in FIG. 10-14 (A), and the second special figure display result determination table (set value 4) shown in FIG. 10-14 (B). ), The first special figure display result determination table (set value 5) shown in FIG. 10-15 (A), the second special figure display result determination table (set value 5) shown in FIG. 10-15 (B), The first special figure display result determination table (set value 6) shown in FIG. 10-16 (A), the second special figure display result determination table (set value 6) shown in FIG. 10-16 (B), and FIG. In addition to the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in -21 (A) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 10-21 (B), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table and the small hit A fluctuation pattern determination table, an outlier variation pattern determination table, a general map display result determination table (not shown), a general map variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value is composed of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. In other words, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the amusement park side. Become.

10-11 (A) to 10-16 (B) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as the display result determination table, individual display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , The display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 1) used when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1237 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 1) used when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1237 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 10-12 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 2) used when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1253 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1383 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 10-12 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 2) used when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1253 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". In addition, when the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 10-13 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 3) used when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and out of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020-1272 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 10-13 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 3) used when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and out of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020-1272 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 is assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 10-14 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1292 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 10-14 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1292 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 10-15 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1317 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 10-15 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 5) used when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1317 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 10-16 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 6) used when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 10-16 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As described above, in each display result judgment table, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are set than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Probability to be determined (in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and set. Compared to 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the probability of being determined becomes high (in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1 / when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, the probability that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the case of the normal state or the time saving state. Is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the determination value becomes high.

In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 to 10-16, the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different according to each set value. Different (for example, if the set value is 1, the probability variation of the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability variation with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times. The jackpot probability multiplier in the state is about 1.56 times, and if the set value is 3, the jackpot probability multiplier in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value is constant (for example, 5 times). ) May be set.

Further, in each display result determination table for the first special figure, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Specifically, FIGS. 10-11 (A), 10-12 (A), 10-13 (A), 10-14 (A), 10-15 (A), 10-16 (Fig. 10-16). As shown in A), in the first special figure display result determination table, there is a probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. It is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the first special regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that they have the same value, which is different from the display result judgment table for figures. Specifically, FIGS. 10-11 (B), 10-12 (B), 10-13 (B), 10-14 (B), 10-15 (B), 10-16 (Fig. 10-16). As shown in B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure, there is a probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. It is set to 1/100.

It should be noted that the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is the same regardless of the set value. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be different depending on the set value. Further, the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" and the small hit gaming state is different according to the variable special map. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be the same probability regardless of the variable special figure.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to the "big hit" and the "small hit" in each display result judgment table, as shown in FIG. 10-17, the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the display result determination table for the first special figure in the case, the range of the hit determination values from 1020-1237 is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. ..

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is to judge the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values up to 1020-1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while the small The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-18, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the first special figure display result judgment table when the game state is in the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value is the same as in the first special figure display result judgment table when the game state is in the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6, and 32767 is set as the reference value of the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value) of 32767 to 33094. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 10-19, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is to judge the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values up to 1020-1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while the small The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-20, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range of the hit determination values from 102 to 1346 is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the big hit judgment values are not included in the common numerical range. Numerical values within the range including the common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-17 to 10-20, in each display result determination table, the hit determination value of 1020 is used as a reference regardless of the game state and the set value. The judgment value included in the common numerical range or the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the hit judgment is made regardless of the game state and the set value. The variable display result is determined by using the determination value included in a continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) with the value 32767 as a reference as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Further, in each of these display result judgment tables, when the fluctuation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is Same). In addition, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, there is a probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the "big hit". Judgment values are assigned so that the lower the value and the larger the value of the set value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5> Set value 4> Set value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is decided to be A to jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 10-11 (A) and 10-16 (B) indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In this embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

10-21 (A) and 10-21 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 10-21 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 10-21 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is variably displayed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature portion 207SG of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-22. In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as the jackpot type, the jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state to shift to the low probability high base state, and the jackpot game After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and the jackpot B and the jackpot C (also referred to as the probabilistic jackpot) that shift to the high-accuracy high-base state are set.

The big hit game state by "big hit A" is a normally open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state which is advantageous for the player five times (so-called 5 rounds) and is repeatedly executed. The jackpot game state by "B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Figure Ends when the game is in a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot B or the jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is the big hit B or the big hit C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs in.

In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, a mode in which three types of jackpots A to C are provided as jackpot types is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is 2. There may be less than one type, or four or more types.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is "1", the MR2 determination value ranges from 0 to 299. , 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 229 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 200-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "4", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 190-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "5", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 170-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "6", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control and the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the ball ejection rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set values are 5, 4, 3, 2, and so on. The smaller the value in the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination value of MR2 is 0 to 299. Of these, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 180-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 159 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 160-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "4", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 140 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "5", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 120-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "6", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. (A judgment value is not assigned to the jackpot B).

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both probabilistic control and probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining jackpot C decreases in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set values are 5, 4, 3, 2, and so on. The smaller the value in the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the big hit type is determined to be big hit B. In other words, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, it means that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%). Although it is included, even when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, a case may be provided in which the big hit type is determined to be big hit B. ..

As described above, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved. It has become.

In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is not limited to this. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability increases and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is easily determined). Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

Further, the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment illustrates a mode in which the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game playability itself does not change. The game playability is not limited to this, and the game playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small while the small hit probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). ..

Further, when the game playability is changed according to the set value in this way, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect, and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (a game state is changed based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot game state).

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the variable display result to "big hit" and the variable display result to be "small hit". The jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is determined in advance and the deviation pattern judgment table used when it is decided in advance that the variable display result is "off" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random value within the range that the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIGS. 10-23 (A) and 10-23 (B), the jackpot variation pattern determination table is a jackpot variation pattern determination table (big hit A) used when the jackpot type is jackpot A. (For big hit) and the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (for big hit B and big hit C) used when the big hit type is for big hit B and big hit C are prepared in advance, and these big hit fluctuation pattern judgment tables (for big hit C) are prepared in advance. In the fluctuation pattern judgment table for (for A) and jackpot (for jackpot B and jackpot C), the fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIG. 10-23 (A), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), when the set value is "1", 1 of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3. ~ 400 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 380 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 381 to 835. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 836 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 360 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and up to 361 to 820. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 821 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 340 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and up to 341 to 805. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 806 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 320 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and up to 321 to 790. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 791 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 300 of the MR3 judgment value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and are from 301 to 775. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 776 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 10-23 (B), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination values of MR3 is 1 to 997. , 1 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), 21 to 550 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot. When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 180 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 181 to 510 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 511 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 160 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 161 to 470 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 471 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 140 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 141 to 430 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 431 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 120 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 121 to 290 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 391 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 100 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 101 to 350 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

In this way, when the jackpot A is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). It is higher than the set value, and the set values are lower in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. Further, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) determines the fluctuation pattern of the superreach α jackpot (PB1-2). It is higher than the ratio and lowers in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

That is, in this embodiment, when the type of jackpot is "big hit B" or "big hit C", the super reach β is easily determined, and the type of jackpot is "big hit A". In this case, the player is assigned so that the super reach α can be easily determined, so that when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, it may be a “big hit B” or a “big hit C”. Can raise the expectation of.

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-23 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, the range of the determination value of MR3 is 0 to 997 regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. Of these, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit fluctuation pattern (PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in the present invention, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern of the small hit. The fluctuation pattern of the small hit may be determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns at different ratios with the set values 1 to 6.

Further, the deviation pattern determination table includes the deviation pattern determination table A used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control, and the low base. The deviation pattern determination table B used when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and the deviation variation used when the total number of holding storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for deviation used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is implemented are prepared in advance.

In the deviation pattern determination table A, the non-reach deviation variation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β.

As shown in FIG. 10-24 (A), in the deviation pattern determination table A (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 1 or less), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β. When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 431 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 410 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 411 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 390 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 391 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 370 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and the range is 371 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "6", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 351 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) out of reach α and the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β is assigned as the determination value. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 10-24 (B), in the deviation pattern determination table B (for low-base medium total pending storage number 2 to 4), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3. Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1). , 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β. Further, when the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 480 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and the range is 481 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 460 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 461 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 440 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 441 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 420 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 421 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 400 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and the range is 401 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table C for loss, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) out of reach α and the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β is assigned as the determination value. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 10-24 (C), in the deviation pattern determination table C (for low-base medium total pending storage number of 5 or more), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β. When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 531 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 511 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 491 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 471 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 451 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation variation pattern corresponding to the time reduction control are performed. (PA2-2), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 10-24 (D), in the deviation pattern determination table D (for high base and medium), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination values of MR3 is 1 to 997. 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach. It is assigned to the variation pattern of α out of alignment (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β out of alignment (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 531 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 511 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 491 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 471 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 451 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

In this way, when the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the ratio of determining the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the ratio of determining the normal reach fluctuation pattern. Is set to decrease in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. When the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, 701 to 900 of the determination values are the fluctuation patterns of the super reach α deviation, and 901 to 997 are the deviation patterns of the super reach β, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. If each variation pattern is assigned, that is, if the variable display result is out of alignment, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a common decision rate regardless of the set value, so the super reach variation pattern It is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered because the variable display is not executed.

In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α deviation and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the deviation of the super reach β are completely the same between the set values as the deviation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α outlier and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of super reach β are between each set value. May differ by a small margin (for example, about 1%).

In addition, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value is illustrated. , The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination ratio of all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same regardless of the set value. It may be present, or only the determination ratio of any of the fluctuation patterns of non-reach and normal reach may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach α and the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach β are determined regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is out of order, the super reach α The determination rate of only one of the deviation pattern determination rate and the super reach β deviation variation pattern may be the same regardless of the set value.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach α and the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach β are determined regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is set even when the variable display result is a big hit. Regardless of the set value, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, a mode in which the determination ratio of the non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value is illustrated. , Depending on the set value, there may be one or more undetermined fluctuation patterns among the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern. That is, if the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value, one of the fluctuation patterns should not be determined (the determination ratio is 0%), or the specific fluctuation pattern is 100%. It is also included to decide by the ratio of.

The non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter variation time than the non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) is more non-reach. The deviation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 10-10). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By winning a start prize while the player is in the game, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize that is not stored on hold to occur, and when the number of stored memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long and the non-reach is out of reach. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes longer, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being less interesting due to the variable display not being executed.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-24 (A) to 10-24 (C), variations are made using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the total number of reserved storages. Although the form of determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first The variation pattern may be determined using a variation pattern determination table for deviation depending on the number of reserved memory of the special symbol and the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed).

Further, in each of the deviation pattern determination tables of the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, the fluctuation of the super reach deviation The range of random numbers assigned to the patterns (PA2-2 and PA2-3) is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the variable display is actually executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss (super reach loss). The appearance rate of the fluctuation pattern) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It should be noted that the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment illustrates a mode in which the rate at which the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern out of the super reach differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. , The present invention is not limited to this, and in consideration of the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the variable display is out of super reach at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be executed according to the fluctuation pattern of.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 10-1 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 207SG150 shown in FIG. 10-25 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. .. The game control data holding area 207SG150 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 207SG151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 207SG151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 207SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 207SG152, and a game control timer setting unit. It includes a 207SG153, a game control counter setting unit 207SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 207SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A is a special feature in which the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting winning (first starting winning) is generated, but it has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the first starting winning opening with the holding number, and sets the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment are set as pending data. , Store until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 207SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B has not been started yet, although the game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the second starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment are set as pending data. , Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 207SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a big hit will occur.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit 207SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure holding storage unit 207SG151C associates with the hold number in the order in which the game balls pass through the passing gate, and is for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 of the above is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 207SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 207SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 207SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 207SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 207SG154, random number values not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random number values MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 207SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 207SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Further, in the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation, for example, for effect control as shown in FIG. 10-26 (A). A data holding area 207SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 207SG190 shown in FIG. 10-26 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 207SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 207SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 207SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 207SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 207SG191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 207SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 207SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 207SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 207SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 207SG193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 207SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 207SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning command buffer 207SG194A as shown in FIG. 10-26 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 207SG194. The reception command buffer 207SG194A at the time of starting winning is stored in the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display are provided. In addition, the start winning command buffer 207SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, and the variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer 207SG194A are the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage separately is secured in association with the hold storage number notification command.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in such a variable manner. It is designed to be cleared in the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing executed when the process is finished.

Further, in the start winning command buffer 207SG194A in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, a hold display flag in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the hold storage display is set is set in the first special figure hold storage and the hold display flag. A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that the buffer numbers corresponding to the second special figure reserved storage can be stored in association with each buffer number.

In the hold display flag, when the execution of the hold display notice effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold storage display is stored. , When the hold storage display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U, and the execution of the hold display notice effect is decided. "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold memory display of a special mode (for example, square (◇) or star (☆)) different from the normal display mode. ) Is set, a hold storage display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first hold storage display area 207SG005D and the second hold storage display area 207SG005U, and the variation corresponding to the hold storage display. On the display, it is announced that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a super reach.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 207SG194A. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 207SG194A. I will go. At the time of starting winning, the start opening winning designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The symbol specification command, the variable category specification command, and the hold storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 207SG194A shown in FIG. 10-26 (B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the hold storage of the variation display that ended immediately before each time the variation display of the effect symbol was started. The entry (entry with the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2") is deleted. The stored contents of the entries after the hold storage of the variable display that starts are shifted from those stored in the entry corresponding to -1 ”. For example, when the variable display of the effect symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed in the stored state shown in FIG. 10-26 (B), each command stored in the buffer number “0” is deleted and the buffer number is deleted. Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". Each command that is shifted and stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variablely displayed at that time.

In the read-ahead notice setting process in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is an entry for which the hold display flag is not set, and the hold display flag is set. If there is an entry that has not been entered, depending on whether or not the hold display notice effect is executed and whether or not the hold display notice effect is executed based on the symbol specification command or variable category command stored corresponding to the entry. The display mode (display pattern) of the hold storage display is determined. When it is decided to execute the hold display notice effect, the hold memory display mode is determined from the square (◇) and the star (☆), and when it is decided not to execute the hold display notice effect, the display mode of the hold memory display is decided. Is determined as white circle. Then, a value corresponding to the determined display mode of the hold storage display is set in the hold display flag.

After the hold display flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold display update process (see FIGS. 10-52) so that the hold storage display becomes the first hold storage display area 207SG005D or the second hold storage display area. It will be displayed on 207SG005U.

The feature unit 207SG of this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which a hold display notice effect can be executed as a look-ahead notice effect that can be determined to be executed in the look-ahead notice setting process, but the present invention is limited to this. As the look-ahead notice effect, for example, a background change effect in which the background image displayed on the image display device 5 changes, an operation effect in which a movable body provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 operates, and the like are reserved. It may be possible to execute an effect other than the display notice effect.

Next, the display of the display monitor 207SG029 in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 10-27 (A), the display monitor 207SG029 includes a first display unit 207SG029A, a second display unit 207SG029B, a third display unit 207SG029C, and a fourth display unit 207SG029D. The first display unit 207SG029A to the fifth display unit 207SG29E are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 207SG029A to the fifth display unit 207SG29E can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display different colors or so-called rainbows while changing these colors in an extremely short cycle.

The display control of the display monitor 207SG029 in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment is executed by using the areas not subject to the test in the entire area of the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko gaming machine 1. ..

As shown in FIGS. 10-27 (B) and 10-27 (C), the display monitor 207SG029 has a base value calculated in a normal state (low accuracy and low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states. Base L (real-time value during measurement), base 1 which is a base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each out 6000 balls in the first out 6000 ball in all game states, and base 1 in all game states. Base 2 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the second out 6000 balls, and the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the third out 6000 balls in the all-game state. It is possible to display the base 3 which is the base value calculated in. The base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 are displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 as a percentage.

When the base L is actually displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "L." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "bL." Of the base L. Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 1 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "1." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b1." Of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 2 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "2." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b2." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 3 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "3." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b3." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D.

In the display monitor 207SG029 of this embodiment, the control of sequentially displaying the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 is executed by the control of the main board 11 (CPU103). For example, as shown in FIG. 10-29, the main board 11 executes control for switching the display of the display monitor 207SG029 in the order of base L → base 1 → base 2 → base 3 at 5-second intervals. The display color of each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-28, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in white, and the pachinko gaming machine is displayed. When the set value set to 1 is "2", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in blue, and when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", it is displayed. Each base value on the monitor 207SG029 is displayed in yellow, and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in green, and the pachinko game machine 1 When the set value set in is "5", each base value in the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in red, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "6", the display monitor is displayed. Each base value in 207SG029 is displayed in purple. Therefore, the clerk of the amusement park can identify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 only by checking the display color of the display monitor 207SG029 without the CPU 103 executing the setting value changing process described later. ing.

Next, the game control main process in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 10-30 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (207SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (207SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether or not the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (207SGSa003; N) or the RAM 102 is not normal (207SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (207SGSa003; Y, 207SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6, that is, whether the set value of a normal value is stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa005).

If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is not any of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N). Y) indicates whether or not the setting value changing flag indicating that the setting value changing process described later was being executed before the power failure (the power failure occurred during the execution of the setting value changing process) is set. (207SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (207SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear processing described later has been executed is set. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (207SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (207SGSa008).

When the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y), the RAM clear flag is set and the process proceeds to 207SGSa011 (207SGSa010). When the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa008; N), the RAM clear flag is set to 207SGSa010 without executing 207SGSa010. move on.

In the 207SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa012). When the release sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the lock switch 207SG051 ON and the gaming machine frame 207SG003 open (207SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether or not it is (207SGSa013a).

When the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013a; Y), the set value change process (207SGsa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to proceed to 207SGSa013d, and the RAM clear flag is set. If is not set (207SGSa013a; N), the set value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa013d.

When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa011; N) or the release sensor is OFF (207SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa013d without executing the processes of 207SGSa013a to 207SGSa013c.

In 207SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared (whether or not the RAM clear process (207SGSa009) is executed) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time ( 207SGSa013d). When the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (207SGSa013e) is executed and then the process proceeds to 207SGSa014. When the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa013d; N), the RAM clear process (207SGSa013e) Proceed to 207SGSa014 without executing.

In the 207SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set again (207SGSa014). When the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa022, and when the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa014; N), the internal state of the main board 11 is stopped (power cut). Performs recovery processing to return to the state of (207SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be. Then, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered (started by hot start) in the state before the power failure, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 207SGSa028. (207SGSa016).

Further, in the 207SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated (207SGSa017). When the clear switch is ON (207SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018) and whether or not the release sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa019).

When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018; Y) and the release sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or a normal setting value is not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a formal procedure by an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 207SG003 is opened and the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on, the pachinko game is operated while operating the clear switch. When the machine 1 is started), the set value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (207SGSa020), and if the set value changing flag is set, the set value changing flag is cleared (207SGSa021). Then, the processes of 207SGSa009 to 207SGSa016 described above are executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa017; N), the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa018; N), and the release sensor 207SG090 is OFF (207SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa031.

Further, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 on the assumption that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start (207SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set (207SGsa023), and as shown in FIG. 10-36 (A), all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are set. Cold start notification is started by starting blinking (207SGsa024).

After executing 207SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by -1 (207SGsa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer is not timer-out (207SGsa026; N), the processes of 207SGsa025 and 207SGsa026 are repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer is timer-out (207SGsa026; Y), all segments on the display monitor 207SG029. Ends blinking (207SGSa027) and proceeds to 207SGSa028.

In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, an embodiment is exemplified in which all segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are blinked over a period (for example, 5 seconds) of the cold start notification timer at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may be blinked at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, at least a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may be turned on.

Then, in the 207SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (207SGSa028) that initially sets the random number circuit 104, and causes the game control microcomputer 100 to periodically interrupt the timer at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). Set the built-in CTC register (207SGSa029) and allow interrupts (207SGSa030). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

Further, in the 207SGSa031, the CPU 103 refers to the effect control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error) and that the CPU 103 recovers from the power failure during the setting change described later. And sends an error specification command according to the abnormality of the set value (207SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (207SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by -1 (207SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer is not timered out (207SGSa034; N), the processes of 207SGsa033 and 207SGSa034 are repeatedly executed, and when the error notification execution waiting timer is timered out (207SGSa034; Y), FIG. 10-36. As shown in (B), the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit 207SG029B constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are used as notifications (error notifications) of the occurrence of an abnormal setting value error or the recovery from the power failure during the setting change. , "E." is displayed on each of the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (207SGSa035).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-37 (B), the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa036), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the above, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa032 (207SGSa037). After that, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the process of 207SGsa032-207SGSa037 until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected (until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the game hall), thereby displaying the display monitor 207SG029. , The first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B execute notification of the occurrence of an error.

As described above, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment recovers from an abnormal set value being set or a power failure during the change of the set value, the display monitor 207SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are used to notify the occurrence of an error, the clerk of the game hall or the like can generate an error or set a value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the power failure during the change has been restored. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and the recovery from the power failure while changing the set value can be recognized by the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It has become.

In the game control main process of the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-30, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or the set value is being changed in 207SGSa021. Although the embodiment in which the RAM clear process (207SGSa009) is executed after clearing the flag is illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the present invention is not limited thereto, and the RAM clear process is not limited thereto. Is not when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or after clearing the setting value changing flag in 207SGSa021, but when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014). It may be executed in Y).

FIG. 10-31 (A) is a flowchart showing a RAM clear process (207SGSa009) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control surface process. In the RAM clearing process, the CPU 103 first specifies the second address from the beginning in the RAM 102 (207SGSa041). Next, "00H" is set (stored) at the specified address (207SGSa042). Then, it is determined whether or not the designated address is the last address of the RAM 102 (FXXX described later) (207SGSa043). If the specified address is not the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; N), the next address in the RAM 102 is specified (207SGSa044), and the specified address is the address (F002) that stores the RAM clear flag. Whether or not it is determined (207SGSa45).

If the specified address is not the address that stores the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa042, and if the specified address is the address that stores the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045; N), the next step is continued. Specify the address of and proceed to 207SGSa042 (207SGSa046). If the specified address is the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; Y), the RAM clearing process ends.

As shown in FIG. 10-31 (B), addresses (F000 to FXXX) are assigned to the RAM 102 in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment for each storage area. Among these storage areas, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, and the second address (F001) from the head of the RAM 102 is described later. Temporary setting value is stored. Further, the RAM clear flag is stored in the third address (F002). Other addresses (F003 or later) include special figure hold memory, normal figure hold memory, various counter values, various timers, various flags, game information including error information generated in pachinko game machine 1, and the previous special symbol. The setting value (judgment used setting value) read to set the display result judgment table when the variable display result is judged in the normal processing is stored. The backup data (including the backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among the areas in which other information is stored. Further, a value indicating a factory-shipped state (for example, a set value "0") is set at the head address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of factory shipment. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a state where a value indicating a factory default state is set in the first address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change process may be executed without fail, or the image may be executed. You may be urged to restart the pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change process by displaying on the display device 5 or the like.

That is, the RAM clear processing in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment is a process of clearing data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag by storing "00H" at an address other than the set value.

Note that the feature unit 207SG in this embodiment illustrates a mode in which data other than the set value is cleared in the RAM clearing process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started at the start, only the game information stored in the predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F003 or later in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment) may be cleared.

Further, the feature unit 207SG in this embodiment illustrates a mode in which the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear flag is used as a game control microcomputer. By storing in 100 registers (for example, an accumulator that is the center of calculation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, or a general-purpose register), the process of storing or reading the RAM clear flag in the RAM 102 is omitted. The processing load of the CPU 103 may be reduced. When the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved as compared with the case where the RAM clear flag is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100. Therefore, the RAM clear flag can be set by the processing of the CPU 103. It is possible to prevent the information (data) from being overwritten.

FIG. 10-32 is a flowchart showing a set value change process (207SGSa013b) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the set value change process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa051), and also starts lighting the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator. The blinking of the 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B is started (see 207SGSa052, FIG. 10-37 (A)). Further, the CPU 103 has only one segment among the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 as a mode corresponding to the set value change process (a mode in which none of the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C shown in FIG. 10-6). Starts lighting (207SGSa052a).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa053), and determines whether or not any of the values 1 to 6 is stored as the set value in the address F000 of the RAM 102. (207SGSa053a). When a value other than 1 to 6 is stored in the RAM 102, or when the set value is not stored in the RAM 102 (when the set value is cleared in the 207SGSa020), the set value is set in the address F000 in the RAM 102. Set "1" (reset the set value to "1") and proceed to 207SGSa054 (207SGSa053b). If any value of 1 ^ & is stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa053a; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 without executing the process of 207SGSa053b.

In the 207SGSa054, the CPU 103 sets a timer for waiting for the start of the power failure detection process execution to wait until the power failure detection process is executed. Then, the value of the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer is set to -1 (207SGSa055), and it is determined whether or not the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa056). When the power-off detection process execution start wait timer is not timer-out (207SGSa056; N), the processes of 207SGsa055 and 207SGsa056 are repeatedly executed, and the power-off detection process execution start wait timer is timer-out (207SGsa056; Y). Executes the power failure detection process (207SGSa057).

After executing the power failure detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa058), and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall (207SGSa059).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the setting value changing flag (207SGSa061) and determines whether or not the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is operated (207SGSa062). If there is no operation of the setting changeover switch 207SG052 (207SGSa062; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa065, and if there is an operation of the setting changeover switch 207SG052 (207SGSa062; Y), the address F001 in the RAM 102 is based on the operation of the setting changeover switch 207SG052. Update the content (207SGSa063).

Specifically, when the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "1", the set value "2", which is one step more advantageous for the player than the "1", is set as a temporary set value. When the set value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "2", the set value "3", which is one step more advantageous for the player than the "2", is provisionally set. A value 1 larger than the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, such as being stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a set value, is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a borrowing setting. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "6", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a temporary set value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa064), and determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065).

When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processes of 207SGSa062 to 207SGSa065 to store a new temporary setting value at the address F001 of the RAM 102, or is stored at the address F001. The process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is executed.

When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa065 (207SGSa065; N), the CPU 103 clears the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066) and displays the set value (or tentative set value) on the display monitor 207SG029. (207SGSa067), and all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned off (207SGSa067a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa068, 207SGSa068a).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a temporary set value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069). If the temporary setting value is not stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072, and if the temporary setting value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGsa069; Y), the temporary setting value is further stored in the RAM 102. It is determined whether or not the value of the set value stored in the address F000 and the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 are different (207SGSa070).

When the value of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 and the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 are the same (207SGsa070; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072 and is stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102. When the value of the set value and the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 are different (207SGsa070; Y), the temporary set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 is set to the address F000. Store (207SGSa071) and proceed to 207SGSa072. That is, in the process of 207SGSa071, the temporary set value is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the actual set value.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa073), and ends the set value change process.

FIG. 10-33 is a flowchart showing a set value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa101), and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator. The blinking of the 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B is started (see 207SGSa102, FIG. 10-37 (A)). Further, the CPU 103 has only one segment among the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 as a mode corresponding to the set value confirmation process (a mode in which none of the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C shown in FIG. 10-6). Starts lighting (207SGSa103).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa104), and sets a power cutoff detection process execution start wait timer for waiting until the power supply disconnection detection process is executed (207SGSa105). ). Then, the value of the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer is set to -1 (207SGSa106), and it is determined whether or not the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa107). When the power-off detection process execution start wait timer is not timer-out (207SGSa107; N), the processes of 207SGsa106 and 207SGsa107 are repeatedly executed, and when the power-off detection process execution start wait timer is timer-out (207SGsa107; Y). Executes the power failure detection process (207SGSa108). The power failure detection process (207SGSa108) is the same process as the power failure detection process (207SGSa057) of the setting value change process described above.

After executing the power failure detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa109), and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall (207SGSa110).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111; Y), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 207SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing the process of the 207SGSa111. When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in the 207SGsa111 (207SGSa111; N), the display of the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is finished (207SGSa112), and the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B All the segments constituting the above are turned off (207SGSa112a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa113, 207SGSa114).

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a set value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa115), and ends the set value confirmation process.

In this way, from the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207Sg004B and the round display 207SG131 are lit, and the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second By starting the holding display 207Sg025B and the right-handed lamp 207SG232 blinking, the player, the clerk of the game hall, etc., is changing the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 or the set value. It is possible to recognize that the confirmation is in progress.

In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, among the segments constituting the round display 207SG131, as a mode corresponding to the set value change process and the set value confirmation process at the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. Although the embodiment of lighting only the LED of No. 1 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting patterns of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 are the jackpot A and the jackpot shown in FIG. 10-6. As long as it does not correspond to either B or the jackpot C, the lighting mode is not particularly limited.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-37 (A), at the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the mode corresponding to the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. Although the embodiment in which the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 are lit in the same manner is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 are changed in set value. It may be lit in different modes at the start of the process and at the start of the set value confirmation process.

As described above, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is in a state where the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is open. By turning on the and clear switch, the setting value change process is executed.

At this time, in the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 10-35 (A) to 10-35 (E), by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit The display using the 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (display of the base value shown in FIGS. 10-27) is completed. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 in this embodiment uses a different number of display copies depending on whether the set value change process is executed at startup or the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value change process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. Then, when the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is operated while the set value is displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG029D, the display on the fourth display unit 207SG029D is updated. When the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in this state, the numerical value displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG29D is set as a new set value.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on with the gaming machine frame 207SG003 open. By setting (clear switch is OFF), the set value confirmation process is executed.

At this time, in the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 10-35 (A), 10-35 (B), and 10-35 (E), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off to make the first. The display using the display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (display of the base value shown in FIGS. 10-27) is completed. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 in this embodiment uses a different number of display copies depending on whether the set value confirmation process is executed at the time of startup or the case where the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value confirmation process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. The display of the set value on the fourth display unit 207SG029D ends when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a playable state.

FIG. 10-34 is a flowchart showing a power failure detection process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is an input of a power supply cutoff signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped to a predetermined value or less (207SGS081). If there is no power off signal input (207SGS081; N), the process ends, and if there is a power off signal input (207SGS081; Y), the backup data including the set value information stored in the RAM 122 is specified. (207SGS082), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS083). Then, after creating check data to be used when recovering the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS084), the process shifts to a loop process in which no process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected.

In the game control timer interrupt process in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-38, the CPU 103 executed the same power failure detection process (207SGS200) as the above-mentioned 207SGSa057 and 207SGSa108. Later, S21 to S27 (see FIG. 4) are executed.

Next, the start winning determination process of the feature unit 207SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-39. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting port switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not (207SGS501a). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (207SGS501a; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (207SGS501a; Y). For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (207SGS502). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154. When the first special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in the 207SGS502 (207SGS502; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "1" (207SGS503). ..

When the first start port switch 22A is off in the 207SGS501a (207SGS501a; N), or when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit in the 207SGS502 (207SGS502; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B It is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is ON based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by (207SGS501b). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (207SGS501b; Y), the second special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (207SGS501b; Y). For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (207SGS505). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154. When the second special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in the 207SGS505 (207SGS505; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "2" (207SGS506). ..

After executing any of the processes of 207SGS503 and 207SGS506, the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (207SGS507). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (207SGS508). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154, may be updated to be added by 1.

After executing the processing of the 207SGS508, the CPU 103 uses the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit 207SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and specified (207SGS509). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (207SGS510). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A stores numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the start port buffer value is "2". Numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of 207SGS509, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for determining the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the variable display mode including the variable display time, and will be described later. The variable display result determination module (207SGS525) is specified to determine the variable display result.

Following the processing of the 207SGS510, the transmission setting of the start opening winning designation command according to the start opening buffer value is performed (207SGS511). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 Make settings to send the second start port winning designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

Following the process of 207SGS511, the random value determination process at the time of winning is executed (207SGS512). After that, for example, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. (207SGS513). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

After executing the process of 207SGS513, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (207SGS514). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (207SGS514; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (207SGS515), and then the process proceeds to 207SGS504. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (207SGS514; N), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (207SGS516), and then the start winning process is performed. finish. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 10-40 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed by the 207SGS 512 of FIG. 10-39 as the winning random number value determination process. When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started in the feature unit 207SG, the special symbol display result (variable display of the special symbol) is performed by the special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 5, FIG. 10-41) described later. The result) is set as "big hit" to determine whether to control the big hit gaming state, and the special figure display result is set to "small hit" to determine whether to control the small hit gaming state. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination processing of the 207SGS512 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). Therefore, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. Do. As a result, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, at the start of the variable display. It is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display mode of which category, and based on this judgment result. Then, as will be described later, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes a look-ahead advance notice effect such as a hold display advance notice effect.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 10-40 (A), the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit 207SG152, for pachinko gaming. The current gaming state of the machine 1 is specified (207SGS521). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state.

Following the processing of the 207SGS521, the CPU 103 refers to the start address in the RAM 102 (see FIG. 10-31 (B)) and specifies the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS522). Next, the special figure display result determination table according to the current game state, the start opening buffer value, and the set value is selected and set (207SGS524). After that, in the variable display result determination module (207SGS525) shown in FIGS. 10-42, a process of determining whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "missing" is performed.

As shown in FIG. 10-42, in the variable display result determination module, the CPU 103 indicates a numerical value range of the jackpot determination value in the set special figure display result determination table and a random number value MR1 for determining the specified special figure display result. It is compared with the data (207SGS571), and it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (207SGS572). At this time, since it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit".

When it is determined by the 207SGS572 that it is within the jackpot determination range (207SGS572; Y), it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot in the variable display (207SGS576). On the other hand, when it is determined by the 207SGS572 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is not achieved in the variable display (207SGS572; N), the small hit determination in the set special figure display result determination table The numerical range of the value is compared with the numerical data indicating the specified random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result (207SGS573), and the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in 207SGS509 of FIG. 10-39. It is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the above is within the predetermined small hit determination range (207SGS574).

When it is determined that the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (207SGS574; Y), it is determined that the numerical data is a small hit in the variable display (207SGS577). On the other hand, if it is determined by the 207SGS574 that it is not within the small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that the small hit is not achieved in the variable display (207SGS574; N), it is determined that the variable display is out of range (207SGS575). ).

Returning to FIG. 10-40 (A), it is confirmed by 207SGS575 whether or not it is determined to be a big hit in the variable display (207SGS526), and when it is determined that it is not a big hit (207SGS526; N), in the variable display in 207SGS525. If it is confirmed whether or not it is determined to be a small hit (207SGS527), and if it is determined that it is not a small hit, that is, if it is determined that the variable display is out of order (207SGS526; N), the variable display result is "out of order". The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command corresponding to the above, is executed (207SGS527a), and whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state. (207SGS528).

When the 207SGS526 determines that a big hit is obtained in the variable display (207SGS526; Y), the big hit type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type and the big hit type determination table (207SGS533). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that composes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

In addition, a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designation command when the jackpot is A, a third symbol designation command when the jackpot is B, and a fourth symbol when the jackpot is C. Execute the transmission setting of the symbol specification command (207SGS534), and then select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table according to the jackpot type as the table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (207SGS535), and set it to 207SGS536. move on.

Further, when the 207SGS527 determines that a small hit is obtained in the variable display (207SGS527; Y), the transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being a "small hit". (207SGS531), select and set the variation pattern determination table for small hits (207SGS532), and proceed to 207SGS536.

If the time reduction flag is not set in 207SGS528 (207SGS528; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set (207SGS529), and if the time reduction flag is set (207SGS528; Y). ), The deviation pattern determination table D is selected and set (207SGS530). The deviation pattern determination table A is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved storages is 2 or less. Further, the deviation pattern determination table D is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the game state is a high base state in which the time saving control is executed.

In the feature unit 207SG, in addition to the deviation pattern determination table A and the deviation pattern determination table D, the deviation pattern determination used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 is determined. Table B and the deviation pattern determination table C used when the total number of pending storages is 5 or more are prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 10-24, the deviation pattern determination table A is used. In the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the non-reach fluctuation pattern, 1 to 450 when the set value 1 is 1, 1 to 430 when the set value is 2. When the set value is 3, 1-410 is assigned, when the set value is 4, 1-390 is assigned, when the set value is 5, 1-370 is assigned, and when the set value is 6, 1-350 are assigned.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, for the non-reach variation pattern, the set value is 1 to 500 when the set value is 1 in the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. 2 is 1 to 480, 3 is 1 to 460, 4 is 1 to 440, 5 is 1 to 420, and 6 is 1 to 1. 400 are assigned to each.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table C and the deviation variation pattern determination table D, when the set value is 1 in the range that the random number value MR3 for the deviation pattern determination can take for the non-reach variation pattern. 1 to 550, 1 to 530 when the set value is 2, 1 to 510 when the set value is 3, 1 to 490 when the set value is 4, 1 to 470 when the set value is 5, set. When the value is 6, 1 to 450 are assigned respectively.

On the other hand, in any of the deviation pattern determination tables, 701 to 997 of the range that the random value MR3 for motion pattern determination can take for the fluctuation pattern of super reach is assigned regardless of the set value. There is.

Therefore, in the 207SGS529, by determining the variation pattern using the deviation pattern determination table A or the deviation pattern determination table D, the non-reach and super reach determinations are determined by changing the number of reserved memories after the determination. Is always a non-reach or super reach fluctuation pattern. Therefore, in the determination at the time of starting winning, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the deviation pattern determination table A or the deviation pattern determination table D. ..

After executing any of the processes of 207SGS529, 207SGS530, 207SGS532, and 207SGS535, the variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination are used to perform disturbance. The variation category according to the range of the determination values including the numerical value MR3 is determined (207SGS536). In this feature unit 207SG, as shown in FIG. 10-40 (B), when at least the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode is "non-reach" in common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. Variable category, variable display mode of "super reach", variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit), and "other" variable category. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not the variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, after setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the processing of 207SGS536 to the effect control board 12 (207SGS537), the random number value determination processing at the time of winning is terminated.

The symbol designation command and the variable category designation command are transmitted when the CPU 103 executes a command control process.

FIG. 10-41 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 5 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 10-41, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the number of second special symbol hold storage is “0” (207SGS541). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of the 207SGS541, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the number of the second special figure hold storage is other than "0" in the 207SGS541 (207SGS541; N), the hold data is stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 207SG151B corresponding to the hold number "1". , The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out and specified (207SGS542). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the processing of the 207SGS542, the second special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the second special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data in the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B is updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure hold storage unit 207SG151B are stored. The indicated pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (207SGS543).

After that, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer to "2" (207SGS544), the process shifts to 207SGS549.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in 207SGS541 (207SGS541; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (207SGS545). The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the processing of the 207SGS545, the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 reads the first hold storage count value stored in the first hold storage counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". Good. As described above, the processing of the 207SGS545 is executed when the 207SGS541 determines that the second special figure holding storage number is "0", and whether or not the first special figure holding storage number is "0". Is determined. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one that is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start prizes are generated is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. I just need to be able to decide.

When the number of the first special figure hold storage is other than "0" in the 207SGS545 (207SGS545; N), the hold data is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A corresponding to the hold number "1". , The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out and specified (207SGS546). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the processing of the 207SGS546, the first special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the first special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data of the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A is updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure hold storage unit 207SG151A are stored. The indicated pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (207SGS547).

After that, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the variable special figure designated buffer to "1" (207SGS548), the process shifts to 207SGS549.

In the 207SGS549, for example, the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified by checking the states of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 or the like (207SGS549). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state.

Following the processing of the 207SGS549, the CPU 103 refers to the start address of the RAM 102 (see FIG. 10-31 (B)) and specifies the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS550).

Next, the CPU 103 refers to the game information (see FIG. 10-31 (B)) stored in the RAM 102, and determines whether or not the determination used set value is stored (207SGS551). When it is determined that the determined used set value is stored (207SGS551: Y), the set value specified by 207SGS550 is compared with the stored determined used set value (207SGS552), and the specified set value is compared. It is determined whether or not the determined used set value stored in the above is the same (207SGS553).

When it is determined in the 207SGS553 that the specified set value and the stored determination used set value are not the same (207SGS553: N), an error specification command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value is issued to the effect control board 12. Along with making settings for transmission (207SGS554), a security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1 (207SGS555), and a loop is performed. Enter the process. After that, since the CPU 103 does not execute other processing, the pachinko gaming machine is put into a non-gaming state (non-gaming state) by the loop processing. The error designation command is transmitted when the CPU 103 executes a command control process.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment is stored in the set value (determined used set value) referred to when the previous variable display is executed and the current start address of the RAM 102. When the set values are different, the management device of the game hall can recognize that the determined used set value and the set value currently stored at the start address of the RAM 102 are different, so that the pachinko game can be played. The security of the machine 1 can be improved.

In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to be in a non-gamable state by executing the loop processing and not executing other processing. The CPU 103 is not limited to the above, and the CPU 103 performs processing such as limiting the launch of the game ball, and not paying out the prize ball or variablely displaying the special symbol even if the game ball is won in each winning opening. By executing this, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be controlled to be in a non-gamable state.

Further, in the special symbol normal processing of the feature unit 207SG, it is regarded as an abnormality that the determined used set value and the set value currently stored in the start address of the RAM 102 are different, and the abnormality is detected in the management device of the amusement park. Although the recognizable form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the display monitor 207SG029, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are shown in FIGS. 10-36 ( By setting the display mode (lighting mode) as shown in B) or FIG. 10-37 (B), the abnormality may be notified to the player, the clerk of the game hall, or the like.

Further, in the special symbol normal processing of the feature unit 207SG, when the determination used setting value and the setting value currently stored in the head address of the RAM 102 are different, the transmission of the error designation command to the effect control board 12 and the game Although the embodiment in which the security signal is output to the field management device only once is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transmission of these error specification commands and the output of the security signal are illustrated. May be repeatedly executed at predetermined period intervals in the above-mentioned incapacitated state.

Further, in the special symbol normal processing of the feature unit 207SG, if the determined used set value and the set value currently stored in the start address of the RAM 102 are different, the CPU 103 puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a non-gamable state. Although the mode to be controlled has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the determined used setting value and the setting value currently stored in the start address of the RAM 102 are different, the CPU 103 uses the pachinko game. It is not necessary to control the machine 1 so that it cannot be played.

Further, when the determination used setting value and the setting value currently stored in the start address of the RAM 102 are different and the control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the inoperable state by the CPU 103 is not executed, for example, the game hall Only the output of the security signal to the management device of the above may be executed, or the set value stored in the start address of the RAM 102 may be reset and specified. When resetting the set value stored in the start address of the RAM 102, for example, the determined used set value may be stored in the start address of the RAM 102, which is the most disadvantageous value for the player (this value). By setting 1) in the feature unit 207SG of the embodiment, it is possible to prevent the pachinko gaming machine 1 from being excessively advantageous to the player against the intention of the game hall.

Judgment in 207SGS551 When it is determined that the used set value is not stored, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts with a cold start and executes the first variable display (207SGS551: N) or the set value specified in 207SGS553. If it is determined that the used setting value is the same as the stored determination used setting value (207SGS553: Y), the special figure display result determination table according to the current gaming state, start port buffer value, and set value is selected. And set (207SGS556). After that, the same process as the process executed in the variable display result determination module in the 207SGS525 shown in FIG. 10-40 (A), that is, the process of 207SGS571 to 207SGS557 shown in FIG. 10-42 is performed (207SGS557).

Subsequently, it is confirmed whether or not the 207SGS557 determines that the variable display is a big hit (207SGS558), and when it is determined that the variable display is not a big hit (207SGS558; N), whether or not the 207SGS557 determines that the variable display is a small hit. Is confirmed (207SGS559).

When the 207SGS558 determines that a big hit will occur in the variable display (207SGS558; Y), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 is set to the ON state (207SGS561). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIGS. 10-21 (A) and 10-21 (B) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (207SGS562). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and "big hit A" and "big hit B" in the jackpot type determination table. , It is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type should be, depending on which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type of "big hit C" is matched (207SGS563).

By determining the jackpot type in the processing of the 207SGS563, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be changed to either a time-saving state or a probabilistic state in which the player has a higher advantage than the time-saving state. Whether to control is decided before the definite special symbol as the variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 207SG155 (207SGS564), the determined jackpot type can be set. Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "big hit A", it may be set to "1", if it is "big hit B", it may be set to "2", and if it is "big hit C", it may be set to "3".

On the other hand, when the 207SGS559 determines that a small hit is obtained in the variable display (207SGS559; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGS560 and the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 is set to the ON state (207SGS560). ..

On the other hand, if the 207SGS559 does not determine that a small hit is obtained in the variable display, that is, if the variable display is not correct (207SGS559; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS565.

In the 207SGS565, whether or not to control the big hit game state (whether or not the big hit flag is set) is determined in advance, and whether or not to control the small hit game state (whether or not the big hit flag is set). In addition to the pre-determined result of the above, the finalized special symbol is set according to the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state. As an example, a special symbol indicating the "-" symbol, which is an outlier symbol, is set as the finalized special symbol in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "out of place". Further, when the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" by 207SGS558, when the big hit type in 207SGS563 is "big hit A", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is confirmed. Set to. When the jackpot type is "big hit B", the special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the finalized special symbol. In addition, when the special figure display result is determined to be "small hit" by 207SGS559 (when the small hit flag is set in 207SGS560), the special figure display result is set to "small hit" in advance. Corresponding to the determination result, the special symbol indicating the symbol "2" which is the small hit symbol is set as the finalized special symbol. It should be noted that these confirmed special symbols are examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or a plurality of types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After the fixed special symbol is set in the 207SGS565, the set value specified in the 207SGS553 is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the determined used set value (207SGS566), and then the value of the special figure process flag is set to the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process. After updating to "1" (207SGS567), the special symbol normal processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved memory of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in 207SGS545 (207SGS545; Y), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (207SGS568), the special symbol is normal. End the process. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed to the substrate 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

Since the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment stores the determined used setting value as one of the game information in the RAM 102 (see FIG. 10-31 (B)), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to a cold start. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the judgment used setting is illustrated, although the mode in which the judgment used setting value does not exist when the first variable display is executed is illustrated. By storing the value in the area that has not been cleared by the RAM clearing process in the RAM 102, the judgment used set value and the RAM 102 are determined when the first variable display is executed even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start. It may be possible to compare the set values (set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) stored in the first address of.

In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-40 and 10-41, a form of determining a variable display result using a variable display result determination module that executes common processing is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result determination module is provided with a set value specified by the CPU 103 (a set value stored at the start address of the RAM 102) and a determined used set value. Control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the game stopped state when the process to be compared (207SGS551 to 207SGS553 shown in FIGS. 10-41) and the set value specified by the CPU 103 as a result of the process do not match the determined used set value. Processing (207SGS554 to 207SGS555) and the like may be included. By doing so, even when the random number value determination process at the time of winning is executed, the process of comparing the set value specified by the CPU 103 with the determined used set value and the set value specified by the CPU 103 and the determined use as the processing result are used. Since it is possible to execute the process of controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the game stopped state when the set values do not match, the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be further improved.

Next, the process executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described.

FIG. 10-43 is a flowchart showing the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (207SGS401) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and CTC (counter / timer) mounted on the effect control board 12. Set the register of the circuit).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a command reception waiting timer according to the command reception waiting period of the command transmitted from the main board 11 (207SGS403). Then, the value of the command reception waiting timer is decremented by -1 (207SGS404), and it is determined whether or not the command reception waiting timer has timed out (207SGS405). When the command reception waiting timer times out (207SGS405; N), the processes of 207SGS404 and 207SGS405 are repeatedly executed, and the command reception waiting timer waits until the timer goes out.

Then, when the command reception waiting timer goes out (207SGS405; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hot start notification command is received (207SGS406). When the hot start notification command is received (207SGS406; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored from power failure, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (the player in the player information input processing described later). After accepting the input of the information, the information including the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122) is cleared (207SGS407), and the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

When the hot start notification command is not received (207SGS406; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cold notification command is received (207SGS408). When the cold notification command is received (207SGS408; Y), the player information and the production information stored in the RAM 122 (the number of fluctuations, the number of jackpots, the number of fluctuations stored in the RAM 122 since the previous start of the pachinko gaming machine 1). (Information including the number of super reach times, etc.) is cleared (207SGS409), and the information stored in the RAM 102 is cleared, and the player information and the production information stored in the RAM 122 are notified. The RAM clear notification process for executing (RAM clear notification is executed) is executed (207SGS410). In the RAM clear notification process, the image in the image display device 5 (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-36 (A), the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 in the image display device 5 are cleared. A clerk at the game hall who started the pachinko game machine 1 after displaying the notification image 207SG005M1) that notifies the fact, emitting the game effect lamp 9, and outputting the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). It suffices to be able to notify that the player information and the production information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. Then, after executing the RAM clear notification process, the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

If the cold start notification command is not received (207SGS408; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411). When the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is started in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the set value is changed. The set value-related notification process for executing the notification that the operation is in progress (notification during setting value change) and the notification that the setting value is being confirmed (notification during setting value confirmation) is executed (207SGS412).

In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-50 (B) and 10-50 (C), the image display device 5 is used as a notification during setting value change and notification during setting value confirmation. , The notification image 207SG005M2 indicating that the setting value is being changed and the notification image 207SG005M3 indicating that the setting value is being confirmed are displayed, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state. Generally, the game machine frame 207SG003 is open, and a game hall clerk or the like who changes or confirms the set value visually recognizes the display monitor 207SG029 mounted on the main board 11. It is in a state of being. That is, the set value change state and the set value confirmation state are states in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by a clerk or the like of a game hall who changes or confirms the set value. It is considered that the clerk of the game hall cannot determine from the display of the image display device 5 whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirmation state. Therefore, as the notification during setting value change and the notification during confirmation of set value, the pachinko game machine is sent to the clerk of the game hall who changes or confirms the set value by the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the light emission of the game effect lamp 9. You may notify that 1 is activated in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 initializes the first movable body (207SGS413) for checking the operation of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body for checking the operation of the second movable body 207SG322. The process (207SGS414) is executed. In the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is performed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed. It is designed to do so (see Figure 10-49).

Here, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-47 and 10-48. FIG. 10-47 is a schematic explanatory view showing operation modes of non-detection operation control and actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the effect control CPU 120. 10-48 is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control, and FIG. 10-48 is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the non-detection operation control.

The first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 are provided so as to be able to reciprocate between the origin position (first position) and the effect position (second position), respectively, and the effect position (first position) is provided from the origin position. The forward movement to the second position) and the return movement from the effect position to the origin position are actual operation modes of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 during variable display and the like.

The effect control CPU 120 is movable when the detected portion of the movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 is not detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331, 207SG332 when the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process is executed. When the bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 have moved from the origin position during transportation or installation on the game island, or when the origin could not be returned during the previous operation (for example, when the effect is executed, the motor is removed. The moving body 207SG3211 and 207SG322 have moved from the origin position due to the vibration of the gaming machine due to a moving body error (operation abnormality) such as the moving body 207SG321 and 207SG322 cannot be confirmed to return to the origin or cannot operate due to adjustment, failure, or catching. If it is at a position other than the origin position (for example, a predetermined position between the origin position and the united position such as the position indicated by the black circle corresponding to the operation control at the time of non-detection in FIG. 10-32), the origin is returned. Execute non-detection operation control for. When the non-detection operation control is executed, since the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located at positions away from the origin position, the only operation is to move the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 in the direction of the origin position.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 detects when the non-detection operation control is executed in the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process, or the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332. If so, the actual operation check operation control is executed. The operation control for confirming the actual operation is the same as the actual operation actually performed in the effect using the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 (for example, the movable body effect executed during the variable display).

Next, the control speed set when the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control will be compared. The speeds shown in FIGS. 10-48 (A) and 10-48 (B) are control speeds set by the effect control CPU 120 for operating the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, and are the control speeds set for operating the movable bodies 207SG321. , 207SG 322 is different from the actual operating speed. That is, for example, when operating the predetermined movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, even if the same control speed is set for one moving section and the other moving section between the origin position and the effect position, one moving section. Movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 when the mode is different between the moving section and other moving sections (for example, a section with and without a spring, a straight section and a curved section), or when the moving section rises and falls even in the same moving section. The operating speed when the is actually operated may differ from the control speed. Further, even if the same control speed is set for the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, if there are differences in the size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, driving mechanism, etc. of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, each movable body 207SG321 , 207SG322's actual operating speeds are not always the same. When a plurality of movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated by stepping motors having the same performance, even if the same control speed is set for each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322, the size, weight, and size of each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322 are determined. When there are differences in operating mode, operating distance, driving mechanism, etc., the actual operating speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are not necessarily the same.

As shown in FIG. 10-48 (A), when the effect control CPU 120 executes the actual operation check operation control, the set actual operation check process data corresponds to the timer count value of the actual operation check process timer. The movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the control speed set in the above. Specifically, it controls to accelerate from the origin position and then decelerate to stop at the effect position, and to accelerate from the effect position and then decelerate to stop at the origin position. That is, in the actual operation confirmation operation control for confirming that each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322 can operate normally, the control speed of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 is reduced between the origin position and the effect position. Change in the order of high speed → low speed. That is, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect using each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322, the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed faster than the minimum speed. Since each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322 are controlled to operate at a speed within the range of, even when the actual operation confirmation operation control is executed, the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the minimum speed are higher than the minimum speed. Each movable body 207SG3211 and 207SG322 are controlled to operate at a speed within the range of the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed.

That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are the actual operating speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, and the control speeds are controlled so as to be the minimum speed and the maximum speed as the operating speeds. Will be set. In the following, when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the minimum control speed, the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated at the minimum speed, and when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the maximum control speed, the maximum speed is reached. It will be described as operating.

Here, the control speed is set so that the operating speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 during acceleration and deceleration are the minimum speeds in the actual operation confirmation operation control. Further, when returning to the origin position after moving to the effect position, the movable body 207SG3211 is controlled so as to be the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation check for a longer time than when the device is stopped at the effect position. After the 207SG322 is surely decelerated, the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-48 (B), when the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection time operation control, it is moved from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the effect position to the origin position. , Always control to operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. That is, the effect control CPU 120 has a maximum speed (maximum operation speed) in the non-detection operation control as the first operation control, which is equal to or less than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (this implementation). In the feature unit 207SG of the form of, the lowest control speed among the control speeds always set in the actual operation confirmation operation control is always set so as to be the same as the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control). Control is performed to operate the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322.

In this case, since it is unknown how far the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are from the origin position, when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located near the origin position, in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. When operated at the control speed when accelerating, that is, at high speed, when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 return to the origin position, the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332 cannot reliably detect the detected portion, or they can move from a short distance. Since there is a risk that the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322, etc. may be damaged by the impact when the bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 return to the origin position and the movement is restricted, the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322, etc. may be damaged, so that they operate at the lowest speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. Control.

Returning to FIG. 10-43, after executing the first movable body initialization process (207SGS413) and the second movable body initialization process (207SGS413), the effect control CPU 120 sets the set value during the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321. It is determined whether or not the set value early change end flag indicating that the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value has been completed is set (207SGS415). When the set value early change end flag is not set (207SGS415; N), it is further determined whether or not the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416). When the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416; N) Proceed to 207SGS412, and when the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation end notification command are not received (207SGS416; Y). Proceed to 207SGS417. If the set value early change end flag is set (207SGS415; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGS417 without executing the processing of 207SGS416.

In the 207SGS417, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the initialization (operation check) of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed (207SGS417). When the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 is not completed (207SGS417; N), the set value early change end flag is set and the process proceeds to 207SG412 (207SGS418), and the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed. If (207SGS417; Y), it is determined whether or not the initialization (operation check) of the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed (207SGS419). If the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 is not completed (207SGS419; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS412, and if the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 is completed (207SGS419; Y), the set value early change is completed. It is determined whether or not the flag is set (207SGS420).

In the 207SGS420, when the set value early change end flag is set (207SGS420; Y), the set value early change end flag is cleared (207SGS421), and the first movable body initialization process (207SGS422) which is the same process as the 207SGS413 Then, the second movable body initialization process (207SGS423), which is the same process as the 207SGS414, is executed, and the first movable body initialization process (207SGS422), 207SGS414, and the second movable body initialization process (207SGS423) are performed. It is determined whether or not the initialization (operation check) of the body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed (207SGS424). When the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is not completed (207SGS424; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS422, and when the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed. (207SGS424; Y) proceeds to 207SGS427.

As described above, regarding the processing of these 207SG412 to 207SG424, as shown in FIG. 10-49 (A), the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command (pachinko). The setting value change notification and the setting value confirmation notification are started from the time when the game machine 1 is controlled to the set value change state or the set value confirmation state), and the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are started. To execute. As described above, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, the second movable body initialization process is executed after the first movable body initialization process is completed, that is, the first movable body 207SG321. After the operation check is completed, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is executed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-49 (A), the effect control CPU 120 issues a set value change end notification command and a set value confirmation end notification command to the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process. When it is received, that is, when the change of the set value and the confirmation of the set value are completed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed, the first movable body initialization process and the second The movable body initialization process is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-49 (B), the effect control is performed at the timing when only the first movable body initialization process is completed among the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process. When the CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, that is, the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed, but the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is still completed. If the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed in the absence state, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are executed again after the second movable body initialization process is completed. It has become like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-49 (C), the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command at the timing when the first movable body initialization process is not yet completed. In other words, if the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed before the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initial stage that are being executed are completed. Only the conversion process is executed, and the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed again.

If the 207SGS411 does not receive the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command (207SGS411; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the error designation command is received (207SGS425). .. When the error specification command is received (207SGS425; Y), the error notification process (207SGS426) for performing the error notification indicated by the error specification command is executed, and when the error specification command is not received (207SGS425; N), the error notification process is executed. , 207 SGS 403.

As the error notification in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (D), if the image display device 5 displays the notification image 207SG005M4 corresponding to the error specified from the error designation command. Good. By displaying the notification image 207SG005M4 corresponding to the error specified from the error designation command on the image display device 5 in this way, the player can determine that an invalid value is set as a set value from the notification image 207SG005M4. , The power was turned on again in the pachinko game machine 1 in a state where a power failure occurred while changing the set value, and the set value (judgment used set value) referred to in the previous variable display is stored in the start address of the RAM 102. It is possible to recognize that the set value is different from the set value. In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, an error notification process (207SGS426) that can be executed when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, and an error notification process (207SGS439) that can be executed after the start of the pachinko game machine 1 is completed. There are two error notification processes.

Of these, regarding the error notification process (207SGS426) that can be executed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the error that occurred when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (CPU 103 is processing the game control main process 207SGSa031 shown in FIG. 10-30). The notification image 207SG005M4 is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the reception of the error designation command transmitted), and the error notification process (207SGS439) that can be executed after the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed is described in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The notification image 207SG005M4 is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the error that occurred after the startup of the above is completed (the CPU 103 receives the error specification command transmitted in the processing of the special symbol normal processing 207SGS554 shown in FIG. 10-41). Just do it.

As described above, in the effect control main process in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-44, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by the hot start, the player information (the player information). While clearing the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. since receiving the input of, from the RAM 122, the information for production (the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. ) And the set value information (a numerical value of any of "1" to "6" corresponding to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) are not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared from the RAM 122, but the set value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the set value change state or the setting confirmation state, the player information and the effect information are not cleared from the RAM 122, while the set value information is already stored in the RAM 122. It is designed to overwrite (update memory) the existing setting value information.

That is, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, the information to be cleared from the RAM 122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, set value confirmation state, or set value change state. There is.

Then, in the 207SGS427, the effect control CPU 120 specifies which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value change end notification command, and the set value confirmation end notification command has been received, and the image display device 5 receives the reception. Start displaying the initial symbol according to the command. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-45, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a set value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a new set value. If it is not set, the display of the decorative symbol is started on the image display device 5 with a combination of "1", "2", and "3" from the left as the initial symbol. If the received command is a setting value change end notification command, that is, if there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 is displayed as an initial symbol from the left. The display of the decorative pattern is started with the combination of "4", "5", and "6".

In the feature unit 207SG in this embodiment, if there is a possibility that a new set value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 has "4" and "5" as initial symbols from the left. , And "6" are used to illustrate the form in which the display of the decorative pattern is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value advantageous to the player (for example, "6") is used. When set, the set value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, "1") is a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as the initial symbol at a higher rate than when it is set. It may be displayed. By doing so, it can be suggested that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set with a setting value that is advantageous for the player, and the gaming interest can be improved.

In the feature unit 207SG in this embodiment, if there is a possibility that a new set value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 has "4" and "5" as initial symbols from the left. , And "6" are used to illustrate the form in which the display of the decorative pattern is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value advantageous to the player (for example, "6") is used. The initial symbol displayed on the image display device 5 may be different depending on whether the set value is set or a set value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, "1") is set. Further, depending on whether a setting value advantageous to the player (for example, "6") is set or a setting value disadvantageous to the player (for example, "1") is set, the speakers 8L and 8R The volume of the output sound, the amount of light of the game effect lamp 9, and the like may be different.

Then, returning to FIG. 10-43, the effect control CPU 120 sets “4” to the look-ahead restriction counter in order to restrict the execution of the look-ahead advance notice effect in the first four fluctuations (207SGS428). After that, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (207SGS429). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (207SGS430) and executes the following processing.

First, the effect control CPU 120 executes a start notification process for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started (207SGS431). In the activation notification process, for example, it is determined whether or not the interruption is the first interruption from the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko game machine 1, specify which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value change end notification command, and the set value confirmation end notification command has been received, and then specify which of the above. The start notification process table corresponding to the received command is selected, and the start notification process timer corresponding to the received command is started. Then, after starting the start notification process timer, the start notification process is executed in the next and subsequent interrupts to start the pachinko game machine 1 based on the value of the start notification process timer and the start notification process table. All you have to do is execute the notification.

In the feature unit 207SG in this embodiment, the command received at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine 1 is one of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value change end notification command, and a set value confirmation end notification command. The mode of the activation notification of the pachinko game machine 1 is different depending on the presence.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-46, when the hot start notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is new. If the set value is not set, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R output the output sound A for 30 seconds. The light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same, but the light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and The output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

Further, when the cold start notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, when a new setting value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the data in the RAM 102 is cleared. The game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R output the output sound B for 30 seconds. The light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same, but the light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and The output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

That is, the specific control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L, 8R for 30 seconds. When the output sound A is executed and the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. Includes both performing the output of B.

Further, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started and the set value change end notification command or the set value change end notification command is received, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 40 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R emit light for 20 seconds. Output of the output sound C of the above, and display of a message image (for example, a message image indicating that the change of the set value is completed) for 40 seconds is executed on the image display device 5. Although the light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 are the same. The light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

In particular, when the setting value change end notification command is received when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the hot start notification command or the cold start notification command is received when the pachinko game machine 1 is started. However, since the message image is displayed on the image display device 5, it is easy to recognize that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

The feature unit 207SG of this embodiment illustrates a mode in which the activation notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated is executed by using the gaming effect lamps 9, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by providing the pachinko gaming machine 1 with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management computer such as a game hall management computer or a counter for each machine. A signal that can identify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated may be output from the external output terminal to the management device as an activation notification at the time of the activation.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, a device that executes start notification is partially common regardless of whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state. Although a certain form (in each case, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is hot. The device that executes the start notification differs depending on whether it is started in the start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the cold start, the image display device 5 When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the setting changed, a signal may be output from the external output terminal described above to the management device, etc.).

Further, the notification mode in each device that executes the activation notification may be different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state. Specifically, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, all the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 are made to emit light, while the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state. In this case, only a part of the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made to emit light.

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, since the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is in the open state, sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (to the pachinko gaming machine 1). If three or more speakers are provided, sound is output from only some of the speakers), and if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is closed. Since there are many cases, sound output from all the speakers 8L and 8R may be performed. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, the image display device 5 displays a message image indicating that the setting is being changed, such as "setting is being changed", while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started at the start, the image display device 5 may display a message image indicating that the RAM 102 or the RAM 122 has been cleared, such as "RAM has been cleared".

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a plurality of the above-mentioned external output terminals, the terminals for outputting signals to the management device may be different according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the period until the setting value change is completed (until the setting value change end notification command or the setting value specification command is received) as a notification during the setting value change. A signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the setting change over a period of time), and after the change of the set value is completed, a signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear as a RAM clear notification. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, it is only necessary to output a signal to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the error or the RAM clear as the RAM clear notification.

When the external output terminal is used in common for each notification, the timing of outputting the signal to the management device may be different according to each notification.

As described above, the activation notification process exemplifies a mode in which the activation notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 differs depending on the received command, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these pachinko gaming machines 1 are not limited thereto. The activation notification of is executed in the notification mode of 1 regardless of the received command. Further, the start notification of the pachinko game machine 1 exemplifies a mode in which it is executed regardless of which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value confirmation end notification command, and the set value change end notification command is received. , The present invention is not limited to this, and among these hot start notification command, cold start notification command, set value confirmation end notification command, and set value change end notification command, even if it is received, the pachinko game machine 1 A command that does not execute the start notification may be provided.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG in this embodiment, as an initialization effect in the present invention, a different mode of activation notification is executed according to a command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed. Although a mode in which different combinations of decorative symbols are displayed on the image display device 5 according to a command received when the is activated is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and is used as an initialization effect. The mode of activation notification and the combination of decorative symbols may be all different depending on the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or only a part thereof may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG in this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start or is started in a setting confirmation state, these start notifications are given. May not be executed.

Returning to FIG. 10-43, the effect control CPU 120 then executes the power failure detection process (207SGS432). In the power supply disconnection detection process, as shown in FIG. 10-51, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a power supply disconnection signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped to a predetermined value or less. Whether or not it is determined (207SGS441). If there is no power cutoff signal input (207SGS441; N), the process ends, and if there is a power cutoff signal input (207SGS441; Y), the set value information and player information stored in the RAM 122 are input. The backup data to be included is specified (207SGS442), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS443). Then, after creating check data to be used when recovering the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS444), the process shifts to a loop process in which no process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected.

Returning to FIG. 10-43, the effect control CPU 120 then analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: 207SGS433). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, which command (see FIG. 10-8) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control process process (207SGS434). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

Next, an effect random number update process (207SGS435) that updates the count value of the counter for generating an effect random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number, a player information input process (207SGS436) that accepts input of player information, and a game. The player information output process (207SGS437) that outputs the person information, the effect information aggregation process (207SGS438) that aggregates the effect information, and the error notification process (207SGS439) are executed. After that, it shifts to S52.

In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 uses a password (a password generated by an external server in which the player's game information is stored in advance) by operating the player's stick controller 31A or push button 31B. The player can access the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone and receive the generated password), and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. as the player information stored every time the variable display, the big hit game, and the super reach are executed.

In the player information output process, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by operating the player's stick controller 31A and push button 31B, and the two-dimensional code is generated. Is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, after the display of the two-dimensional code is completed, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. The player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 on a mobile terminal such as a smartphone, and transmits the player information aggregated in this game to an external server to play the pachinko game machine. The cumulative player information in 1 can be stored in the server.

In the effect information aggregation process, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of jackpots, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 as the effect information each time the variable display, the jackpot game, and the super reach are executed. To do.

In the error notification process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an error designation command has been received from the CPU 103. If an error designation command has been received, error notification is executed according to the received error designation command.

Next, the effect control process processing in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-52, in the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the lookahead restriction counter is “0” (207SGS451). When the value of the read-ahead restriction counter is "0" (207SGS451; Y), it is displayed in the first hold storage display area 207SG005D and the second hold storage display area 207SG005U after executing the read-ahead notice setting process (S161). The hold display update process (207SGS454) for updating the number of hold storage displays and the display mode of the hold memory display according to the number of hold storages stored in the start winning command buffer 207SG194A and the value of the hold display flag is executed. , Any of the processes S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) is executed according to the effect control process flag.

Further, when the value of the lookahead restriction counter is any one of "1" to "4" (207SGS451; N), it is further determined whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (207SGS452). ). When the value of the effect control process flag is any one of "0", "2" to "7" (207SGS452; N), the hold display update process (207SGS454) is executed and S170 is executed according to the effect control process flag. When any of the processes of ~ S177 (see FIG. 7) is executed and the value of the effect control process flag is “1” (207SGS452; Y), the value of the read-ahead restriction counter is decremented by -1 (207SGS453). The hold display update process (207SGS454) is executed, and any of the processes S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) is executed according to the effect control process flag. By executing the processes of 207SGS451 to 207SGS453 as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 immediately after the start-up, the execution of the look-ahead advance notice effect is restricted until the variable display is executed four times.

In the feature unit 207SG in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process and the effect control process process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the pachinko game machine 1 is variablely displayed four times. Although the embodiment of restricting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is illustrated throughout, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 performs the start winning prize determination process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (FIG. By not executing (see 5), the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect may be restricted over four variable displays.

As described above, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted over four variable displays based on the state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a state where the game can be played. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and based on the fact that the game has become possible, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game are set as settings related to the progress of the game. The amount of light of the effect lamp 9, the setting of the effect according to the RTC, and the like may be set as the factory default state.

Further, the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment illustrates a mode in which the hold display advance notice effect can be executed as the look-ahead advance notice effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead advance notice effect is not limited to this. For example, an effect of displaying a specific background image on the image display device 5, an effect of operating a specific movable body, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, an effect of emitting light from the game effect lamp 9 and the like may be executed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-17 to 10-20, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the display result determination table. Regardless of the above, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range of the jackpot determination values. Then, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6 (when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1), it corresponds to each set value from 1238. The range up to the value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value are set with the hit judgment value 1020 as the big hit reference value. Since it is set to be a continuous numerical range, when determining whether or not it is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is from 1020 to a non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value. Since it is sufficient to determine whether or not it is within the numerical range up to the maximum value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

In particular, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, since the numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to one place with 1020 as the reference value within the range of 0 to 65535, there are a plurality of numerical ranges of the advantageous state determination value. It is not necessary to execute the determination of whether or not the value of the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range of the jackpot determination value (whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state) multiple times as compared with the case where it is provided. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-17 to 10-20, in the display result determination table, the above-mentioned hit determination value is obtained regardless of whether the game state is a normal state, a time saving state, or a probability variation state. Since 1020 is set as the jackpot reference value and the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are set to be continuous numerical ranges, when determining whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled. Is whether the value of the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or the time saving state, and from 1020 to the non-common numerical range according to the probability variation state. Since it is sufficient to determine whether or not it is within the range up to the maximum value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the jackpot game state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-17 to 10-20, in the display result determination table, the numerical value of the small hit determination value is determined according to whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The number of judgment values included in the range is different (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the first special figure display result judgment table is 328, whereas the number of judgment values included in the second special figure display result is different. The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the judgment table is 655, which is about twice.) On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value itself uses 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value). It has been set. Therefore, when determining whether or not the small hit game state is controlled, the value of the random number MR1 is a numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure. Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not the number is within, the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state can be reduced.

As shown in FIGS. 10-17 to 10-20, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since it is set in a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) different from the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value when the set value is 6, whether or not it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. When determining whether or not the random value MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value, it is controlled to the small hit gaming state. When determining whether or not, it is sufficient to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special chart. Therefore, the CPU 103 It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state.

Further, the RAM 102 in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment can store the installation value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-41, the CPU 103 in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment is stored in the RAM 102 every time the variable display is started (every time the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined). Along with reading the set value, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value corresponding to the read set value are set (display result judgment table according to the set value is set), and the jackpot game state is set. It is determined whether or not to control. That is, the CPU 103 reads the set value from the RAM 102 each time the variable display is executed, and sets the display result determination table according to the read set value. Therefore, the improper set value is read and the improper variable display is performed. It is possible to prevent the display result from being determined.

In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, a set value is read from the RAM 102 each time the variable display is executed, and a display result determination table is set according to the read set value. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the CPU 103 may read a set value from the RAM 102 and set a display result determination table according to the read set value. .. When setting the display result determination table according to the set value read from the RAM 102 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in this way, the setting is made during the period until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected. All variable display results may be judged using the display result judgment table.

Further, the CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the RAM 102 each time the variable display is started (every time the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined), and reads the read set value and the previous variable display result. A setting value read from the RAM 102 (judgment used setting value) is compared for judgment, and if the setting value read from the RAM 102 this time does not match the judgment used setting value as the comparison result, an image is displayed. Since the error notification is executed by the image displayed on the display device 5 (see FIG. 10-50), it is possible to prevent an inappropriate variable display result from being determined by reading an inappropriate set value. it can. Further, it is possible not only to more accurately identify that an inappropriate set value is set in the RAM 102, but also to make the surroundings of the game machine recognize that the set value set in the RAM 102 is abnormal. Therefore, the clerk of the amusement park can quickly deal with the abnormal set value.

In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, a mode in which the set value stored in the RAM 102 and the determined used set value are compared each time the variable display is executed has been illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. However, the set value stored in the RAM 102 and the determined used set value may be executed based on the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times or the elapse of a predetermined time.

Further, the CPU 103 compares the set value read from the RAM 102 with the previously used set value, and if the set value read from the RAM 102 this time does not match the determined used set value as the comparison result, the effect is produced. An error designation command is transmitted to the control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 displays the notification image 207SG005M4 on the image display device 5 based on the reception of the error designation command from the CPU 103. It is possible to more reliably prevent the determination of an inappropriate variable display result from being performed by reading.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-40 to 10-42, the CPU 103 is variable by using a variable display result determination module common to both when the winning random number value determination is executed and when the special symbol normal processing is executed. Since the display result is determined, a part of the processing can be shared between when the random value determination at the time of winning is executed and when the special symbol normal processing is executed, and the processing load of the CPU 103 can be suppressed.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-17 to 10-20, if the fluctuation special figures are the same, a small hit is made regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although the numerical range of the determination value is the same, the CPU 103 sets the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value read from the RAM 102 when executing the variable display (to the set value read from the RAM 102). Since the display result determination table is set according to the above), the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state can be reduced. Further, as in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, the RAM 102 When setting the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value according to the set value read from, the process for setting the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value read from the RAM 102 is standardized. Therefore, the capacity of the processing program can also be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-17 to 10-20, when 1 (the set value having the lowest jackpot probability) is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set. Is not set, so if 1 is set as the set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1, it should be determined whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state by targeting only the common numerical range as the numerical range of the jackpot determination value. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the jackpot gaming state.

In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-17 to 10-20, a mode in which the jackpot reference value is set to the lowest value in the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot reference value may be set to the maximum value in the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. That is, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to be continuous from the maximum value of the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set to be continuous from the minimum value of the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-17 to 10-20, a mode in which the small hit reference value is set to the lowest value in the common numerical range of the small hit determination value is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit reference value may be set to the maximum value in the common numerical range of the small hit determination value.

In addition, the invention 207SG shown below is also included in this embodiment. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting value changing function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, since the setting state is notified only on the liquid crystal screen, it is not possible to preferably notify the setting state. There was a problem. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the gaming machine according to the means 1 of the invention 207SG that solves the problem.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIGS. 10-32). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
An information display unit (for example, a game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Part 207SG200)
When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-30, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are each ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the set value by the setting means is set. The state shifts to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process shown in FIG. 10-32).
When it is in the set state, the information display unit displays a display that can recognize the set state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-37 (A), the CPU 103 is executing the set value change process. If this is the case, all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are lit).
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is notified that the information display unit in which the variable display, which is an important display in the game machine, is executed is in the set state, which is preferable. Notification can be performed.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 2 of the invention 207SG,
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIGS. 10-32). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
An information display unit (for example, a game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Part 207SG200)
When the confirmation condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-30, when the clear switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the setting means is used. The state shifts to a confirmation state (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value confirmation process shown in FIG. 10-33) in which the set value can be confirmed.
When the confirmation state is reached, the information display unit displays a display recognizable as the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-37 (A), the CPU 103 is executing the set value confirmation process. If this is the case, all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are lit).
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is notified that the information display unit in which the variable display, which is an important display in the game machine, is executed is in a confirmation state, which is preferable. Notification can be performed.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 3 of the invention 207SG,
The display recognizable as the set state or the confirmed state is a display different from the display displayed on the information display unit during the game (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-37). In addition, the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derive and display the variable display result, and the display mode when the set value is changed or the set value is confirmed. Different part)
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to accurately recognize that it is in the set state or the confirmed state.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 4 of the invention 207SG,
In the set state or the confirmed state, the variable display unit displays a display that can recognize the set state or the confirmed state (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display). The part that lights all the segments that make up the device 207SG004B)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, suitable notification can be performed in the variable display unit.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 5 of the invention 207SG,
The variable display unit is composed of a plurality of small display units that can be lit independently (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of eight segments. Part),
As a display recognizable as the set state or the confirmation state, a display is performed in which all of the small display units are lit (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B). The part that lights all the constituent segments)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that the setting state or the confirmation state.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 6 of the invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that launches a game medium into a gaming area (for example, left gaming area 207SG002L and right gaming area 207SG002R) to play a game.
The information display unit includes a launch direction notification unit (for example, a right-handed lamp 207SG132) that notifies the launch direction of the game medium in the game area.
When the setting state or the confirmation state is in effect, the launch direction notification unit displays a display recognizable as the setting state or the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-37 (A)). The part that blinks the right-handed lamp 207SG132 in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, a suitable notification can be performed by the launch direction notification unit.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 7 of the invention 207SG,
It is provided with a hold storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 5) that can store information related to the variable display as hold information.
The information display unit includes a hold display unit (for example, a first hold display 207SG025A and a second hold display 207SG025B) capable of displaying a hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the hold storage means.
When the setting state or the confirmation state is reached, a display recognizable as the setting state or the confirmation state is performed on the hold display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-37 (A)). A part that blinks all the segments constituting the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B in the value change state or the set value confirmation state)
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, suitable notification can be performed in the hold display unit.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 8 of the invention 207SG,
In the advantageous state, a special variable device (special variable winning ball device 7) capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium can enter and a second state in which the game medium is less likely to enter than the first state is provided.
The information display unit includes a number notification unit (for example, a round display 207SG131) that notifies the number of times the special variable device is in the first state in the advantageous state.
When the setting state or the confirmation state is in effect, the number-of-times notification unit displays a display that can recognize the setting state or the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-37 (A)). Of the segments that make up the round display 207SG131 in the value change state or set value confirmation state, only one segment is lit)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, a suitable notification can be performed by the number-of-times notification unit.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 8 of the invention 207SG,
A game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing at least game information for the game control means to control the progress of the game, and
A detection means (for example, a clear switch) that can detect the state of the game machine when the power is turned on,
A state information storage means (for example, the area of the address F002 of the RAM 102) that can store the state information (for example, the RAM clear flag) that can specify the state of the gaming machine at the time of turning on the power detected by the detection means, and
With
The game control means
The first condition (for example, the state in which the clear switch is ON) including that the state of the game machine at the time of turning on the power detected by the detection means is a special state (for example, the state in which the clear switch is ON) is satisfied. At this time, the initialization process for initializing the game information storage means accompanied by erasing the game information (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear process shown in FIG. 10-31 (A)) is performed. Feasible and
A second condition (for example, the clear switch is ON and the lock switch is ON) including that the state of the game machine at the time of turning on the power detected by the detection means is a special state (for example, a state in which the clear switch is ON). When the 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON) are satisfied, the setting change process for changing the set value can be executed, and the initial stage to be executed when the first condition is satisfied. The initialization process common to the conversion process can be executed based on the state information stored in the state information storage means (for example, the part where the RAM clear process and the set value change process can be executed).
Regardless of whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, the state information is not erased (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (A), the RAM clear flag is cleared in the RAM clear process. Not part)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, the initialization process can be standardized when the first condition is satisfied and when the second condition is satisfied. It is possible to accurately execute the initialization process based on the state information while preventing the storage capacity of the processing program from increasing.

In addition, the invention 208SG shown below is also included in this embodiment. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting value changing function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-2010902 has a problem that it is not possible to preferably leave the occurrence of a predetermined error in the set state. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the gaming machine according to the means 1 of the invention 208SG that solves the problem.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIGS. 10-32). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
An information display unit (for example, a game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Part 207SG200)
When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-30, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are each ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the set value by the setting means is set. The state shifts to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process shown in FIG. 10-32).
When the specific condition is satisfied but a predetermined error occurs, a display capable of identifying that the predetermined error has occurred is performed in the variable display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-37 (B)). If an error occurs above the set value, all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are blinked).
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, a predetermined error occurs even if a specific condition is satisfied in a variable display area in which a variable display, which is an important display in the game machine, is executed. Since it is notified by the display that it has been done, it is possible to preferably notify that a predetermined error has occurred although the specific condition is satisfied.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 2 of the invention 208SG,
A game machine is described in which the predetermined error is at least an error related to a storage area in which the set value is stored (for example, an error equal to or greater than the set value). According to this feature, the set value is described. It is possible to preferably notify that an error regarding the storage area in which is stored occurs and that the set value needs to be reset.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 3 of the invention 208SG,
If a power failure occurs before the new set value changed in the setting state is confirmed, an error regarding the storage area in which the set value is stored has occurred at the time of recovery from the power failure. Even if there is no display that can identify the occurrence of an error in the variable display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-37 (B), even when recovering from a power failure during setting change, the first A part that blinks all the segments constituting the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is necessary to reset the set value because a power failure occurs before the set value is confirmed without setting a new error. It is possible to preferably notify that the error is.

In addition, the invention 209SG shown below is also included in this embodiment. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting value changing function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a pachinko gaming machine provided with information display means capable of displaying predetermined information regarding the game value to be given, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent No. 6209655. However, when the information display means described in Japanese Patent No. 6209655 is applied to the pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, the display unit and the information display means for confirming the set value are used. There is a problem that the cost of the gaming machine cannot be reduced if the above are provided individually. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the gaming machine according to the means 1 of the invention 209SG that solves the problem.
It is a gaming machine that can play games using a game medium and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIGS. 10-32). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
A game value giving means that gives a game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball wins a first starting prize opening, a second starting winning opening, a general winning opening 10, a large winning opening, etc. The part where the prize ball is paid out by doing),
A base having a plurality of display units (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A to the fourth display unit 207SG029D) and having predetermined information regarding the game value given by the game value imparting means (for example, the base shown in FIG. 10-27 (C)). An information display means (for example, display monitor 207SG029) capable of displaying a value) and
With
The information display means can display set value information capable of specifying a set value set by the setting means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-35, a pachinko game. When the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON and the clear switch is OFF when the machine 1 is started, the set value can be displayed in the set value confirmation state).
The number of the display units used differs depending on whether the predetermined information is displayed or the set value information is displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-35, the base value is different in the display monitor 207SG029. When displayed, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D are used, and when the set value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, the fourth display unit (Part where only 207SG029D is used)
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, the set value information is also displayed in the information display means capable of displaying the predetermined information regarding the game value. Therefore, the display means for displaying the set value information is provided. It is not necessary to provide them individually, and the cost of the game machine can be reduced.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 2 of the invention 209SG,
The information display means can display error information that can identify that an error has occurred in a storage area in which at least the set value is stored (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-36 (B)). When a setting value abnormality error occurs, "E." is displayed in the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D),
The number of the display units used is the same depending on whether the predetermined information is displayed or the error information is displayed (for example, FIGS. 10-35 (A) and 10-36 (B)). As shown in the above, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display are both used when the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 and when the occurrence of an abnormal error is displayed. A game machine characterized by (a part using part 207SG029D) is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to notify that an error has occurred in a storage area in which a set value is stored, and also to notify the set value information. Can be easily recognized as different error information.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 3 of the invention 209SG,
The display unit is composed of a plurality of small display units that can be independently lit (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D are each eight. Part composed of 10 segments),
Equipped with a detection means (for example, a clear switch) that can detect the state of the game machine when the power is turned on.
When the state of the game machine at the time of power-on detected by the detection means satisfies the initialization condition (for example, the clear switch is ON), the information display means constitutes each display unit. All the display units are turned on to be in a fully lit display state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-36 (A), the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit. The part where all the segments that make up the 207SG029D are turned on and off repeatedly (blinking))
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it can be confirmed whether or not all of the small display units are normal.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 4 of the invention 209SG,
Equipped with a detection means (for example, a clear switch) that can detect the state of the game machine when the power is turned on.
When the state of the game machine at the time of turning on the power detected by the detection means satisfies the predetermined condition, the information display means displays the set value information without being in the all-lit display state (for example,). As shown in FIG. 10-32, when the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation process, after the execution of the 207SGsa015 and the 207SGSa016, the 207SGSa28 to 207SGSa030 are executed and the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029).
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to quickly confirm the set value.

In addition, the embodiment of this embodiment also includes the invention 210SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine that executes a confirmation operation of a movable body based on an operation of changing a set value, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189349. However, in the pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189349, if the confirmation operation of the movable body is executed while the set value is changed, the operator may miss the confirmation operation. Therefore, it is conceivable to execute the confirmation operation again after the operation of changing the set value is completed. In this case, when the operation of changing the set value is completed during the first confirmation operation of the movable body, the change operation is completed. There is a problem that the confirmation operation of the new movable body is started from the timing of the movement, and the movable body may perform an unintended operation. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the gaming machine according to the means 1 of the invention 210SG that solves the problem.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322) provided so as to be movable, and
A control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process) and
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIGS. 10-32). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
When a specific condition is satisfied, the setting state shifts to a setting state in which the set value can be set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-30, a clear switch and a lock switch are used when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. When the 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are turned on, the CPU 103 executes the set value change process).
The control means
When the confirmation operation control (for example, the actual operation confirmation operation control) for causing the movable body to perform the confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally is shifted to the set state and the above. It can be executed when the setting state is completed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-49, from the timing when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change start notification command and the setting value confirmation start notification command. Operation confirmation The actual operation starts from the part where the first movable body initialization process including the operation control and the second movable body initialization process are executed in order, and the timing when the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command are received. The part where the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the confirmation operation control are executed in order),
If the setting state is terminated while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the setting state is entered, the confirmation operation control due to the termination of the setting state is not executed (for example). , As shown in FIG. 10-49 (C), during the second movable body initialization process being executed based on the effect control CPU 120 receiving the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, it is based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. 1 The part where the movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 2 of the invention 210SG,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322) provided so as to be movable, and
A control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process) and
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIGS. 10-32). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
When the confirmation condition is satisfied, the state shifts to a confirmation state in which the set value set by the setting means can be confirmed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-30, it is cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. The part where the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation process when the switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON),
The control means
Confirmation operation control (for example, first movable body initialization process and second movable body initialization process) for causing the movable body to perform a confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally. It can be executed when the confirmation state is entered and when the confirmation state is completed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-49, the effect control CPU 120 receives a setting value change start notification command and a setting value confirmation. From the timing when the start notification command is received, the part that executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the actual operation confirmation operation control in order, and the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation The part that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the actual operation confirmation operation control from the timing when the end notification command is received),
If the confirmation state is terminated while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the transition to the confirmation state is performed, the confirmation operation control due to the termination of the confirmation state is not executed (for example). , As shown in FIG. 10-49 (C), during the second movable body initialization process being executed based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, it is based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. 1 The part where the movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 3 of the invention 210SG,
The control means
When the movable body is not located at a predetermined origin position, the return operation control (for example, operation control at the time of non-detection) for causing the return operation for positioning the movable body at the origin position is performed by the confirmation operation. If it can be executed before the control is executed and the set state or the confirmation state ends during the return operation, the confirmation operation control is executed after the return operation ends (for example, the first movable). In the body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process, the part that executes the actual operation confirmation operation control after the non-detection self-motion control is completed)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 4 of the invention 210SG,
The control means
When the set state or the confirmation state is terminated while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation, the set state or the confirmation state is terminated when the operation status of the confirmation operation satisfies a predetermined condition. The confirmation operation control is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-49 (C), the first movable based on the reception of the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command by the effect control CPU 120. If the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received during the execution of the body initialization process, the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body is newly executed after the execution of the second movable body initialization process. (Part where the body initialization process is not executed) On the other hand, when the operation status of the confirmation operation does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the confirmation operation control by the setting state or the end of the confirmation state is executed (for example, FIG. 10-). As shown in 49 (B), the first movable body initialization process based on the reception of the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command by the effect control CPU 120 is completed, and the second movable body initialization is completed. If a setting value change notification command or a setting value confirmation notification command is received during the execution of the process, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are newly completed after the completion of the second movable body initialization process. The part that executes and in order)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state is completed, the confirmation operation can be executed again according to the operation status of the confirmation operation.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 5 of the invention 210SG,
With the plurality of said movable bodies,
The control means
The confirmation operation control can be sequentially executed for each of the movable bodies (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 sequentially executes the first face-to-face initialization process and the second movable body initialization process).
When the setting state or the confirmation state is completed when the confirmation operation is not completed for all of the movable bodies, and when the number of the movable bodies for which the confirmation operation is completed satisfies a predetermined condition, the setting state or the confirmation state is completed. The confirmation operation control due to the setting state or the end of the confirmation state is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-49 (C), the effect control CPU 120 performs the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command. If the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received during the execution of the first movable body initialization process based on the reception of, the first one is newly executed after the execution of the second movable body initialization process. (Part where the movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed) On the other hand, when the number of the movable bodies for which the confirmation operation is completed does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the set state or the confirmation state is completed. The confirmation operation control is executed for each of the movable bodies (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-49 (B), the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command. When the first movable body initialization process based on the above is completed and the set value change notification command or the set value confirmation notification command is received during the execution of the second movable body initialization process, the second movable body initialization process is performed. The part where the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are newly executed in order after the end of
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state is completed, the confirmation operation can be executed again according to the operation status of the confirmation operation.

Although the feature portion 207SG in this embodiment has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. Included in the invention.

For example, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the game information display unit 207SG200 is used as the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, and the like. Although the embodiment composed of the design display 207SG020, the general drawing hold display 207SG025C, the round display 207SG131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the probability variation lamp 207SG133, and the time saving lamp 207SG134 has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto. The game information display unit 207SG200 may include the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B even if they are not included.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, there are cases where the CPU 103 is executing the set value change process (set value change state) and the set value confirmation process is being executed (set value confirmation state). Although an embodiment in which the 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A and the 2nd special symbol display device 207SG004B are lit in the same manner is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process. The first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may be lit or blinked in different modes depending on the case where the set value confirmation process is being executed and the case where the set value confirmation process is being executed. By doing so, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be in either the set value change state or the set value confirmation state depending on the lighting mode or blinking mode of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. You can easily tell if there is one.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state, all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned on to turn on the first special symbol display device 207SG004A. 1 Display mode (lighting mode) of the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derive and display a variable display result. Although different forms have been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode (lighting) of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B in the set value changing state and the set value confirmation state. If the display mode is different from the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derives and displays the variable display result, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol It is not necessary to light some of the segments constituting the display device 207SG004B.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state, all segments and the round display 207SG131 constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are configured. An embodiment of lighting of one segment and blinking of all segments constituting the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold display 207SG025A, and the second hold display 207SG025B has been illustrated, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, one segment constituting the round display 207SG131 is lit, the right-handed lamp 207SG132 is blinking, and the first hold display 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B are configured. The blinking of all segments may not be executed or only a part of the blinking may be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which only one of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 is lit in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state is illustrated. Is not limited to this, and if it is not a combination corresponding to the jackpot type shown in FIG. 10-6, the number of lights of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 in the set value changed state and the set value confirmed state is a plurality. There may be.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the notification of the set value abnormality error is executed by using the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B has been exemplified. The present invention is not limited, and for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be individually provided with an LED for error notification, and the LED may be turned on or blinked to notify that a set value abnormality error has occurred.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a display monitor 207SG029 for displaying a base value is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game is not limited thereto. The machine 1 may not be provided with the display monitor 207SG029. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not provided with the display monitor 207SG029 in this way, it is sufficient to newly provide a display means for displaying the set value (or temporary set value) in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state. ..

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, when the change of the set value and the confirmation of the set value are completed during the execution of the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process, the first movable body A new first movable body initialization process or second movable body initialization process is performed depending on whether or not the initialization process is being executed, that is, whether or not the confirmation operation of the first movable body 207SG321 has already been completed. Although the embodiment for determining whether or not to execute is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute a new first movable body initialization process or second movable body initialization process is determined. It may be determined according to the operating distance of each movable body, the remaining period required for the confirmation operation of each movable body, and the like.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, An example of a mode in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a set value change state or a set value confirmation state by setting the round display 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, or the like in a mode different from that during the game has been illustrated. Is not limited to this, and is limited to the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, and the round display that constitute the game information display unit 207SG200. The device 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, and the like may be displayed (lit or blinking) during the game as long as it can notify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirmation state. ..

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, An example of a mode in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a set value change state or a set value confirmation state by using the round display 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, or the like in a mode different from that during the game has been illustrated. Is not limited to this, and the "mode different from that during the game" may include different blinking cycles, different brightness, different emission colors of each segment, and the like.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are performed from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command. As a process, a mode of executing the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 notifies the setting value change start. From the time when the command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received, the operation control at the time of non-detection of each movable body is executed, and from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command. , Actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body may be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, An embodiment has been exemplified in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a set value change state or a set value confirmation state by lighting or blinking the round display 207SG131 and the right-handed lamp 207SG132, but the present invention is limited thereto. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold indicator A description indicating that the 207SG025B, the round display 207SG131, and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 are turned on or blinking may be provided at a predetermined position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a position near the game information display unit 207SG200). By doing so, a clerk or the like of a game hall who is not familiar with the pachinko gaming machine 1 can use the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold. It is possible to prevent the lighting and blinking of the display 207SG025B, the round display 207SG131, and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 from being mistakenly recognized as a failure of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the game control main process of the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-30, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or the set value is being changed in 207SGSa021. Although the embodiment in which the RAM clear process (207SGSa009) is executed after clearing the flag is illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the present invention is not limited thereto, and the RAM clear process is not limited thereto. Is not when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or after clearing the setting value changing flag in 207SGSa021, but when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014). It may be executed in Y).

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-17 to 10-20, the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical value of the small hit determination value) regardless of the gaming state and the set value. The range) is provided in a different range that is not continuous with the numerical range of the jackpot determination value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and FIGS. 10-53 (A) and 10-53 (B) are modified examples. As shown in the above, the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be continuously provided regardless of the gaming state and the set value.

In addition, when the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) are continuously provided in this way, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is increased. By shifting the reference value of the small hit determination value accordingly, the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be changed while maintaining the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 10-53 (A), when the set value is 1, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is 1024 to 1237. Is set to 1238 to 1565 (1238 is a reference value for the small hit determination value) so that the common numerical range of the small hit determination value is continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. When the set value is 2, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1238 to 1253 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) of the big hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment value is set. The common numerical range is set to 1254 to 1581 (1254 is a reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. When the set value is 3, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1238 to 1272 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) of the big hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment value is set. The common numerical range is set to 1273 to 1600 (1273 is the reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. After that, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set in the same manner.

When the game state is the probabilistic state, as shown in FIG. 10-53 (B), when the set value is 1, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1020-1346, and the small hit judgment is made. The common numerical range of values is shifted by the amount that the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value increases from the normal state or the time saving state, and 1347 to 1674 (1347 is the small hit judgment value) so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. Set to (reference value). When the set value is 2, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1347 to 1383 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) of the big hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment value is set. The common numerical range is set to 1384 to 1711 (1384 is the reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. When the set value is 3, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1347 to 1429 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) of the big hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment value is set. The common numerical range is set to 1430 to 1757 (1430 is a reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. After that, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set in the same manner.

Further, as a form of setting the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) to be continuous in this way, as shown in FIG. 10-54, The numerical range of the small hit judgment value is set to the range of 65308 to 65535 (the range of the rear end of the numerical value that the hit judgment value can take), and the big hit judgment value is continuous with the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. A common numerical range (64990 to 65207) may be set. Further, in this case, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is set so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the minimum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is changed according to the set value. The jackpot probability may be different depending on the set value.

When setting the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value as shown in FIGS. 10-54, when determining the variable display result, the CPU 103 first determines the value of the random number value MR1. Is equal to or greater than the minimum value of the jackpot determination value (in the example shown in FIG. 10-54, 64990 for the set value 1, 64974 for the set value 2, and 64954 for the set value 3). When it is determined that the value of the numerical value MR1 is equal to or more than the minimum value of the jackpot judgment value, it is further variable by determining whether or not the random number value MR1 is 65208 or more, which is the reference value of the small hit determination value. It suffices to determine whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit. By determining the variable display in this way, the variable display result is determined without executing both the determination of whether or not the variable display result is a big hit and the determination of whether or not the variable display result is a small hit. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the determination of the variable display result of the CPU 103.

As described above, in FIGS. 10-53 and 10-54, the numerical range of the jackpot determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value (when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot determination value). Common numerical range of common numerical range and small hit judgment value, when 2 to 6 are set as set values for pachinko gaming machine 1, common numerical range of big hit judgment value, non-common numerical range and small hit judgment value The common numerical range) is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020, which is the reference value of the big hit judgment value, and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the big hit judgment regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is set to include the same number of judgment values in a continuous range from the numerical range of values. Therefore, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of 1020 and the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value, so that the large hit game state or the small hit game state It is possible to determine whether or not to control. Further, when it is determined that the control is performed in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the big hit game is determined by determining whether or not the random number value MR1 is equal to or greater than the minimum value in the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value. Since it is possible to determine whether to control the state or the small hit game state, the processing load for determining whether the CPU 103 controls the big hit game state and the determination whether to control the small hit game state. It is possible to reduce the processing load of performing the above.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-53, when the gaming state is controlled to the probabilistic state by the CPU 103, the jackpot determination value increases as a continuous numerical range from the jackpot reference value of 1020, and the increased jackpot determination value. Since the numerical range of the small hit determination value shifts according to the numerical range of, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control the large hit gaming state within the numerical range in which the number of the large hit determination values has increased, and the small hit gaming state. Since it is sufficient to determine whether or not to control, the processing load for determining whether or not to control the big hit game state by the CPU 103 and the processing load for determining whether or not to control the small hit game state are reduced. be able to.

Further, also in the modes shown in FIGS. 10-53 and 10-54, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set. Since the CPU 103 only needs to determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state only for the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values, the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls to the jackpot gaming state is reduced. can do.

In the modes shown in FIGS. 10-53 and 10-54, a mode in which the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set so as to be continuous with the maximum value of the numerical range of the large hit determination value is illustrated. The numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set so as to be continuous with the minimum value of the numerical range of the large hit determination value.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are continuously set is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in 10-55 and FIG. 10-56, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set to different numerical ranges.

When setting the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value to different numerical ranges in this way, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 and 10-56, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value ( The non-common numerical range (judgment included in the non-common numerical range) when the small hit judgment value common numerical range) is a numerical range different from the big hit judgment value common numerical range and the big hit judgment value setting value is 6. In a numerical range different from the numerical range with the largest number of values), a continuous numerical range from the reference value of the small hit judgment value (32767 to 33094 in FIG. 10-55, 32767 to 33421 in FIG. 10-56, in any case. The reference value of the small hit determination value may be set to 32767).

In the modes shown in FIGS. 10-55 and 10-56, the reference value of the small hit determination value is common according to the fluctuation special chart, but the determination value included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value. Although the forms in which the numbers are different are illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of judgment values included in the reference value of the small hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value regardless of the fluctuation special chart. May be the same as.

As described above, in the modes shown in FIGS. 10-55 and 10-56, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1020 to 1237 with 1020 as the reference value regardless of the set value. There is. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2 to 6, a numerical value different from the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value). In the range, the range corresponding to the set value with 60000 as the reference value (60,000 to 60016 for the set value 2, 60000 to 60035 for the set value 3 ... 60000 to 60109 for the set value 6) is a big hit. It is set as a non-common numerical range of judgment values. Therefore, in the development environment of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot probability can be changed only by changing the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value according to the change of the set value. Therefore, the development of the pachinko gaming machine related to the set value. The load can be reduced. Further, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the big hit game state and whether or not the small hit game state is controlled.

In particular, since the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value to the jackpot gaming state with the same value of 60000 as the reference value regardless of the set value, the CPU 103 can determine the jackpot. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the game state.

Further, in the modes shown in FIGS. 10-55 and 10-56, as in the above-mentioned feature unit 207SG, when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set. Is not set, the CPU 103 may determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state only for the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values. Therefore, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.

Further, in the modes shown in FIGS. 10-55 and 10-56, the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical range of the small hit determination value) is the common numerical range of the large hit determination value regardless of the set value. In a numerical range different from the non-common numerical range, 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) and is set to be a continuous numerical range (32767 to 33094). That is, since the numerical range of the small hit determination value includes the same number of set values regardless of the set value, the CPU 103 has the same value regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since it is possible to determine whether or not to control the small hit gaming state with 32767 as the small hit reference value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state of the CPU 103.

In the modes shown in FIGS. 10-55 and 10-56, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, while the pachinko game When 1 is set as the set value for the machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is not set, and when a value of 2 or more is set as the set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1, it corresponds to each set value. Although the embodiment in which the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot determination value is not set. A common numerical range may be set. Even when 1 is set as the set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this way, when setting a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, for example, the reference is the same as in FIGS. 10-55 and 10-56. The range from 1238, which is a value, to a value corresponding to each set value may be set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. Then, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the smallest, and the jackpot determination value increases as the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 increases. By expanding the non-common numerical range of, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state may be different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, in the modes shown in FIGS. 10-55 and 10-56, when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. On the other hand, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range of 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. That is, since the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set as a continuous numerical range based on the same value although the number of determination values included is different according to the variation special map, the fluctuation special map is the first in the CPU 103. Since it is possible to determine whether or not to control the small hit game state using 32767, which is the same value in the case of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure, as a reference value, it is possible to control the small hit game state by the CPU 103. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 10-55 and 10-56, the form in which the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set as the minimum value of the non-common numerical range is illustrated, but the present invention has been illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set as the maximum value of the non-common numerical range.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the CPU 103 can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value or is not common. Whether or not to control the big hit gaming state is determined based on whether or not the value is within the numerical range, and whether or not the value of the random number value MR1 is within the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. Although a mode for determining whether or not to control the small hit game state is illustrated based on the above, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 is in the big hit game state by a method other than that shown in the feature unit 207SG. It may be determined whether or not to control the game and whether or not to control the small hit game state. For example, a calculation may be performed on the value of the random number value MR1 and it may be determined whether or not to control the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the value of the calculation result. Further, a calculation is performed on the value of the random number value MR1, and a big hit game state or a small hit game is performed based on whether or not the value of the calculation result exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 65535 which is the maximum value of the hit determination value). It may be determined whether or not to control the state.

(Explanation of feature 10F)
Next, the feature portion 10F will be described. The feature unit 10F is characterized in that a game stop start process and a game stop end process are added in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process described above.

FIG. 11-1 is a flowchart showing a set value changing process in the feature unit 10F. In FIG. 11-1, the same processing as in FIG. 10-32 is designated by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted. In the set value change process, the CPU 103 first executes the game stop start process (10FS001). The details of the game stop start process will be described with reference to FIG. 11-3. After the game stop start process, all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are started to be lit (207SGSa051). After that, the same process as that shown in FIG. 10-32 is executed.

Further, the CPU 103 executes the game stop end process (10FS002) after executing the process of clearing the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066). The details of the game stop end process will be described with reference to FIG. 11-4. After the game stop end process, the display of the set value (or temporary set value) on the display monitor 207SG029 is ended (207SGSa067). After that, the same process as that shown in FIG. 10-32 is executed.

FIG. 11-2 is a flowchart showing a set value confirmation process in the feature unit 10F. In FIG. 11-2, the same processing as in FIG. 10-33 is designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first executes the game stop start process (10FS001). The details of the game stop start process will be described with reference to FIG. 11-3. This game stop start process is a process common to the game stop start process of FIG. 11-1. After the game stop start process, all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are started to be lit (207SGSa101). After that, a process similar to the process shown in FIGS. 10-33 is executed.

Further, the CPU 103 executes the game stop end process (10FS002) when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in the 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N). The details of the game stop end process will be described with reference to FIG. 11-4. This game stop end process is a process common to the game stop end process of FIG. 11-1. After the game stop end process, the display of the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 ends (207SGSa112). After that, a process similar to the process shown in FIGS. 10-33 is executed.

(About various timers)
Next, the game stop start process will be described. During the game, a plurality of timers clock the time and period related to the game. The CPU 103 stops the timing of these plurality of timers when the game is stopped. These plurality of timers will be described in order. The attacker opening time timer is a timer for measuring the opening time of the large winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 having the large winning opening. The CPU 103 uses an attacker opening time timer to measure the time from when the big winning door is opened to when it is closed. The inter-round interval period timer is a timer for timing the interval period between rounds during the jackpot game state. The CPU 103 measures the time from the end of one round to the start of the next round by the inter-round interval period timer.

The V-lid opening time timer is a predetermined switch (in a V-probability game machine that controls the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. It is a timer provided in front of the sensor for detecting the V probability change) for measuring the opening time of the V lid controlled by the open state and the closed state. In the V probability variation game machine, the V lid is opened in a predetermined round among the plurality of rounds. The area where the V lid is open is called the V winning area. The CPU 103 uses a V-lid opening time timer to measure the time from when the V-lid is opened to when it is closed. The V-passing waiting time timer is a timer for timing the V-winning time for determining that a game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is valid. The CPU 103 determines a game ball that has passed a predetermined switch with a delay even after the large winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed from the open state to the closed state. A game ball that has passed the switch) is also judged to be a V prize within the valid period. The CPU 103 measures the validity period of the V prize, which is effectively determined by the V passage waiting time timer.

The electric chew opening time timer is a timer that measures the opening time when the electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, which is a variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory), is controlled to the open state. .. The variable winning ball device 6B changes between a closed state and an open state, and the CPU 103 measures the time from the opening state to the closed state of the variable winning ball device 6B by the electric chew opening time timer. ..

The special figure fluctuation time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of the special symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the end of the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol fluctuation time timer. The normal figure fluctuation time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of a normal symbol. The CPU 103 uses a normal fluctuation time timer to measure the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the end of the variable display of the normal symbol.

The fanfare time timer is a timer that measures the period during which the fanfare effect is executed, which is a period for notifying that the jackpot is controlled at the start of the jackpot. The fanfare period is a period in which the fanfare effect as an effect operation for notifying the start of the jackpot game state is executed after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. The CPU 103 uses a fanfare time timer to measure the time from the start of the fanfare effect to the end of the fanfare effect.

The ending time timer is a timer that measures the period during which the ending effect, which is the period for notifying the end of the big hit at the end of the big hit, is executed. The ending period is a period during which the jackpot end process is executed, and is a period during which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the ending effect to the end of the ending effect by the ending time timer.

As other timers other than the above-mentioned timers, the CPU 103 includes a special figure fluctuation stop period timer, a normal figure fluctuation stop period timer, and the like. The special symbol fluctuation stop period timer is a timer that measures the time (for example, 0.5 seconds) from the derivation display of the variable display of the special symbol to the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the derivation display of the variable display of the special symbol to the start of the variable display of the next special symbol by the special symbol fluctuation stop period timer. The normal symbol fluctuation stop period timer is a timer that measures the time (for example, 0.4 seconds) from the derivation display of the variable display of the normal symbol to the start of the variable display of the next normal symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the derivation display of the variable display of the normal symbol to the start of the variable display of the next normal symbol by the timer for the normal symbol fluctuation stop period.

(Game stop start processing)
Next, the game stop start processing in the feature unit 10F will be described. FIG. 11-3 is a flowchart showing the game stop start processing in the feature unit 10F. First, the CPU 103 determines in the game stop start process whether or not the attacker release time timer is operating (10FS010). In 10FS010, if the attacker opening time timer is operating (10FS010; Y), the operating attacker opening time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the attacker open time timer is not running (10FS010; N), it is determined whether the inter-round interval period timer is running (10FS011). In 10FS011, if the inter-round interval period timer is operating (10FS011; Y), the operating inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not operating (10FS011; N), it is determined whether or not the V lid opening time timer is operating (10FS012). In 10FS012, if the V lid opening time timer is operating (10FS012; Y), the operating V lid opening time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the V-lid opening time timer is not operating (10FS012; N), it is determined whether or not the V-pass waiting time timer is operating (10FS013). In 10FS013, if the V-passing waiting time timer is operating (10FS013; Y), the operating V-passing waiting time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated.

If the V-passing waiting time timer is not operating (10FS013; N), it is determined whether or not the electric chew opening time timer is operating (10FS014). In 10FS014, if the electric chew open time timer is operating (10FS014; Y), the operating electric chew open time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the electric chew open time timer is not operating (10FS014; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS015). In 10FS015, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS015; Y), the operating special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated.

If the special figure fluctuation time timer is not operating (10FS015; N), it is determined whether or not the normal figure fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS016). In 10FS016, if the normal figure fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS016; Y), the operating normal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the normal figure fluctuation time timer is not operating (10FS016; N), it is determined whether or not the fanfare time timer is operating (10FS017). In 10FS017, if the fanfare time timer is operating (10FS017; Y), the operating fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated.

If the fanfare time timer is not running (10FS017; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is running (10FS018). In 10FS018, if the ending time timer is operating (10FS018; Y), the operating ending time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not operating (10FS018; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is operating as another timer (10FS019). In 10FS019, if the other timer is operating (10FS019; Y), the other timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the other timer is not running (10FS019; N), the other process (10FS021) is executed, and then the process ends.

Here, the other processing (10FS021) includes the following processing. For example, a process of disabling the firing of the ball striking handle 30, a process of disabling various sensors provided in the starting port, the general winning port 10, the out port, and the passing gate 41, a process of disabling the detection of various errors, It includes processing to invalidate the payout of prize balls. Due to the other processing (10FS021), various processings are invalidated and the game is not normally executed.

(Game stop end processing)
Next, the game stop end processing in the feature unit 10F will be described. FIG. 11-4 is a flowchart showing the game stop end process in the feature unit 10F. The CPU 103 first determines whether or not the attacker release time timer is stopped in the game stop end process (10FS030). In 10FS030, if the attacker opening time timer is stopped (10FS030; Y), the stopped attacker opening time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the attacker open time timer is not stopped (10FS030; N), it is determined whether or not the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031). In 10FS031, if the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031; Y), the stopped inter-round interval period timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not stopped (10FS031; N), it is determined whether or not the V lid opening time timer is stopped (10FS032). In 10FS032, if the V-lid opening time timer is stopped (10FS032; Y), the stopped V-lid opening time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the V-lid opening time timer is not stopped (10FS032; N), it is determined whether or not the V-pass waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033). In 10FS033, if the V-passing waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033; Y), the stopped V-passing waiting time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the V-passing waiting time timer is not stopped (10FS033; N), it is determined whether or not the electric chew opening time timer is stopped (10FS034). In 10FS034, if the electric chew open time timer is stopped (10FS034; Y), the operating electric chew open time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the electric chew open time timer is not stopped (10FS034; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS035). In 10FS035, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS035; Y), the stopped special figure fluctuation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated.

If the special figure fluctuation time timer is not stopped (10FS035; N), it is determined whether or not the normal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS036). In 10FS030, if the normal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS036; Y), the stopped normal figure fluctuation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the normal figure fluctuation time timer is not stopped (10FS036; N), it is determined whether or not the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037). In 10FS037, if the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037; Y), the stopped fanfare time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the fanfare time timer is not stopped (10FS037; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038). In 10FS038, if the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038; Y), the stopped ending time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not stopped (10FS038; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is stopped as another timer (10FS039). In 10FS039, if the other timer is stopped (10FS039; Y), the other stopped timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the other timer is not stopped (10FS039; N), the other process (10FS041) is executed, and then the process ends.

Here, the other processing (10FS041) includes the following processing. For example, a process for enabling the firing of the ball striking handle 30, a process for enabling various sensors provided in the starting port, the general winning port 10, the out port, and the passing gate 41, and a process for enabling the detection of various errors. It includes processing to enable the payout of prize balls. By the other processing (10FS041), various processings are enabled and the game is normally executed.

(About the effect of the feature part)
As shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4, the CPU 103 is the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Stops the timekeeping of, and restarts the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state is subtracted in the setting confirmation state, so that the game progresses. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled during the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state is changed. The timekeeping of the inter-round interval period timer period is restarted based on the end. By doing so, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game due to the subtraction of the interval period between rounds in the setting confirmation state. Can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V winning, and confirms the setting. Based on the end of the state, the timing of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged because the validity period of the V prize is subtracted in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the open state, and the valid period of the electric chew open time timer. Stops the timekeeping of, and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game progresses when the variable winning ball device 6B is in a state where the variable winning ball device 6B can enter in the setting confirmation state, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4, the CPU 103 clocks the valid period of the special figure variation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Is stopped, and the time counting of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the variable display of the special symbol being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4, the CPU 103 clocks the valid period of the normal figure variation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. Is stopped, and the timing of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal symbol is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the fanfare time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the fanfare effect is being executed. Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the timekeeping of the valid period of the fanfare time timer is restarted. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the fanfare effect in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. ..

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the ending effect is being executed. Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer is restarted. By doing so, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the ending effect in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. ..

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and before the next variable display is started. The time counting of the period of the variable stop period timer is stopped, and the time counting of the period of the special figure variable stop period timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

(About the modified example of the feature part)
Although the feature portion 10F has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included. A modified example of the feature portion 10F will be described below.

A game machine (so-called first-class game machine) that shifts to a jackpot game state based on the variable display result of a special symbol or a decorative symbol has been described, but a special variable winning ball device (so-called accessory) provided in the game area has been described. A game machine (so-called second type game machine) that shifts to a big hit game state based on a game ball winning (V prize) in the special winning opening (V winning opening), and first and second types It may be applied to a game machine (a type-two type mixer) in which the above is combined. When the start winning prize to the second starting winning opening is detected, the big hit judgment is executed, and when the judgment result is a big hit, the variable display of the second special figure is executed and the big hit display result is obtained. Game control similar to the jackpot based on the start winning to the first starting winning opening is executed, such as being controlled to the state. On the other hand, when the judgment result is not a big hit, the small hit judgment is executed, and when the judgment result is a small hit, the variation display of the second special figure is executed and the small hit display result is obtained. It is controlled to the state, and the special variable winning ball device for small hits is controlled to be open for a predetermined time. When the game ball is accepted by the special variable winning ball device for small hits in the small hit game state, and the game ball enters the special winning opening (V area) and is detected by a predetermined switch, the variable for big hits The second-class jackpot game control in which the winning ball device is opened for a predetermined number of rounds is executed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100.

In such a type 1 type 2 mixer, a small hit time timer may be provided to measure the effective period for determining that the game ball that has entered the special winning opening (V region) is effective. The CPU 103 also determines that the game ball that has passed the predetermined switch with a delay even after the special variable winning ball device is changed from the open state to the closed state by the small hit time timer is also determined to be a winning within the valid period. The CPU 103 measures the period during which the winning of the special winning opening is effectively determined by the small hit time timer. Then, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the small hit time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small hit game state, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state ends. , The timing of the valid period of the small hit time timer may be restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the control in the small hit game state is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

In the above-described embodiment, various controls have been executed for the setting confirmation state, but as shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4, even if the same control is executed even in the setting change state. Good. For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of various timers based on being controlled to the setting change state when it is in a state advantageous to the player, and various timers are based on the end of the setting change state. You may want to restart the timing of.

The timer control may be changed depending on whether the variable display of the special symbol results in a jackpot display result or an off display result. Specifically, when the variable display of the special symbol results in a big hit display result, the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped based on the control to the setting confirmation state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. If the time measurement of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted and the variable display of the special symbol results in an incorrect display result, the time measurement of the special figure fluctuation time timer may not be stopped even if it is controlled to the setting confirmation state. .. In this way, the timer is stopped in order to give a disadvantage to the player for the jackpot display result that is advantageous to the player, but the timer is not disadvantageous to the player for the off display result. It can be prevented from stopping. As a control method, it may be determined whether the current game state is a jackpot display result or a missed display result before the game stop start process accompanying the set value confirmation process is executed. Then, when the setting confirmation is executed during the execution of the variable display of the out-of-order display result, the symbol stop period is reached without stopping the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer during the execution of the out-of-order variable display. Occasionally, the special figure fluctuation stop period timer may be stopped.

The control of the timer may be changed depending on whether the set value is favorable to the player or unfavorable to the player. For example, when the setting value is favorable to the player, the various timers are stopped, but when the setting value is unfavorable to the player, the various timers are stopped. You may not stop.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Feature 10F)
As described above, the feature portion 10F includes the inventions shown below with respect to the feature portion 10F described above. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. It was. In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the set value, the process can be shifted to the next process only when all the main processes being executed are completed (for example, JP-A-2010-2010902). reference).

However, in the case of a game machine such as JP-A-2010-2010902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processing being executed is completed, and the setting confirmation work is appropriately executed. Couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the feature unit 10F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting changing operation. The part to be executed) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which setting value is set, and
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player.
A predetermined game executing means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, a round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state a plurality of times during the advantageous state.
It is provided with a variable winning time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an attacker opening time timer) for measuring a period for changing the variable winning device to the first state.
The variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 clocks the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Is stopped, and the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state is subtracted in the setting confirmation state, so that the game progresses. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above
A predetermined game timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an inter-round interval period timer) for timing a period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (for example, an inter-round interval period) is further provided.
The predetermined game timing means stops the time timing of the period based on the fact that the time timing is controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time counting of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Resume timing of the inter-round interval period timer based on what you did).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent a person from being disadvantaged.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which the game medium can enter, and
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls a special state (for example, a probabilistic state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is high based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area.
A specific timekeeping means (for example, a valid period for V prize) that measures a valid period (for example, a valid period for V prize) for determining that a game medium that has entered the specific area is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the valid period for V prize). For example, a CPU 103) that clocks with a V-passing waiting time timer is further provided.
The specific timekeeping means stops the time counting of the valid period based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the valid period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. Resuming the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V winning, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state. To restart the timing of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the valid period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above,
With the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variablely displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) based on the entry of the game medium into the predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41) and derives and displays the display result. ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, per normal drawing), the normal variable winning means (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter for a predetermined period is set. , Variable winning ball device 6B),
It is further provided with a normal variable winning time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an electric chew open time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means can enter.
The normal variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the normal variable winning means is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 determines the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. Stops the timekeeping and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normally variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above,
The identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variably displayed, and when a specific display result (for example, a big hit display result) is derived, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state).
It is further provided with a variable display time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by a special figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the identification information.
The variable display timing means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and confirms the setting. Resumes the timing of the validity period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on the end of the state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41), the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) and derives the display result,
It is further equipped with a normal variable display measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by a normal figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information.
The normal variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal identification information is executed, and is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. The timekeeping of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
A start notification effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with a start notification effect timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a fanfare time timer) for measuring the execution period of the start notification effect.
The start notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the start notification effect is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the start notification effect is being executed, and the period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the fanfare time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the fanfare effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timekeeping of the validity period of the fanfare time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the start notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(8) In any of the game machines (1) to (7) above,
An end notification effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes an end notification effect (for example, an ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with an end notification effect timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an ending time timer) for measuring the execution period of the end notification effect.
The end notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the end notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timing of the validity period of the ending time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the end notification effect in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(9) In any of the game machines (1) to (8) above,
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the variable display result becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit display result).
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state, and
It is further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter.
Based on the entry of the game medium into the special area, the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is controlled.
Further provided with a special timekeeping means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid.
The special timekeeping means stops the time counting of the valid period based on the control of the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the time counting of the valid period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example). , The CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the small hit time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small hit game state, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state ends. Resumes the timing of the validity period of the small hit time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the control in the special state is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Feature 11F)
The following invention may be included as the feature portion 11F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. It was. In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the set value, the process can be shifted to the next process only when all the main processes being executed are completed (for example, JP-A-2010-2010902). reference).

However, in the case of a game machine such as JP-A-2010-2010902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processing being executed is completed, and the setting confirmation work is appropriately executed. Couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the feature unit 11F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting changing operation. The part to be executed) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which setting value is set, and
With the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variablely displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) based on the entry of the game medium into the predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41) and derives and displays the display result. ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, per normal drawing), the normal variable winning means (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter for a predetermined period is set. , Variable winning ball device 6B),
It is provided with a normal variable winning time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an electric chew open time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means can enter.
The normal variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the normal variable winning means is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 determines the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. Stops the timekeeping and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normally variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player.
A predetermined game executing means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, a round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state a plurality of times during the advantageous state.
Further provided with a variable winning time timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an attacker open time timer) for measuring a period for changing the variable winning device to the first state.
The variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 clocks the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Is stopped, and the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state is subtracted in the setting confirmation state, so that the game progresses. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(3) In the game machine of (2) above
A predetermined game timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an inter-round interval period timer) for timing a period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (for example, an inter-round interval period) is further provided.
The predetermined game timing means stops the time timing of the period based on the fact that the time timing is controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time counting of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Resume timing of the inter-round interval period timer based on what you did).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent a person from being disadvantaged.

(4) In the game machine of (2) or (3) above
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which the game medium can enter, and
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls a special state (for example, a probabilistic state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is high based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area.
A specific timekeeping means (for example, a valid period for V prize) that measures a valid period (for example, a valid period for V prize) for determining that a game medium that has entered the specific area is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the valid period for V prize). For example, a CPU 103) that clocks with a V-passing waiting time timer is further provided.
The specific timekeeping means stops the time counting of the valid period based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the valid period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. Resuming the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V winning, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state. To restart the timing of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the valid period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above,
The identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variably displayed, and when a specific display result (for example, a big hit display result) is derived, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state).
It is further provided with a variable display time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by a special figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the identification information.
The variable display timing means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and confirms the setting. Resumes the timing of the validity period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on the end of the state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41), the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) and derives the display result,
It is further equipped with a normal variable display measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by a normal figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information.
The normal variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal identification information is executed, and is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. The timekeeping of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
A start notification effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with a start notification effect timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a fanfare time timer) for measuring the execution period of the start notification effect.
The start notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the start notification effect is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the start notification effect is being executed, and the period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the fanfare time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the fanfare effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timekeeping of the validity period of the fanfare time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged because the start notification effect is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

(8) In any of the game machines (1) to (7) above,
An end notification effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes an end notification effect (for example, an ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with an end notification effect timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an ending time timer) for measuring the execution period of the end notification effect.
The end notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the end notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timing of the validity period of the ending time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the end notification effect in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(9) In any of the game machines (1) to (8) above,
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the variable display result becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit display result).
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state, and
It is further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter.
Based on the entry of the game medium into the special area, the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is controlled.
Further provided with a special timekeeping means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid.
The special timekeeping means stops the time counting of the valid period based on the control of the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the time counting of the valid period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example). , The CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the small hit time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small hit game state, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state ends. Resumes the timing of the validity period of the small hit time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the control in the special state is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Feature 12F)
The following inventions may be included as the feature portion 12F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. It was. In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the set value, the process can be shifted to the next process only when all the main processes being executed are completed (for example, JP-A-2010-2010902). reference).

However, in the case of a game machine such as JP-A-2010-2010902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processing being executed is completed, and the setting confirmation work is appropriately executed. Couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the feature unit 12F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is variably displayed and the specific display is derived as a result. hand,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting changing operation. The part to be executed) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which setting value is set, and
It is provided with a variable display time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a special figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of variable display of identification information (for example, a special symbol).
The variable display timing means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and confirms the setting. Resumes the timing of the validity period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on the end of the state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player.
A predetermined game executing means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, a round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state a plurality of times during the advantageous state.
Further provided with a variable winning time timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an attacker open time timer) for measuring a period for changing the variable winning device to the first state.
The variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 clocks the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Is stopped, and the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state is subtracted in the setting confirmation state, so that the game progresses. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
It is further provided with a stop timing means (for example, CPU 103 that measures with a special figure fluctuation stop period timer) for measuring the period from the stop of the variable display of the identification information to the start of the next variable display.
The stop timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state from the time when the variable display of the identification information is stopped until the next variable display is started, and the setting confirmation state is changed. The timing of the period is restarted based on the end (for example, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state from the time when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started. Figure Stops the timing of the fluctuation stop period timer, and restarts the timing of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the period in which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the setting confirmation state is subtracted to proceed with the game. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the loss.

(4) In the game machine of (2) above
A predetermined game timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an inter-round interval period timer) for timing a period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (for example, an inter-round interval period) is further provided.
The predetermined game timing means stops the time timing of the period based on the fact that the time timing is controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time counting of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Resume timing of the inter-round interval period timer based on what you did).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent a person from being disadvantaged.

(5) In any of the game machines (2) to (4) above,
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which the game medium can enter, and
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls a special state (for example, a probabilistic state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is high based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area.
A specific timekeeping means (for example, a valid period for V prize) that measures a valid period (for example, a valid period for V prize) for determining that a game medium that has entered the specific area is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the valid period for V prize). For example, a CPU 103) that clocks with a V-passing waiting time timer is further provided.
The specific timekeeping means stops the time counting of the valid period based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the valid period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. Resuming the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V winning, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state. To restart the timing of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the valid period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
With the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variablely displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) based on the entry of the game medium into the predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41) and derives and displays the display result. ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, per normal drawing), the normal variable winning means (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter for a predetermined period is set. , Variable winning ball device 6B),
It is further provided with a normal variable winning time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an electric chew open time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means can enter.
The normal variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the normal variable winning means is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 determines the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. Stops the timekeeping and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normally variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41), the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) and derives the display result,
It is further equipped with a normal variable display measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by a normal figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information.
The normal variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal identification information is executed, and is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. The timekeeping of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(8) In any of the game machines (1) to (7) above,
A start notification effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with a start notification effect timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a fanfare time timer) for measuring the execution period of the start notification effect.
The start notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the start notification effect is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the start notification effect is being executed, and the period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the fanfare time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the fanfare effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timekeeping of the validity period of the fanfare time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the start notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(9) In any of the game machines (1) to (8) above,
An end notification effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes an end notification effect (for example, an ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with an end notification effect timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an ending time timer) for measuring the execution period of the end notification effect.
The end notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the end notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timing of the validity period of the ending time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the end notification effect in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(10) In any of the game machines (1) to (9) above,
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the variable display result becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit display result).
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state, and
It is further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter.
Based on the entry of the game medium into the special area, the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is controlled.
Further provided with a special timekeeping means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid.
The special timekeeping means stops the time counting of the valid period based on the control of the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the time counting of the valid period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example). , The CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the small hit time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small hit game state, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state ends. Resumes the timing of the validity period of the small hit time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the control in the special state is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Feature 13F)
The following invention may be included as the feature portion 13F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. It was. In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the set value, the process can be shifted to the next process only when all the main processes being executed are completed (for example, JP-A-2010-2010902). reference).

However, in the case of a game machine such as JP-A-2010-2010902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processing being executed is completed, and the setting confirmation work is appropriately executed. Couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the feature unit 13F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is variably displayed and the specific display result is derived. ,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting changing operation. The part to be executed) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which setting value is set, and
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41), the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) and derives the display result,
It is equipped with a normal variable display measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 that measures with a normal figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information.
The normal variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal identification information is executed, and is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. The timekeeping of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player.
A predetermined game executing means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, a round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state a plurality of times during the advantageous state.
Further provided with a variable winning time timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an attacker open time timer) for measuring a period for changing the variable winning device to the first state.
The variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 clocks the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Is stopped, and the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state is subtracted in the setting confirmation state, so that the game progresses. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
It is further provided with a stop timing means (for example, CPU 103 that measures with a special figure fluctuation stop period timer) for measuring the period from the stop of the variable display of the identification information to the start of the next variable display.
The stop timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state from the time when the variable display of the identification information is stopped until the next variable display is started, and the setting confirmation state is changed. The timing of the period is restarted based on the end (for example, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state from the time when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started. Figure Stops the timing of the fluctuation stop period timer, and restarts the timing of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the period in which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the setting confirmation state is subtracted to proceed with the game. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the loss.

(4) In the game machine of (2) above
A predetermined game timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an inter-round interval period timer) for timing a period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (for example, an inter-round interval period) is further provided.
The predetermined game timing means stops the time timing of the period based on the fact that the time timing is controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time counting of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Resume timing of the inter-round interval period timer based on what you did).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent a person from being disadvantaged.

(5) In any of the game machines (2) to (4) above,
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which the game medium can enter, and
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls a special state (for example, a probabilistic state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is high based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area.
A specific timekeeping means (for example, a valid period for V prize) that measures a valid period (for example, a valid period for V prize) for determining that a game medium that has entered the specific area is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the valid period for V prize). For example, a CPU 103) that clocks with a V-passing waiting time timer is further provided.
The specific timekeeping means stops the time counting of the valid period based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the valid period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. Resuming the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V winning, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state. To restart the timing of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the valid period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
With the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variablely displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) based on the entry of the game medium into the predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41) and derives and displays the display result. ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, per normal drawing), the normal variable winning means (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter for a predetermined period is set. , Variable winning ball device 6B),
It is further provided with a normal variable winning time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an electric chew open time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means can enter.
The normal variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the normal variable winning means is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 determines the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. Stops the timekeeping and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normally variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
The identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variably displayed, and when a specific display result (for example, a big hit display result) is derived, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state).
It is further provided with a variable display time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by a special figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the identification information.
The variable display timing means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and confirms the setting. Resumes the timing of the validity period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on the end of the state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(8) In any of the game machines (1) to (7) above,
A start notification effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with a start notification effect timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a fanfare time timer) for measuring the execution period of the start notification effect.
The start notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the start notification effect is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the start notification effect is being executed, and the period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the fanfare time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the fanfare effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timekeeping of the validity period of the fanfare time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged because the start notification effect is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

(9) In any of the game machines (1) to (8) above,
An end notification effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes an end notification effect (for example, an ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with an end notification effect timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an ending time timer) for measuring the execution period of the end notification effect.
The end notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the end notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timing of the validity period of the ending time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the end notification effect in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(10) In any of the game machines (1) to (9) above,
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the variable display result becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit display result).
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state, and
It is further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter.
Based on the entry of the game medium into the special area, the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is controlled.
Further provided with a special timekeeping means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid.
The special timekeeping means stops the time counting of the valid period based on the control of the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the time counting of the valid period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example). , The CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the small hit time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small hit game state, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state ends. Resumes the timing of the validity period of the small hit time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the control in the special state is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(Explanation of feature 40F)
Next, the feature unit 40F will be described. The feature unit 40F has a feature regarding the processing of the effect control command in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Noise due to static electricity or the like may occur during the setting change state or setting confirmation state. In such a case, the effect control command may be unintentionally transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The processing when such an irregular command is received will be described below.
FIG. 12-1 is a diagram illustrating an effect control command in the feature unit 40F in this embodiment. In FIG. 12-1, some effect control commands are added to the list of effect control commands shown in FIG. 10-8 (A) described above. The commands added are command F1XXH and command F2XXXH. These commands are effect control commands that indicate the contents of the winning determination results such as the jackpot type determination and the variation pattern type determination at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. Of these, the command F1XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not a jackpot will be achieved and a determination result of the type of jackpot among the winning determination results. Further, the command F2XXH is a variation type command indicating a determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) in which the value of the random number for determination of the variation pattern type falls within the range of the determination value among the determination results at the time of winning.

Various effect control commands shown in FIG. 12-1 are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 at predetermined timings by the CPU 103. Upon receiving various effect control commands, the effect control CPU 120 executes various processes. A part of the various processes executed by the effect control CPU 120 based on the effect control command will be described.

(About processing based on the fluctuation pattern specification command)
The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command to display the variation of the displayed decorative pattern. Further, the image display device 5 may be provided with a constantly small symbol in a reduced form of the decorative symbol in response to the variable display of the special symbol. In such a case, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command to constantly display the variation of the small symbol to be displayed.

(About processing based on the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command)
As the symbol for variable display, a decorative symbol, a special symbol, and a fourth symbol may be provided as a fourth symbol following the normal symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that the special symbol (first and second special symbols) is fluctuating, and is fluctuated by a constant operation in a manner that is always visible in a display device such as an image display device 5. Is displayed. By displaying the fourth symbol in a variable manner, the effect content including the variable display of the decorative symbol disappears from the screen for a moment, or the movable body displays all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. Even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as when a shielding effect is performed, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display is currently in a variable display state. The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the first variation start command to display the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Further, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second variation start command to display the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol.

(About processing based on the designated command while the big winning opening is open)
During the jackpot game, a round game that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 into an open state (first state) that is advantageous to the player is executed, for example, 15 times. During the round game, the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the closed state (second state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to win the big winning opening. The effect control CPU 120 controls the special variable winning ball device 7 to the open state based on the reception of the designated command during the opening of the large winning opening. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the number of rounds in the big hit game state by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving the command designated during the opening of the big winning opening.

(About processing based on the 1st start opening prize designation command and the 2nd start opening prize designation command)
The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the first start port winning designation command, so that the first hold information stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122 is stored. Display the hold display corresponding to. Further, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122 by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second start opening winning designation command. Display the hold display corresponding to the hold information.

(About processing based on the symbol specification command and variation type specification command)
The effect control CPU 120 performs a winning flash effect and a winning hold change effect based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type designation command. The flash effect at the time of winning is an effect of emitting a lamp provided around the first starting port when a starting winning is generated. The effect control CPU 120 draws a lottery for a flash effect at the time of winning based on the jackpot expectation degree based on the hold information by the symbol designation command or the variation type designation command. Then, when the lottery is won, the lamps emit light in different modes depending on the degree of expectation. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 emits red light when the jackpot expectation is high, and white light when the big hit expectation is not so high. Is controlled so that the lamp does not emit light. Further, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a sound according to the degree of expectation together with the flash effect at the time of winning. It should be noted that control may be made so that sound is not output only by light emission.

The hold change effect at the time of winning is an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display displayed when the start winning is generated to a mode different from the usual one. The effect control CPU 120 draws a lottery for the hold change effect at the time of winning based on the jackpot expectation degree based on the hold information by the symbol designation command or the variation type designation command. Then, when the lottery is won, the hold display at the time of winning is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode. Specifically, the hold display is displayed in red, green, and blue in order from the one with the highest expectation of big hit, and the hold display is displayed in white in the normal mode in the case of losing the lottery or the deviation fluctuation without reach. .. Further, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a sound according to the degree of expectation together with the hold change effect at the time of winning. In addition, you may control so that the sound is not output only by the hold change.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a winning flash effect by controlling the lamp to emit light based on the reception of the symbol designation command or the variation type designation command. Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes the image display device 5 based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type designation command to execute the pending change effect at the time of winning. It should be noted that only one of the flash effect at the time of winning and the pending change effect at the time of winning may be executed. Further, at the time of winning a prize, an effect indicating the degree of expectation may be executed only by the output of the sound.

Next, the effect control main process executed in the feature unit 40F will be described. FIG. 12-2 is a flowchart showing the effect control main process in the feature unit 40F. In FIG. 12-2, the same processing as in FIG. 10-43 is designated by the same reference numerals and a part of description thereof will be omitted. In FIG. 12-2, the processes related to 207SGS413 to 207SGS415 and 207SGS417 to 207SGS424 in FIGS. 10-43 are deleted, and the sub-side game stop process is added after 207SGS412.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411). When the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is started in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the set value is changed. The set value-related notification process for executing the notification that the operation is in progress (notification during setting value change) and the notification that the setting value is being confirmed (notification during setting value confirmation) is executed (207SGS412). In the set value-related notification process, a notification image indicating that the setting variable value is being changed and a notification image indicating that the setting value is being confirmed are displayed.

After executing the set value-related notification process in the 207SGS412, the sub-side game stop process is executed (40FS001). In the sub-side game stop process, when the effect control command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 stops the game. The process is executed. Details of the sub-side game stop processing will be described with reference to FIG. 12-3.

After the sub-side game stop process is executed in 40FS001, it is determined whether or not the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416). When the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is not received (207SGS416; N) Proceed to 207SGS412 and when the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation end notification command are received (207SGS416; Y). Proceed to 207SGS427.

FIG. 12-3 is a flowchart showing a sub-side game stop process in the feature unit 40F executed in 40FS001. The effect control CPU 120 stores the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. Then, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the command stored in the effect control command reception buffer.

In the sub-side game stop process, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the first variation start command has been received (40FS010). If it is determined that the first fluctuation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS011. When it is determined that the first fluctuation start command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 displays the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the first variation start command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent the control to be performed. After that, the process ends.

In 40FS011, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the second variation start command has been received. If it is determined that the second fluctuation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS012. When it is determined that the second fluctuation start command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 displays the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the second variation start command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. It is possible not to execute the control to be performed. After that, the process ends.

In the 40FS012, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command has been received. If it is determined that the variation pattern specification command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS013. If it is determined that the variation pattern specification command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 controls to display the variation of the decorative symbol or constantly display the variation of the small symbol by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the variation pattern designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Can be prevented from executing. After that, the process ends.

In 40FS013, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the designated command during the opening of the large winning opening is received. If it is determined that the designated command is not received while the large winning opening is open, the process proceeds to 40FS014. When it is determined that the designated command is received while the large winning opening is open, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the number of rounds in the jackpot game state by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the command for opening the big winning opening while the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed. You can prevent it from running. After that, the process ends.

In 40FS014, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the first start winning opening designation command has been received. If it is determined that the first start winning opening designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS015. When it is determined that the first start winning opening designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 does not display the hold display of the first hold information by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the first start winning opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. can do. After that, the process ends.

In 40FS015, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the second start winning opening designation command has been received. If it is determined that the second start winning opening designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS016. When it is determined that the second start winning opening designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 does not display the hold display of the second hold information by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the second start winning opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. can do. After that, the process ends.

In 40FS016, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the symbol designation command has been received. If it is determined that the symbol designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS016. When it is determined that the symbol designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can prevent the flash effect at the time of winning by controlling the lamp to emit light by discarding the symbol designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can prevent the winning hold change effect by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the symbol designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. .. After that, the process ends.

In 40FS017, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the variation type designation command has been received. If it is determined that the variation type specification command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS018. When it is determined that the variation type designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can prevent the flash effect at the time of winning by controlling the lamp to emit light by discarding the variation type designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Further, the effect control CPU 120 may not execute the winning hold change effect by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the variation type designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. it can. After that, the process ends.

In 40FS018, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the test command has been received. Here, the test command is a command directly transmitted to the effect control board 12 from a device that sends a command for confirming the state of the screen or the state of the accessory provided in the game machine at the time of shipment from the factory. .. When transmitting a test command, various test commands are transmitted with a transmission device dedicated to transmitting the test command connected to the effect control board 12.

If it is determined in 40FS018 that the test command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS019. When it is determined that the test command has been received, the control according to the test command is executed even in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state (40FS020). For example, the effect control CPU 120 is determined by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving a test command for checking the liquid crystal of the image display device 5 during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Display the check screen. In this way, the process based on the reception of the test command is executed even in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. After that, the process ends.

In 40FS019, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the effect control command reception buffer, and determines whether or not a command other than the setting change end notification command or the setting confirmation end notification command has been received (40FS019). These commands are, for example, the commands shown in FIG. 12-1. If it is determined that these commands have not been received, the process ends. When it is determined that these commands have been received, the received commands are discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from executing the effect by discarding these commands during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. After that, the process ends.

(About the effect of the feature part)
As shown in FIG. 12-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern specification command even if it receives the variation pattern specification command when it is controlled to the setting change state. Do not perform receive-based control. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern specification command even if it receives the variation pattern specification command while being controlled in the setting confirmation state. Do not perform receive-based control. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, even if the effect control CPU 120 receives the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command while being controlled to the setting change state, the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command are received. Since the fluctuation start command is discarded, the control based on the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, even if the effect control CPU 120 receives the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command while being controlled in the setting confirmation state, the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command are received. Since the fluctuation start command is discarded, the control based on the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, when the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting change state, even if it receives the special winning opening opening designation command, it discards the large winning opening opening designated command. The control based on the reception of the specified command while the grand prize opening is open is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, when the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting confirmation state, even if it receives the special winning opening opening designation command, it discards the large winning opening opening designated command. The control based on the reception of the specified command while the grand prize opening is open is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, even if the effect control CPU 120 receives the first start winning opening designation command and the second starting winning opening designation command while being controlled to the setting change state, the first start winning entry is won. Since the mouth designation command and the second start winning opening designation command are discarded, the control based on the reception of the first start winning opening designation command and the second start winning opening designation command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, even if the effect control CPU 120 receives the first start winning opening designation command and the second starting winning opening designation command while being controlled in the setting confirmation state, the first start winning entry is won. Since the mouth designation command and the second start winning opening designation command are discarded, the control based on the reception of the first start winning opening designation command and the second start winning opening designation command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the symbol designation command and the variation type command when the setting is changed, and is based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type command. Do not perform control. In this way, even if an irregular command is received while the setting is being changed, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as a winning lamp or an image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the symbol designation command and the variation type command when controlled in the setting confirmation state, and is based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type command. Do not perform control. By doing so, even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the winning lamp and the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the command from the CPU 103, but then discards the received command such as 40FS021. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In addition, since the received command is discarded and no information remains, even if the setting change state or the setting confirmation state ends, no erroneous command remains and no malfunction is executed.

As shown in Fig. 12-2, based on the reception of the setting value change start notification command, the setting to display the image notifying that the setting is in the setting change state is set, and the setting value confirmation start notification command is received. Based on, set to display an image notifying that the setting is in the confirmation state. In this way, it can be shown that the control is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and even if an irregular command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the image display device 5 or the like It is possible to prevent the predetermined production means of the above from malfunctioning.

As shown in 40FS020 of FIG. 12-3, the control according to the test command is executed even when the setting is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In this way, it is possible to execute the operation of a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 based on the test command even when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed.

(About the modified example of the feature part)
Although the feature portion 40F has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included. A modified example of the feature portion 40F will be described below.

In the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the effect control command reception buffer for each command to be transmitted while being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. However, instead of analyzing the commands in order and discarding them one by one, all the commands stored in the effect control command receiving buffer may be discarded when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, the CPU 103 may transmit an initialization command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 based on the end of the setting change state. Then, based on the reception of the initialization command, all the commands stored in the effect control command reception buffer may be discarded. Further, even in the setting confirmation state, all the commands stored in the effect control command reception buffer may be discarded based on the reception of the predetermined command.

In the above-described embodiment, when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, even if an effect control command other than the command related to the setting change or setting confirmation is received, the process based on the effect control command is not executed. explained. However, the process based on the reception of the effect control command while being controlled in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be executed internally. Even in such a case, the control executed while being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state has a higher priority than the control based on receiving other effect control commands. On the screen of the image display device 5, an image in a setting change state or a setting confirmation state is displayed in appearance. Regarding the sound, the channels other than the channel that outputs the notification sound in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be muted during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

In the above-described embodiment, the process of analyzing the command received while being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is executed. However, when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed, even if a command is received, it may not be analyzed.

In the above-described embodiment, the image display device 5 and the lamp at the time of winning have been described as a predetermined effect means operated by the effect control CPU 120 when the effect control command is received. However, the predetermined effect means may be any as long as the effect control means 120 is executed based on the reception of the command. For example, an operating means operated by the player or a movable member provided in the game machine may be used as a predetermined effect means. In such a case, when the operating means vibrates or the movable member operates due to the reception of a predetermined command, the command for executing these operations is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Even if it is done, the control to discard the command may be executed.

In the above-described embodiment, a command other than a command for terminating the setting change state or the setting confirmation state such as the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. It may be controlled not to.

In the above-described embodiment, the lamp provided in the game machine may be made to emit light or sound may be output from the speaker together with the control for operating the image display device 5. In such a case, the command may be discarded when a command related to the lamp or the speaker is received so that these effect means do not operate during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the advance notice effect based on the reception of the symbol designation command or the variation type command is executed has been described. However, the advance notice effect to be executed may be executed by receiving one of the commands, and when a command related to the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted due to the occurrence of a start winning prize, the command related to the fluctuation pattern is transmitted. The advance notice effect may be executed based on the above. In such a case, even if a command related to the fluctuation pattern is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the command may be discarded.

In the above-described embodiment, the lottery for the advance notice to be executed may be executed based on the reception of the symbol designation command or the variation type command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Then, various notices may not be executed by determining that the notice cannot be executed at the timing of actually determining whether or not the notice can be executed. In addition, when executing the look-ahead notice effect in the continuous fluctuation display other than the time of winning, the lottery of the notice is executed based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the fluctuation type command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. However, if the setting change state or the setting confirmation state ends at the timing when the notice is actually started, the notice based on the received command may be executed.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the command received in the processing of 40FS021 in 40FS001 is discarded has been described. However, the timing of discarding the received command may be the timing after it is determined that the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command has been received (207SGS416; Y). In this way, when a plurality of irregular commands are received, the commands can be discarded at once.

In the above-described embodiment, when an irregular command is received once during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, it is possible to restrict the reception of another irregular command thereafter. Good.

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
Each configuration relating to the feature portion may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to the other feature portion. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the scope of claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

[Explanation of feature 21TM]
Next, the feature unit 21TM will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in the above-mentioned (Explanation of the feature unit 207SG), the variation display executed after being controlled to a predetermined gaming state (for example, a high base state) in the gaming machine whose set value can be changed. It is characterized in that the ratio of the selected fluctuation pattern differs depending on the number of times.

(Display result judgment)
FIG. 13-1 is a diagram showing an example of a display result determination table referred to in the low probability state. As shown in FIGS. 13-1 (A) to 13-1 (F), a display result determination table corresponding to each set value (1 to 6) is provided, and the CPU 103 uses the set value (1 to 6). The jackpot judgment is executed by referring to the display result judgment table corresponding to any of).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. The set value is composed of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest ball output rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the ball output rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is.

The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 which is a random number value for determining the special figure display result is set. In each display result judgment table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value for a big hit is set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 13-1 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 at the time of low probability is used, the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is When the target is a variable display, the jackpot has a lower probability (1 / 199.8) than when the set values are "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". It is supposed to win. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1 / 199.8) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-1 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 at the time of non-probability change is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is set. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1 / 188.3) than when it is "1". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1 / 188.3) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-1 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 at the time of low probability is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is set. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1 / 178.1) than when the numbers are "1" and "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1 / 178.1) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-1 (D), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 at the time of low probability is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is set. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1 / 164.7) than in the case of "1", "2", and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1 / 164.7) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-1 (E), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 at the time of low probability is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is set. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1 / 149.3) than in the case of "1", "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1 / 149.3) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-1 (F), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 6 at the time of low probability is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is set. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1 / 134.0) than in the case of "1", "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1 / 134.0) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at the time when the variable display is to be started in the low accuracy state, and the value of MR1 is shown in FIGS. 13-1 (A) to 13-1 (A). If any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot shown in F) is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. That is, the winning of the big hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 13-1 (A) to 13-1 (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design.

FIG. 13-2 is a diagram showing an example of a display result determination table referred to in the high accuracy state. As shown in FIGS. 13-2 (A) to 13-2 (F), a display result determination table corresponding to each set value (1 to 6) is provided, and the CPU 103 uses the set set value (1 to 6). The jackpot judgment is executed by referring to the display result judgment table corresponding to any of).

As shown in FIG. 13-2 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 at the time of high probability is used, the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is If the target is variable display, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/50) than when the set values are "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/50) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-2 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 at the time of high probability is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is set. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1 / 47.1) than when it is "1". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1 / 47.1) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-2 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 at the time of high probability is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is set. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1 / 44.5) than when the numbers are "1" and "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1 / 44.5) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-2 (D), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 at the time of high probability is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is set. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1 / 41.2) than in the case of "1", "2", and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1 / 41.2) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-2 (E), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 at the time of high probability is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is set. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1 / 37.3) than in the case of "1", "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1 / 37.3) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-2 (F), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 6 at the time of high probability is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is set. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1 / 33.5) than in the case of "1", "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1 / 33.5) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at the time when the variable display is to be started in the high accuracy state, and the value of MR1 is shown in FIGS. 13-2 (A) to 13-2 (A). If any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot shown in F) is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. That is, the winning of the big hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 14-2 (A) to 14-2 (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit.

Further, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 13-1 and 13-2 to determine whether or not to make a big hit, but the big hit determination table is separately used. The jackpot may be determined by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. ..

In this embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The set value that can be set in may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Big hit type judgment)
FIG. 13-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) stored in the ROM 101, and FIG. 13-3 (B) is a jackpot type stored in the ROM 101. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination table (for the 2nd special symbol). Of these, FIG. 13-3 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 13-3 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is variably displayed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is set to "3R normal jackpot [50 times]" based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. "3R normal jackpot [100 times]", "5R normal jackpot [50 times]", "5R normal jackpot [100 times]", "10R normal jackpot [50 times]", "10R normal jackpot [100 times]", It is a table referred to for determining one of "3R probability variation jackpot [next time]", "5R probability variation jackpot [next time]", and "10R probability variation jackpot [next time]".

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 21TM of the present embodiment will be described. In the feature unit 21TM of the present embodiment, the jackpot types are "normal jackpot" (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state to shift to the low probability / high base state. A "probability change jackpot" is set in which high-accuracy control and time-saving control are executed after the game is completed to shift to a high-accuracy / high-base state.

The big hit game state by "3R big hit" is a normally open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state which is advantageous for the player three times (so-called 3 rounds) and is repeatedly executed. The big hit game state by "big hit" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "10R big hit" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by "normal big hit [50 times]" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times in this example), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. The time saving control that ends when the game is in the big hit game state before the game is executed and is executed after the end of the big hit game state by "normal big hit [100 times]" is a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example). The game ends when the special figure game of No. 1 is executed, or when the game is in a big hit game state before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of "probability variation jackpot [next time]" are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, if the reoccurring jackpot is any of the types of "3R probability variation jackpot [next time]", "5R probability variation jackpot [next time]", and "10R probability variation jackpot [next time]", the jackpot game state ends. Later, since the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed again, the jackpot game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state, which is a so-called consecutive villa state.

For example, in the jackpot game state by "3R normal jackpot [50 times]", the round that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed three times (so-called three rounds). It is an open jackpot, and after the end of the jackpot game state, it shifts to the low accuracy / high base state, and the time saving control executed after that is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times in this example). Alternatively, it is a jackpot type that ends when the jackpot game state is reached before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. In addition, in the big hit game state by "10R probability change big hit [next time]", the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state which is advantageous for the player 10 times (so-called 10 rounds), which is normally opened. It is a big hit, and after the end of the big hit game state, it shifts to the high accuracy / high base state, and the high accuracy control and the time saving control executed after that continue until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit game state. This is the type of jackpot to be executed.

In the feature section 21TM of this embodiment, an embodiment in which nine types of jackpots are provided is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of jackpot types is 8 or less, or 10 types. More than one type may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 13-3 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is "1", 0 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2. ~ 176 is assigned to "3R normal jackpot [50 times]", 177 to 179 are assigned to "5R normal jackpot [50 times]", and 180 to 290 are assigned to "3R probability variation jackpot [next time]". ] ”, And 291 to 293 are assigned to“ 5R probability variation jackpot [next time] ”, and 294 to 299 are assigned to“ 10R probability variation jackpot [next time] ”. When the set value is "2" to "6", the same determination value as when the set value is "1" is assigned in the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-3 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is "1", the MR2 determination value ranges from 0 to 299. , 0-134 are assigned to "3R normal jackpot [100 times]", 135 to 164 are assigned to "5R normal jackpot [100 times]", and 165 to 179 are assigned to "10R normal jackpot [100 times]". It is assigned to "[100 times]", 180 to 203 are assigned to "3R probability variation jackpot [next time]", and 204 to 263 are assigned to "5R probability variation jackpot [next time]", 294. Up to 299 are assigned to "10R probability variation jackpot [next time]". When the set value is "2" to "6", the same determination value as when the set value is "1" is assigned in the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, a common judgment value is assigned in the big hit type judgment table regardless of which set value is set. ing. Similarly, when a jackpot occurs in the special symbol game of the second special symbol, a common determination value is assigned in the jackpot type determination table regardless of which set value is set.

Further, in the present embodiment, the gaming state is controlled to a low probability state and a low base state (low probability / low base state: normal state) and a low probability state and a high base state (low probability / high base state). : There are cases where it is controlled to a time saving state) and cases where it is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state (high probability / high base state: probability change state).

As shown above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the first special symbol, when the set value is high, within 50 fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game (the first). The rate at which the next big hit occurs in one period) is higher than the rate at which the next big hit occurs within 50 fluctuations (first period) after the end of the big hit game when the set value is low. In addition, when the jackpot game state is controlled based on the fluctuation display result of the first special symbol, the next jackpot does not occur after the jackpot game ends when the set value is high, and after 51 fluctuations (second period). The rate of rushing into is lower than the rate of rushing into after 51 fluctuations (second period) without the next big hit occurring after the end of the big hit game when the set value is low.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the second special symbol, when the set value is high, the next is within 100 fluctuations (first period) after the end of the jackpot game. The rate at which the big hit is generated is higher than the rate at which the next big hit occurs within 100 fluctuations (first period) after the end of the big hit game when the set value is low. In addition, when the jackpot game state is controlled based on the fluctuation display result of the second special symbol, the next jackpot does not occur after the end of the jackpot game when the set value is high, and after 101 fluctuation (second period). The rate of rushing into is lower than the rate of rushing into after 101 fluctuation (second period) without the next big hit occurring after the end of the big hit game when the set value is low.

(Relationship between game state and production pattern and production mode)
First, each game state (low accuracy / low base state: normal state, low accuracy / high base state: time saving state, high accuracy / high base state: probability change state), each production symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, The relationship between the second small symbol) and each effect mode (normal mode, chance time, FEVERZONE) will be described in detail. In this embodiment, the symbols displayed on the upper right and upper left portions of the image display device 5 are smaller than the decorative symbols and indicate whether or not the special symbols are variablely displayed and the display result of the special symbols. Is called a small design. The variable display of the small symbol can be executed in parallel with the variable display of the special symbol, and the stop display of the small symbol can also be executed in parallel with the stop display of the special symbol. Then, the area at the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5 in which the first small symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is variablely displayed and stopped is displayed from the left in the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and so on. And the first small symbol display area 5r1, and the area at the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5 in which the second small symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is variablely displayed and stopped is displayed as the second small symbol display area 5l2 from the left. The second small symbol display area 5c2 and the second small symbol display area 5r2.

The display area of the first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 is smaller than that of the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Further, the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 has a smaller display area than the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the first small symbol is lower than the visibility of the decorative symbol, and the visibility of the second small symbol is lower than the visibility of the decorative symbol.

FIG. 13-4 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of decorative symbols, small symbols, and background images corresponding to the gaming state. In the present embodiment, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Here, there are cases where the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, and there are cases where the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. Which of the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display is executed corresponding to the variation display of the decorative symbol differs depending on the game state.

As described above, the gaming states in the present embodiment include a low probability / low base state (sometimes referred to as a normal state), a low probability / high base state (sometimes referred to as a time saving state), and a high probability / high base state. There is a high base state (sometimes called a probabilistic state). Then, when the gaming state is controlled to (i) low accuracy / low base state (normal state), the decorative symbol corresponds to the first special symbol. On the other hand, when the gaming state is controlled to (ii) low accuracy / high base state (time saving state), or (iii) high accuracy / high base state (probability variation state), in any case. However, the decorative design corresponds to the second special design.

That is, in the case of (i), the decorative symbol and the first small symbol are the information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second small symbol is the information corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. However, in the cases of (ii) to (iii), the decorative symbol and the second small symbol are information corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, and the first small symbol is the information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol. The information corresponds to the variable display. In the following description, "special figure 1" in the figure indicates the first special symbol, and "special figure 2" in the figure indicates the second special symbol.

In FIG. 13-4 (A), the gaming state is a low accuracy / low base state (normal state), the decorative symbol and the first small symbol correspond to the first special symbol, and the second small symbol is the second. It is a figure which shows the example of the image which is displayed on the image display device 5 when corresponding to a special symbol. Further, in FIG. 13-1 (B), the gaming state is a low accuracy / high base state (time saving state), the decorative symbol and the second small symbol correspond to the second special symbol, and the first small symbol is It is a figure which shows the example of the image which is displayed on the image display device 5 when corresponding to the 1st special symbol. Further, in FIGS. 13-4 (C1) and (C2), the gaming state is the high accuracy / high base state (probability variation state), respectively, and the decorative symbol and the second small symbol correspond to the second special symbol. , Is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the image display device 5 when the first small symbol corresponds to the first special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 13-4, a first hold display area 21TM011 for displaying the first hold storage number (0 to 4 first hold display 21TM010) is provided at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. A second hold display area 21TM021 for displaying the second hold storage number (0 to 4 second hold display 21TM020) is provided at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. Further, in the lower center of the screen of the image display device 5, the active display 21TM030, which is the information corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed and the information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol being executed, is displayed. The active display area 21TM031 is provided.

Further, a first reserved storage number special display area 21TM015 for displaying the first reserved storage number is provided on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 (upper part of the first reserved display area 21TM011), and the image display device 5 A second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025 for displaying the second reserved storage number is provided on the right side of the screen (upper part of the second reserved display area 21TM021). Then, as described above, in the upper left portion of the screen of the image display device 5, a first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 for displaying the first small symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is provided, and the image A second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 for displaying a second small symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is provided in the upper right part of the screen of the display device 5.

Here, the number of objects (round image) corresponding to the first reserved storage number is displayed in the first reserved display area 21TM011, and the second reserved display area 21TM021 corresponds to the second reserved storage number. A number of objects (round image) are displayed. On the other hand, the first reserved storage number is numerically displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 21TM015, and the second reserved storage number is numerically displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025. To. The display range of the object in the first hold display area 21TM011 is wider than the display range of the numerical value in the first hold storage number special display area 21TM015, and the first hold storage number is the first hold in the first hold display area 21TM011. It will be displayed with higher visibility than the memory number special display area 21TM015. Further, the display range of the object in the second hold display area 21TM021 is wider than the display range of the numerical value in the second hold storage number special display area 21TM025, and the second hold display area 21TM021 has the second hold storage number. 2 The number of reserved memories is displayed with higher visibility than the special display area 21TM025.

Further, in the first hold display area 21TM011, when the game state is (i) low accuracy / low base state (normal state), the number of objects corresponding to the first hold storage number is displayed, but the game state. When is in any of (ii) low accuracy / high base state (time saving state) and (iii) high accuracy / high base state (probability variation state), the object itself is not displayed. In this way, in the first hold display area 21TM011, objects corresponding to the first hold storage number are displayed according to the game state. On the other hand, in the first reserved storage number special display area 21TM015, the first reserved storage number is displayed regardless of the gaming state (even when the gaming state is any of (ii) to (iii)). Therefore, the player can check the first reserved storage number special display area 21TM015 even in the gaming state (any of (ii) to (iii)) in which the object is not displayed in the first reserved display area 21TM011. The number of first reserved memories can be grasped.

Further, in the second hold display area 21TM021, when the gaming state is either (ii) low accuracy / high base state (time saving state) or (iii) high accuracy / high base state (probability variation state). , The number of objects corresponding to the second reserved memory number is displayed, but when the gaming state is (i) low probability / low base state (normal state), the objects themselves are not displayed. In this way, in the second hold display area 21TM021, objects corresponding to the second hold storage number are displayed according to the game state. On the other hand, in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025, the second reserved storage number is displayed regardless of the gaming state (even when the gaming state is (i)). Therefore, the player can grasp the second reserved storage number by checking the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025 even in the gaming state (i) in which the object is not displayed in the second reserved display area 21TM021. Can be done.

Further, in the active display area 21TM031, an object corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol among the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed regardless of the game state. ing.

The example shown in FIG. 13-4 (A) shows the screen of the image display device 5 when the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / low base state (normal state). When the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / low base state, the effect mode is controlled to the normal mode by the effect control CPU 120. When the production mode is the normal mode, a "daytime image" showing a daytime landscape including the sun and mountains is displayed as a background image of the decorative pattern.

In this example, when the first reserved storage number is 3 and the second reserved storage number is 0, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, "3" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 21TM015, "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025, and three firsts are displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 21TM011. Hold display 21TM010 is displayed. Further, in the active display area 21TM031, the active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the first special symbol) is displayed. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the first small symbol (first small symbol (first) in the first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1, 5r1). 1) The variation display of (information corresponding to the special symbol) is executed, and the variation display result of the 2nd special symbol that was executed last time (most recently executed) was "missing". In the 2 small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2, the combination of the 2nd small symbols (information corresponding to the 2nd special symbol) indicating that the variation display result is "missing" ("245" in this example) continues. Is displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 13-4 (B) shows the screen of the image display device 5 when the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / high base state (time saving state). When the game state is controlled to the low accuracy / high base state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to "chance time". When the production mode is "Chance Time", the "Evening Image" showing the evening scenery including the evening sky and mountains will be displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the characters "Chance Time" will be displayed at the top of the screen. Will be displayed.

In this example, when the first reserved storage number is 0 and the second reserved storage number is 3, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Further, "0" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 21TM015, "3" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025, and three seconds are displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM021. Hold display 21TM020 is displayed. Further, in the active display area 21TM031, the active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the second special symbol) is displayed. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the first small symbol (sub) is executed in the first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1. Corresponds to the fact that the variation display of the first special symbol (information corresponding to the symbol) has been executed, and the variation display result of the first special symbol that was executed last time (most recently executed) was "missing". Then, in the first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1, 5r1, a combination of the first small symbols (information corresponding to the first special symbol) indicating that the variable display result is "missing" ("134" in this example. ) Is continuously displayed, and the variation display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2.

13-4 (C1) and 13-4 (C2) are diagrams showing screens of the image display device 5 when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / high base state (probability variation state), respectively. As shown in FIG. 13-4 (C1), when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / high base state, a predetermined number of times (in this example, in this example) after the game state shifts to the high accuracy / high base state. Until the special figure game of 50 times or 100 times is executed, or until the big hit game state is reached before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed, the game state is a low probability / high base state (time saving state). ) Is controlled, the production mode is controlled to "chance time". As mentioned above, when the production mode is "Chance Time", the "Evening image" showing the evening scenery including the evening sky and mountains is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and "Evening image" is displayed at the top of the screen. The word "chance time" will be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-4 (C2), after the game state shifts to the high accuracy / high base state, a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this example) without becoming a big hit game state. When the special figure game is executed, it is controlled to the production mode called "FEVERZONE". When the production mode is "FEVERZONE", a "typhoon image" showing the scenery of the typhoon including clouds, wind and rain will be displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and "FEVERZONE" will be displayed in the center of the screen. The characters will be displayed.

In the present embodiment, after the game state shifts to the high probability / high base state (probability change state), until the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this example), or the predetermined number of times. The period until the jackpot game state is reached before the number of special figure games is executed shall be referred to as the first period. In addition, after the game state shifts to the high accuracy / high base state, the period after the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this example) without becoming a big hit game state (book). In the example, 51 times or later or 101 times or later) shall be referred to as the second period.

Further, after the game state shifts to the low accuracy / high base state (time saving state), until the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this example), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times is executed. Figure The period until the big hit game state is reached before the game is executed is referred to as the first period as in the case of the high accuracy / high base state. On the other hand, after the game state shifts to the low accuracy / high base state (time saving state), the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this example) without becoming a big hit game state. The later period (in this example, the period after 51 times or 101 times, and the period after the low probability / low base state (normal state)) is not referred to as the second period.

In the example shown in FIG. 13-4 (C1), when the first reserved storage number is 0 and the second reserved storage number is 3, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Further, "0" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 21TM015, "3" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025, and three seconds are displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM021. Hold display 21TM020 is displayed. Further, in the active display area 21TM031, the active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the second special symbol) is displayed. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the first small symbol (sub) is executed in the first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1. Corresponds to the fact that the variation display of the first special symbol (information corresponding to the symbol) has been executed, and the variation display result of the first special symbol that was executed last time (most recently executed) was "missing". Then, in the first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1, 5r1, a combination of the first small symbols (information corresponding to the first special symbol) indicating that the variable display result is "missing" ("134" in this example. ) Is continuously displayed, and the variation display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2.

In the example shown in FIG. 13-4 (C2), when the first reserved storage number is 0 and the second reserved storage number is 3, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Further, "0" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 21TM015, and "3" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the first small symbol (sub) is executed in the first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1. Corresponds to the fact that the variation display of the first special symbol (information corresponding to the symbol) has been executed, and the variation display result of the first special symbol that was executed last time (most recently executed) was "missing". Then, in the first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1, 5r1, a combination of the first small symbols (information corresponding to the first special symbol) indicating that the variable display result is "missing" ("134" in this example. ) Is continuously displayed, and the variation display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2.

In the present embodiment, during the period (second period) in which the effect mode is controlled to "FEVERZONE", the second hold display is displayed in the second hold display area 21TM021 even when the second hold storage number is 1 or more. 21TM020 is not displayed. Further, even when the variation display of the second special symbol is being executed, the active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variation display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the second special symbol) is not displayed in the active display area 21TM031. The square object itself indicating the active display area 21TM031 is also not displayed.

This is because, in the second period, the fluctuation display (high-speed fluctuation) having an extremely short fluctuation display period is continuously performed until the fluctuation display (variation display based on the fluctuation pattern of the direct jackpot) in which the display result is "big hit" is executed. Because it is executed. When such high-speed fluctuations are continuously executed, the variation display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is used to ensure that the player recognizes the display result of each fluctuation display (high-speed fluctuation). It is necessary to pay attention to the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in which the above is executed. Therefore, in the second period, the hold display and the active display are not displayed, and the player's consciousness is directed to the display result of the currently executed fluctuation display (high-speed fluctuation).

Not limited to such a form, when the production mode is "chance time" (when it is the first period), the hold display or active display is not displayed, and when the production mode is "FEVERZONE" (first period). (When there are two periods), the hold display or the active display may be displayed.

(Game flow)
FIG. 13-5 is an explanatory diagram showing a game flow of the present embodiment. As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of effect modes (normal mode, chance time, FEVERZONE) corresponding to the gaming state are provided, and the effect control CPU 120 can be controlled to a plurality of effect modes.

When the game state is controlled to the low accuracy / low base state (normal state) and the effect mode is controlled to the normal mode, the variation display is started, and the display result of the variation display is "3R normal jackpot". When any of "5R normal jackpot", "10R normal jackpot", "3R probability variation jackpot", "5R probability variation jackpot", and "10R probability variation jackpot" is obtained, the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. If the result of the fluctuation display is any of "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", and "10R normal jackpot", the gaming state is low accuracy / high base state (time reduction) after the jackpot game state ends. It is controlled by the state), and the production mode is controlled by the "chance time". In addition, when the result of the fluctuation display is any of "3R probability variation jackpot", "5R probability variation jackpot", and "10R probability variation jackpot", the gaming state is in the high accuracy / high base state after the jackpot gaming state ends. It is controlled to (probability change state), and the production mode is controlled to "chance time".

When the game state is controlled to the low accuracy / high base state (time saving state) and the production mode is controlled to "chance time", the variation display is started, and the display result of the variation display is "3R normal jackpot". , "5R normal jackpot", "10R normal jackpot", "3R probability variation jackpot", "5R probability variation jackpot", and "10R probability variation jackpot", the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. If the result of the fluctuation display is any of "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", and "10R normal jackpot", the gaming state is low accuracy / high base state (time reduction) after the jackpot game state ends. It is controlled by the state), and the production mode is controlled by the "chance time". In addition, when the result of the fluctuation display is any of "3R probability variation jackpot", "5R probability variation jackpot", and "10R probability variation jackpot", the gaming state is in the high accuracy / high base state after the jackpot gaming state ends. It is controlled to (probability change state), and the production mode is controlled to "chance time".

When the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / high base state (probability variation state) and the production mode is controlled to "chance time", the variation display is started, and the display result of the variation display is "3R normal jackpot". , "5R normal jackpot", "10R normal jackpot", "3R probability variation jackpot", "5R probability variation jackpot", and "10R probability variation jackpot", the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. If the result of the fluctuation display is any of "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", and "10R normal jackpot", the gaming state is low accuracy / high base state (time reduction) after the jackpot game state ends. It is controlled by the state), and the production mode is controlled by the "chance time". In addition, when the result of the fluctuation display is any of "3R probability variation jackpot", "5R probability variation jackpot", and "10R probability variation jackpot", the gaming state is in the high accuracy / high base state after the jackpot gaming state ends. It is controlled to (probability change state), and the production mode is controlled to "chance time".

From the time when the game state is controlled to the low accuracy / high base state (time saving state) and the effect mode is controlled to the "chance time" until the variable display of a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this example) is executed. If no big hit occurs, the game state shifts from the low probability / high base state (time saving state) to the low probability / low base state (normal state), and the production mode shifts from the chance time to the normal mode. ..

Specifically, after the game state is controlled to the low accuracy / high base state (time saving state) (after the effect mode is controlled to the "chance time"), a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) of the special symbol By the end of the variation display, the variation display results of the special symbol are "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", "10R normal jackpot", "3R probability variation jackpot", "5R probability variation jackpot", and "10R probability variation jackpot". If none of the display results are obtained, the gaming state shifts to the low accuracy / low base state (or the gaming state is high) in response to the fluctuation display of the predetermined number of times (50th or 100th). A suggestion effect (in this example, a continuous challenge effect of the failure mode) suggesting that the probability / high base state is maintained and the high accuracy / high base state is maintained) is executed. Then, at the timing when the predetermined number of times (50th or 100th) fluctuation display is completed, the gaming state falls from the low probability / high base state (time saving state) to the low probability / low base state (normal state), and then The effect mode becomes the normal mode from the variable display of.

From the time when the game state is controlled to the high probability / high base state (probability change state) and the effect mode is controlled to the "chance time" until the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this example) is executed. If no big hit occurs, the high accuracy / high base state (probability change state) continues, and the production mode shifts from "chance time" to "FEVERZONE".

Specifically, after the game state is controlled to the high probability / high base state (probability change state) (after the effect mode is controlled to the "chance time"), a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) of the special symbol By the end of the variation display, the variation display results of the special symbol are "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", "10R normal jackpot", "3R probability variation jackpot", "5R probability variation jackpot", and "10R probability variation jackpot". If none of the display results are obtained, the gaming state is the high accuracy / high base state and the high accuracy / high base state is maintained in response to the fluctuation display of the predetermined number of times (50th or 100th). A suggestion effect (in this example, a continuous challenge effect of the success mode) suggesting that the game is to be played (or the game state shifts to the low probability / low base state) is executed. Then, even after the predetermined number of times (50th or 100th) variation display is completed, the high accuracy / high base state (probability variation state) continues, and the effect mode becomes "FEVERZONE" from the next variation display.

In this way, after the game state is controlled to the low accuracy / high base state (time saving state), until the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this example), or the predetermined number of times. The production mode is controlled to "chance time" until the jackpot game state is reached before the special figure game of. Further, after the game state is controlled to the high probability / high base state (probability change state), until the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this example), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times is executed. Figure The production mode is controlled to "chance time" until the jackpot game state is reached before the game is executed.

That is, after the jackpot game is completed, either the game state is controlled to the low probability / low base state (time saving state) or the game state is controlled to the high probability / high base state (probability change state). Since the production mode is controlled to "chance time" even in the game state of, the common "evening image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the common "chance time" characters are displayed at the top of the screen. It will be displayed. According to such a configuration, the game state is controlled to the low probability / low base state (time saving state), and the game state is controlled to the high probability / high base state (probability change state). It becomes possible to standardize the production for one period, and it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the currently controlled gaming state. Further, even when the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / low base state (time saving state), the gaming state is given to the player with the expectation that the gaming state is the high accuracy / high base state (probability variation state). It is possible to improve the interest of the game when the player is in the low accuracy / low base state (time saving state).

(Variation pattern judgment)
Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for deviation used when it is predetermined to set the variable display result to "off" and the variable display result to be "big hit". A jackpot variation pattern determination table to be used when is pre-determined is prepared in advance.

In the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern determination table referred to when the game state is controlled to the low probability / high base state (time saving state) and the game state are controlled to the high probability / high base state (probability change state). The fluctuation pattern judgment table referred to at the time of is described. For each game state, when it is decided in advance that the variable display result is "out of place", the variation pattern judgment table for loss is used, and when it is decided in advance that the variable display result is "big hit". It is assumed that the fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits to be used is prepared in advance.

In the deviation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach loss (high-speed fluctuation)", the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach loss (shortening fluctuation)", the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach loss", and the fluctuation of "super reach loss" For each fluctuation pattern of the pattern, a predetermined random value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value.

In the present embodiment, the fluctuation display period when it is determined to be a “non-reach out of reach (high-speed fluctuation)” fluctuation pattern is 1 second, and when it is determined to be a “non-reach out of reach (shortening fluctuation)” fluctuation pattern. The variation display period is 5 seconds, the variation display period when it is determined to be a "normal reach out of reach" variation pattern is 30 seconds, and the variation display period when it is determined to be a "super reach out of order" variation pattern is 60. Seconds.

As for the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach out of reach (high-speed fluctuation)" and the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach out of reach (shortening fluctuation)", the reach is not established after the fluctuation display is started, and the fluctuation display result becomes "out of reach". This is a variable pattern in which the combination of decorative symbols indicating that is stopped and displayed. Here, the fluctuation display period when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "non-reach loss (shortening fluctuation)" is 5 seconds, whereas the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "non-reach loss (high-speed fluctuation)". Since the fluctuation display period of the case is 1 second, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach loss (high-speed fluctuation)" when there is hold memory, the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach loss (shortening fluctuation)". It is possible to digest the reserved memory at shorter intervals than when it was determined.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the random value MR3 for jackpot determination is used for each fluctuation pattern of the "straight jackpot" fluctuation pattern, the "normal reach jackpot" fluctuation pattern, and the "super reach jackpot" fluctuation pattern. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value in the possible range.

In the present embodiment, the fluctuation display period when it is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of "direct jackpot" is 10 seconds, and the fluctuation display period when it is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach jackpot" is 30 seconds. The fluctuation display period when it is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of "super reach jackpot" is 60 seconds.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the "direct jackpot" is a variation in which the combination of decorative symbols indicating that the variation display result becomes the "big hit" is stopped and displayed without going through the reach establishment after the variation display is started. It is a pattern. Since the effect that the reach is established is not executed, the variation display period when it is determined to be the variation pattern of the "direct jackpot" is the other variation that executes the effect that the reach is established when the variation display result is the "big hit". It is shorter than the variable display period of the pattern ("normal reach jackpot", "super reach jackpot").

In the present embodiment, in the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the normal reach (“normal reach loss” and “normal reach jackpot”), the final display result is displayed without executing the super reach effect (battle effect) described later after the reach state is established. It will be fixedly stopped.

In the present embodiment, in the fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach (“super reach loss” and “super reach jackpot”), after the reach state is established, as a super reach effect, a ally character and an enemy character battle. A battle effect is executed to notify whether or not the jackpot has been won. Then, when the final display result is "big hit" (when the big hit symbol is fixed and stopped), the effect that the ally character wins the enemy character is executed, and when the final display result is "missing" (missing symbol). When is definitely stopped), the effect that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed.

FIG. 13-6 (A) is a fluctuation pattern determination table for the first period [excluding the final fluctuation]. This first period [excluding the final change] is the period of 50 special game games after the change display result of the first special symbol becomes "big hit", or the second special symbol. From the period of 100 special figure games after the variation display result becomes "big hit", the final variation of the above-mentioned first period (in this example, the variation display result of the first special symbol becomes "big hit". The period (that is, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol) excluding the 50th special symbol game after that or the 100th special symbol game after the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes a "big hit") The period of 49 special figure games after the result is "big hit", or the period of 99 special figure games after the variable display result of the second special symbol is "big hit"). is there. Here, in FIGS. 13-6 (A), FIG. 13-6 (A1) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table for loss, and FIG. 13-6 (A2) is a variation pattern determination for jackpot. It is a figure which shows an example of a table.

That is, the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] when the game state is the low probability / high base state (time saving state) and the first period when the game state is the high probability / high base state (probability change state). When the judgment result at the start of the change is judged to be "out of place" in [excluding the final change], the change pattern judgment table of [for out of place] common to all game states (FIG. 13-6 (A1)). ) Will be used to determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] when the game state is the low probability / high base state (time saving state) and the first period when the game state is the high probability / high base state (probability change state). When the determination result at the start of the variation is determined to be "big hit" in [excluding the final variation], the variation pattern determination table for [big hit] that is common to all game states (FIG. 13-6 (A2)). ) Will be used to determine the fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 13-6 (A1), in the deviation pattern determination table, when the set value is "1", 1 to 750 of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 is "1". It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach out of reach (shortening fluctuation)", 751 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach out of reach", and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super reach out of reach". Has been done. Further, when the set value is any of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the determination value of MR3 is the same as when the set value is "1". Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 750 are assigned to the "non-reach out of reach (shortening variation)" variation pattern, and 751 to 900 are assigned to the "normal reach out of reach" variation pattern, 901 to 900. Up to 997 are assigned to the "out of super reach" variation pattern. As described above, when the display result is "off" in the first period excluding the final fluctuation, the selection ratio of each of the plurality of fluctuation patterns is common regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIG. 13-6 (A2), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, when the set value is "1", 1 to 20 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are "1". It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "straight jackpot", 21 to 50 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach jackpot", and 51 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super reach jackpot". Further, when the set value is any of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the determination value of MR3 is the same as when the set value is "1". Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 20 are assigned to the "straight jackpot" fluctuation pattern, 21 to 50 are assigned to the "normal reach jackpot" fluctuation pattern, and 51 to 997 are assigned to the "super hit" fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "reach jackpot". As described above, when the display result is "big hit" in the first period excluding the final fluctuation, the selection ratio of each of the plurality of fluctuation patterns is common regardless of the set value.

FIG. 13-6 (B) is a fluctuation pattern determination table for the first period [final fluctuation]. This first period [final change] is the 50th special figure game after the change display result of the first special symbol becomes a "big hit", or the final change of the first period described above, or This is the 100th special figure game after the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes a "big hit"). Here, in FIGS. 13-6 (B), FIG. 13-6 (B1) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table for loss, and FIG. 13-6 (B2) is a variation pattern determination for jackpot. It is a figure which shows an example of a table.

That is, the final variation of the first period when the gaming state is the low accuracy / high base state (time saving state) and the final variation of the first period when the gaming state is the high accuracy / high base state (probability variation state). Then, when the judgment result at the start of the fluctuation is determined to be "off", the fluctuation pattern is based on the [for loss] fluctuation pattern judgment table (FIG. 13-6 (B1)) that is common to all gaming states. Will be decided. In addition, the final variation of the first period when the gaming state is the low accuracy / high base state (time saving state) and the final variation of the first period when the gaming state is the high accuracy / high base state (probability variation state). Then, when the determination result at the start of fluctuation is determined to be "big hit", the fluctuation pattern is based on the [big hit] fluctuation pattern judgment table (FIG. 13-6 (B2)) that is common to all game states. Will be decided.

As shown in FIG. 13-6 (B1), in the deviation pattern determination table, when the set value is "1", 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 will be described later. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "suggestion effect (missing)". Further, when the set value is any of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the determination value of MR3 is the same as when the set value is "1". Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "suggestion effect (off)". As described above, when the display result is "out of place" in the final fluctuation of the first period, a common fluctuation pattern is selected regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIG. 13-6 (B2), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, when the set value is "1", 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 is "1". It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "suggestion effect (big hit)". Further, when the set value is any of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the determination value of MR3 is the same as when the set value is "1". Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "suggestion effect (big hit)". As described above, when the display result is "big hit" in the final fluctuation of the first period, a common fluctuation pattern is selected regardless of the set value.

The suggestive effect is an effect that suggests the transition from the first period to the second period (the high base state of the gaming state continues), and whether or not the transition from the first period to the second period ( It is an effect of notifying whether or not the high base state of the game state continues). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-13 described later, a continuous challenge effect is executed as a suggestion effect.

In the continuous challenge effect, as shown in FIG. 13-13 described later, the characters "continuous challenge" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the operation promotion display 21TM150 for urging the player to operate the push button 31B. Is displayed, and the character 21TM300 is displayed at the lower right of the screen. The operation promotion display 21TM150 includes an image imitating the push button 31B and a downward arrow displayed above the image imitating the push button 31B, and is a display prompting the user to press the push button 31B. It has become.

When the currently controlled gaming state is the low accuracy / high base state (time saving state), the push button 31B is operated by the player when the operation promotion display 21TM150 is displayed. The continuous challenge effect of the failure mode is executed, the character "failure" and the object "?" Are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the character 21TM300A is displayed in the lower right of the screen. The game state shifts to the low accuracy / low base state (normal state) by displaying the character "failure" or the object indicating "?" Suggesting that the continuous challenge effect has failed on the image display device 5. The player is informed of what to do.

When the currently controlled game state is the high accuracy / high base state (probability change state), the push button 31B is operated by the player when the operation promotion display 21TM150 is displayed. The continuous challenge effect of the success mode is executed, the character "success" and the object "○" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the character 21TM300B is displayed in the lower right of the screen. By displaying the characters "success" and the object indicating "○" on the image display device 5 to indicate that the continuous challenge production was successful, the continuous challenge production was successful and the game state was highly accurate / high. The player is notified that the base state (probability change state) will continue.

FIG. 13-6 (C) is a fluctuation pattern determination table for the second period. As described above, this second period is a special figure of a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this example) without becoming a big hit game state after the game state shifts to the high accuracy / high base state. It is the period after the game is executed (in this example, after 51 times or after 101 times). Here, in FIGS. 13-6 (C), FIG. 13-6 (C1) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table for loss, and FIG. 13-6 (C2) is a variation pattern determination for jackpot. It is a figure which shows an example of a table.

That is, in the second period when the game state is the high probability / high base state (probability change state), when the judgment result at the start of the change is determined to be "out of place", the change pattern judgment table of [for out of place] The fluctuation pattern will be determined based on FIG. 13-6 (C1)). Further, in the second period when the game state is the high probability / high base state (probability change state), when the judgment result at the start of the change is determined to be "big hit", the change pattern judgment table of [for big hit] (for big hit). The fluctuation pattern will be determined based on FIG. 13-6 (C2)). On the other hand, when the gaming state is a low probability / high base state (time saving state), the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table (FIGS. 13-6 (C1) and (C2)) for the second period. Not done.

As shown in FIG. 13-6 (C1), in the deviation pattern determination table, when the set value is "1", 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 is "1". It is assigned to the "non-reach off (high-speed fluctuation)" fluctuation pattern. Further, when the set value is any of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the judgment value of MR3 is the same as when the set value is "1". Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 997 are assigned to the "non-reach off (high-speed fluctuation)" fluctuation pattern. As described above, when the display result is "off" in the second period, a common fluctuation pattern is selected regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIG. 13-6 (C2), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, when the set value is "1", 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 is "1". It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "direct jackpot". Further, when the set value is any of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the determination value of MR3 is the same as when the set value is "1". Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 997 are assigned to the "direct jackpot" fluctuation pattern. As described above, when the display result is "big hit" in the second period, a common fluctuation pattern is selected regardless of the set value.

(Fluctuation pattern judgment table referred to after the special figure 1 big hit)
In FIG. 13-7 (A1), the variation display result of the first special symbol is one of "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", and "10R normal jackpot", and the gaming state is low after the jackpot game is completed. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the fluctuation pattern determination table which is referred to when it shifts to a certain / high base state (time saving state), and the execution timing of each effect. In FIG. 13-7 (A2), the variation display result of the first special symbol is one of "3R probability variation jackpot", "5R probability variation jackpot", and "10R probability variation jackpot", and the gaming state is high after the jackpot game is completed. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the fluctuation pattern determination table which is referred to when it shifts to the probability / high base state (probability change state), and the execution timing of each effect.

As shown in FIG. 13-7 (A1), when the variation display result of the first special symbol is any of "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", and "10R normal jackpot", the jackpot After the end of the game, the game state shifts to the low accuracy / high base state (time saving state).

It is executed when the game state is controlled to the low accuracy / high base state (time saving state) in the period of 49 special figure games after the variation display result of the first special symbol becomes "big hit". The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table of the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] shown in FIG. 13-6 (A).

Next, in the 50th special figure game after the variation display result of the first special symbol becomes "big hit", it is executed when the game state is controlled to the low accuracy / high base state (time saving state). The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table of the first period [final fluctuation] shown in FIG. 13-6 (B). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the continuous challenge effect of the failure mode. Then, after the variation display is completed, the gaming state shifts to the low accuracy / low base state (normal state).

Next, it is executed when the game state is controlled to the low accuracy / low base state (normal state) in the 51st and subsequent special figure games after the variation display result of the first special symbol becomes "big hit". The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 10-23 and 10-24.

As shown in FIG. 13-7 (A2), when the variation display result of the first special symbol is any of "3R probability variation jackpot", "5R probability variation jackpot", and "10R probability variation jackpot", the jackpot After the end of the game, the game state shifts to the high probability / high base state (probability change state).

It is executed when the game state is controlled to the high probability / high base state (probability change state) in the period of 49 special figure games after the variation display result of the first special symbol becomes "big hit". The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table of the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] shown in FIG. 13-6 (A).

Next, in the 50th special figure game after the variation display result of the second special symbol becomes "big hit", it is executed when the game state is controlled to the high probability / high base state (probability change state). The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table of the first period [final fluctuation] shown in FIG. 13-6 (B). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the continuous challenge effect of the successful mode. Then, even after the variation display is completed, the high accuracy / high base state (probability variation state) is continued.

Next, it is executed when the game state is controlled to the low accuracy / low base state (normal state) in the 51st and subsequent special figure games after the variation display result of the first special symbol becomes "big hit". The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table of the second period shown in FIG. 13-6 (C).

(Fluctuation pattern judgment table referred to after special figure 2 big hit)
In FIG. 13-8 (B1), the variation display result of the second special symbol is one of "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", and "10R normal jackpot", and the gaming state is low after the jackpot game is completed. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the fluctuation pattern determination table which is referred to when it shifts to a certain / high base state (time saving state), and the execution timing of each effect. In FIG. 13-8 (B2), the variation display result of the second special symbol is one of "3R probability variation jackpot", "5R probability variation jackpot", and "10R probability variation jackpot", and the gaming state is high after the jackpot game is completed. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the fluctuation pattern determination table which is referred to when it shifts to the probability / high base state (probability change state), and the execution timing of each effect.

As shown in FIG. 13-8 (B1), when the variation display result of the second special symbol is any of "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", and "10R normal jackpot", the jackpot After the end of the game, the game state shifts to the low accuracy / high base state (time saving state).

It is executed when the game state is controlled to the low accuracy / high base state (time saving state) in the period of 99 special figure games after the variation display result of the second special symbol becomes "big hit". The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table of the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] shown in FIG. 13-6 (A).

Next, in the 100th special figure game after the variation display result of the second special symbol becomes "big hit", it is executed when the game state is controlled to the low accuracy / high base state (time saving state). The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table of the first period [final fluctuation] shown in FIG. 13-6 (B). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the continuous challenge effect of the failure mode. Then, after the variation display is completed, the gaming state shifts to the low accuracy / low base state (normal state).

Next, it is executed when the game state is controlled to the low accuracy / low base state (normal state) in the 101st and subsequent special figure games after the variation display result of the second special symbol becomes "big hit". The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 10-23 and 10-24.

As shown in FIG. 13-8 (B2), when the variation display result of the second special symbol is any of "3R probability variation jackpot", "5R probability variation jackpot", and "10R probability variation jackpot", the jackpot After the end of the game, the game state shifts to the high probability / high base state (probability change state).

It is executed when the game state is controlled to the high probability / high base state (probability change state) in the period of 99 special figure games after the variation display result of the second special symbol becomes "big hit". The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table of the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] shown in FIG. 13-6 (A).

Next, in the 100th special figure game after the variation display result of the second special symbol becomes "big hit", it is executed when the game state is controlled to the high probability / high base state (probability change state). The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table of the first period [final fluctuation] shown in FIG. 13-6 (B). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the continuous challenge effect of the successful mode. Then, even after the variation display is completed, the high accuracy / high base state (probability variation state) is continued.

Next, it is executed when the game state is controlled to the low accuracy / low base state (normal state) in the 101st and subsequent special figure games after the variation display result of the second special symbol becomes "big hit". The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table of the second period shown in FIG. 13-6 (C).

As shown in FIG. 13-6, the deviation pattern determination table for each period (first period [excluding final variation], first period [final variation], and second period) is common regardless of the set value. Is.

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "off", the fluctuation display period is longer than "non-reach loss (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds) as the fluctuation pattern. The rate at which a certain "normal reach out" (variation display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach out" (variation display period is 60 seconds) is selected is the deviation pattern judgment table for the first period [excluding the final fluctuation]. It can be calculated based on (see FIG. 13-6 (A1)).

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "off", the ratio at which "normal reach loss" (variation display period is 30 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern is the judgment value of MR3. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 751 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "out of normal reach", so [{(900-751 + 1) / 997} x 100 = 15%].

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "off", the ratio at which "super reach out" (variation display period is 60 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern is the judgment value of MR3. Of the range 1 to 997, 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "out of super reach", so that it is [{(997-901 + 1) / 997} x 100 = 10%].

Therefore, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "off", the fluctuation display is longer than "non-reach loss (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds) as the fluctuation pattern. The ratio at which the period "normal reach out" (variable display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach out" (variable display period is 60 seconds) is selected is [15 + 10 = 25%].

In addition, in the second period, when the fluctuation display result is "off", the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach loss (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds), which is a longer fluctuation display period than "normal reach loss". (Variation display period is 30 seconds) or "Super reach out" (variation display period is 60 seconds) is selected for the deviation pattern determination table for the second period (see FIG. 13-6 (C1)). Can be calculated based on.

In the second period, when the variation display result is "off", "normal reach loss" (variation display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach loss" (variation display period is 60 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern. The ratio is [(0/997) × 100 = 0%] because none of the determination values in the range of the determination values of MR3 is assigned.

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "off", the fluctuation display period is longer than "non-reach loss (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds) as the fluctuation pattern. The rate at which a certain "normal reach out" (variable display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach out" (variable display period is 60 seconds) is selected is [15 + 10 = 25%], whereas the second period In, when the fluctuation display result is "off", the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach loss (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds) longer than "normal reach loss" (variation display period is 30 seconds) or. The ratio at which "out of super reach" (variation display period is 60 seconds) is selected is [(0/997) × 100 = 0%]. In this way, in the first period, "normal reach loss" (variation display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach", which is a fluctuation display period longer than "non-reach loss (shortening fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds). The rate at which "off" (variable display period is 60 seconds) is selected is higher than in the second period.

In addition, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "off", the fluctuation display is shorter than "non-reach loss (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds) as the fluctuation pattern. The rate at which the period "non-reach out (high-speed fluctuation)" (variation display period is 1 second) is selected is the deviation pattern determination table for the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] (Fig. 13-6 (A1). ) Can be calculated based on).

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "off", the ratio at which "non-reach out (high-speed fluctuation)" (variation display period is 1 second) is selected as the fluctuation pattern is Since none of the determination values in the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 is assigned, it is [(0/997) × 100 = 0%].

Further, in the second period, when the fluctuation display result is "off", the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach", which is a fluctuation display period shorter than "non-reach loss (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds). The rate at which "off (high-speed fluctuation)" (variation display period is 1 second) is selected can be calculated based on the deviation pattern determination table (see FIG. 13-6 (C1)) for the second period.

In the second period, when the fluctuation display result is "off", the ratio at which "non-reach loss (high-speed fluctuation)" (variation display period is 1 second) is selected as the fluctuation pattern is within the range of the judgment value of MR3. Of 1 to 997, 1 to 997 are assigned to the "non-reach out-of-reach (high-speed fluctuation)" fluctuation pattern, so [{(997-1 + 1) / 997} x 100 = 100%].

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "off", the fluctuation display period is shorter than "non-reach loss (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds) as the fluctuation pattern. The ratio of selecting a certain "non-reach off (high-speed fluctuation)" (variation display period is 1 second) is [0%], whereas in the second period, the fluctuation display result is "off". Occasionally, the rate at which "non-reach out (high-speed fluctuation)" (variation display period is 1 second), which is shorter than "non-reach out (shortening fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds), is selected as the fluctuation pattern is [100%]. In this way, in the second period, the fluctuation display period is shorter than the "non-reach out (shortening fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds), and the "non-reach out (high-speed fluctuation)" (variation display period is 1 second). ) Is selected higher than in the first period.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 13-6, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table for each period (first period [excluding final fluctuation], first period [final fluctuation], and second period) is set to a set value. It is common regardless.

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "big hit", the fluctuation pattern is "super reach jackpot" which is a fluctuation display period longer than "normal reach jackpot" (variation display period is 30 seconds). (The fluctuation display period is 60 seconds) can be calculated based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 13-6 (A2)) in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation].

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "big hit", the ratio at which "super reach jackpot" (variation display period is 60 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern is the judgment value of MR3. Of the range 1 to 997, 51 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super reach jackpot", so [{(997-51 + 1) / 997} x 100 = 95%].

Also, in the second period, when the fluctuation display result is "big hit", the fluctuation pattern is "super reach jackpot" (variation display), which is a fluctuation display period longer than "normal reach jackpot" (variation display period is 30 seconds). The rate at which the period (60 seconds) is selected can be calculated based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 13-6 (C2)) for the second period.

In the second period, when the fluctuation display result is "big hit", the ratio at which "super reach jackpot" (variation display period is 60 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern is in the range of the judgment value of MR3 1 to 997. Of these, none of the determination values is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super reach jackpot", so [(0/997) × 100 = 0%].

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "big hit", the fluctuation pattern is "super reach jackpot" which is a fluctuation display period longer than "normal reach jackpot" (variation display period is 30 seconds). (Variable display period is 60 seconds) is selected at [95%], whereas in the second period, when the variable display result is "big hit", "normal reach big hit" is selected as the fluctuation pattern. "(Variable display period is 30 seconds)" Super reach jackpot "(variable display period is 60 seconds) is selected at a rate of [0%]. In this way, in the first period, the ratio of selecting "super reach jackpot" (variable display period is 60 seconds), which is a variable display period longer than "normal reach jackpot" (variable display period is 30 seconds), is second. It is higher than the period.

In addition, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "big hit", the fluctuation pattern is "direct", which is a fluctuation display period shorter than "normal reach jackpot" (variation display period is 30 seconds). The rate at which "big hit" (variation display period is 10 seconds) is selected can be calculated based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 13-6 (A2)) in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation].

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "big hit", the ratio at which "direct big hit" (variation display period is 10 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern is the judgment value of MR3. Since 1 to 20 of the ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "direct jackpot", it is [{(20-1 + 1) / 997} x 100 = 2%].

Further, in the second period, when the fluctuation display result becomes "big hit", the fluctuation pattern is "direct jackpot" (variation display period), which is a fluctuation display period shorter than "normal reach jackpot" (variation display period is 30 seconds). The rate at which (10 seconds) is selected can be calculated based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 13-6 (C2)) in the second period.

In the second period, when the fluctuation display result is "big hit", the ratio at which "direct big hit" (variation display period is 10 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern is in the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997. , Since none of the determination values is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "direct jackpot", it is [{(997-1 + 1) / 997} x 100 = 100%].

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "big hit", the fluctuation pattern is "direct big hit" which is a fluctuation display period shorter than "normal reach jackpot" (variation display period is 30 seconds). The ratio of selecting (variation display period is 10 seconds) is [2%], whereas in the second period, when the fluctuation display result is "big hit", "normal reach big hit" is selected as the fluctuation pattern. The rate at which "direct jackpot" (variable display period is 10 seconds) shorter than (variable display period is 30 seconds) is selected is [100%]. In this way, in the second period, the ratio of selecting "direct jackpot" (variation display period is 10 seconds), which is a variation display period shorter than "normal reach jackpot" (variation display period is 30 seconds), is the first period. Is higher than.

As described above, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], the ratio of selecting the fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation display period longer than the predetermined fluctuation display period, is higher than that in the second period, and in the second period, the predetermined fluctuation display period is selected. When the game state is a high accuracy / high base state because the rate at which the fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation display period shorter than the fluctuation display period, is selected is higher than that of the first period [excluding the final fluctuation]. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the game machine whose setting can be changed in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the high probability / high base state, a high setting value (for example, the setting value is set to "4" to "6") is set. In that case, the jackpot will be won with a higher probability (1 / 41.2 to 1 / 33.5) than when the set value is set to a low value (for example, "1" to "3"). It has become. Therefore, when the high setting value is set, the number of fluctuations required to win the next big hit is smaller than when the low setting value is set, and the next big hit should be won at short time intervals. become. As a result, the possibility that the jackpot occurrence interval becomes excessively short increases, so that the gambling property becomes excessively high, and there arises a problem that sound playability cannot be realized.

However, in the present embodiment, in the first period [excluding the final variation], the rate at which the variation pattern, which is a variation display period longer than the predetermined variation display period, is selected is higher than that in the second period. As a result, even when a high set value (for example, the set value is set to "4" to "6") is set, the time to win the jackpot when the game state is the high accuracy / high base state. The interval can be made relatively long (not excessively short), the gambling can be suppressed from becoming excessively high, and sound playability can be realized.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game state is the high probability / high base state, when the set value is set to a low value (for example, the set value is "1" to "3"), the set value is high. (For example, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/50 to 1 / 44.5) than when the set value is set to "4" to "6"). Therefore, when the setting value is low, the number of fluctuations required to win the next big hit is larger than when the setting value is high, and the big hit is won at long time intervals. This causes the problem of degrading the interest.

However, in the present embodiment, in the second period, the ratio of selecting the fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation display period shorter than the predetermined fluctuation display period, is higher than that in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation]. As a result, even when the set value is set low (for example, the set value is "1" to "3"), the time to win the jackpot when the game state is the high accuracy / high base state. The interval can be made relatively short (not too long), and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 sets the ally character and the enemy character after the reach state is established in the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the super reach (“super reach loss” and “super reach jackpot”). Is performing a battle production that informs whether or not a big hit has been won by performing a battle.

In the first period [excluding final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "off", the rate at which "super reach out" is selected as the fluctuation pattern is for the deviation of the first period [excluding final fluctuation]. It can be calculated based on the fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 13-6 (A1)).

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "off", the ratio of selecting "super reach out" as the fluctuation pattern is within the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997. Since 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "out of super reach", it is [{(997-901 + 1) / 997} x 100 = 10%].

In the second period, when the variation display result is "off", the rate at which "super reach out" is selected as the variation pattern is the deviation pattern determination table for the second period (FIG. 13-6 (C1)). Can be calculated based on (see).

In the second period, when the fluctuation display result is "off", the ratio at which "super reach out" is selected as the fluctuation pattern is set to "out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997". Since it is not assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "out of super reach", it is [(0/997) × 100 = 0%].

As shown in FIG. 13-6 (A1), in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is “off”, the ratio at which “super reach out” is selected as the fluctuation pattern is While it is [10%], as shown in FIG. 13-6 (C1), when the fluctuation display result is “off” in the second period, “super reach loss” is set as the fluctuation pattern. The percentage selected is [0%]. In this way, the rate at which the "super reach out" fluctuation pattern is selected in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] is higher than the rate at which the "super reach out" fluctuation pattern is selected in the second period. It's getting higher. That is, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], the ratio of the battle effect being executed is higher than the ratio of the battle effect being executed in the second period.

Similarly, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "big hit", the ratio at which "super reach jackpot" is selected as the fluctuation pattern is the first period [excluding the final fluctuation]. It can be calculated based on the fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits (see FIG. 13-6 (A2)).

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "big hit", the ratio at which "super reach jackpot" is selected as the fluctuation pattern is within the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997. Since 51 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super reach jackpot", it is [{(997-51 + 1) / 997} x 100 = 95%].

In the second period, when the fluctuation display result is "big hit", the ratio at which "super reach jackpot" is selected as the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpot in the second period (FIG. 13-6 (C2)). Can be calculated based on (see).

In the second period, when the fluctuation display result is "big hit", the ratio at which "super reach jackpot" is selected as the fluctuation pattern is "" in any of the judgment values of MR3 from 1 to 997. Since it is not assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "out of super reach", it is [(0/997) × 100 = 0%].

As shown in FIG. 13-6 (A2), in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "big hit", the ratio at which "super reach jackpot" is selected as the fluctuation pattern is While it is [95%], as shown in FIG. 13-6 (C2), when the fluctuation display result is "big hit" in the second period, "super reach jackpot" is set as the fluctuation pattern. The selected percentage is [0%]. In this way, the rate at which the "super reach jackpot" fluctuation pattern is selected in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] is higher than the rate at which the "super reach jackpot" fluctuation pattern is selected in the second period. It's getting higher. That is, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], the ratio of the battle effect being executed is higher than the ratio of the battle effect being executed in the second period.

In this way, the execution rate of the battle effect in the first period is higher than the execution rate of the battle effect in the second period. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game within a predetermined period (first period) from the end of the big hit game state. In addition, in the second period after the predetermined period (first period) has elapsed from the end of the jackpot game state, the variable display period is shortened by lowering the execution rate of the battle effect, resulting in high accuracy / high base. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest due to the fact that the next big hit does not occur even though the state (probability change state) is controlled.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the high probability / high base state, when the high setting value (for example, the setting value is set to "4" to "6") is set, the low setting value is set. (For example, the jackpot is won with a higher probability (1 / 41.2 to 1 / 33.5) than when the set value is set to "1" to "3"). Therefore, when the high setting value is set, the number of fluctuations required to win the next big hit is smaller than when the low setting value is set, and the next big hit should be won at short time intervals. become. As a result, the possibility that the jackpot occurrence interval becomes excessively short increases, so that the gambling property becomes excessively high, and there arises a problem that sound playability cannot be realized.

However, in the present embodiment, the execution rate of the battle effect in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] is higher than the execution rate of the battle effect in the second period. As a result, even when a high set value (for example, the set value is set to "4" to "6") is set, the first period [final] is performed when the game state is the high accuracy / high base state. In [Exclude fluctuations], the ratio of selecting fluctuation patterns with super reach, which has a longer fluctuation display period than in the second period, is high, so the time interval for winning the jackpot is relatively long (excessively short). It is possible to prevent the game from becoming excessively high, prevent the gambling from becoming excessively high, and realize sound playability.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game state is the high probability / high base state, when the set value is set to a low value (for example, the set value is "1" to "3"), the set value is high. (For example, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/50 to 1 / 44.5) than when the set value is set to "4" to "6"). Therefore, when the setting value is low, the number of fluctuations required to win the next big hit is larger than when the setting value is high, and the big hit is won at long time intervals. This causes the problem of degrading the interest.

However, in the present embodiment, the execution rate of the battle effect in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] is higher than the execution rate of the battle effect in the second period. As a result, even when the set value is set low (for example, the set value is "1" to "3"), when the gaming state is the high accuracy / high base state, in the second period, Since the rate of selecting fluctuation patterns with super reach, which has a longer fluctuation display period than the first period [excluding final fluctuation], is lower, the time interval for winning the jackpot is relatively short (excessively long). It can be prevented from becoming), and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

(Cut-in notice production)
Next, an example of executing a notice effect for notifying the expectation degree controlled by the jackpot game state will be described. In this example, the cut-in notice effect can be executed as the advance notice effect. The cut-in notice effect is a notice effect that announces the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state. As shown in FIGS. 13-12 (2), (3) and (4) described later, when the reach is established in the image display device 5, the push button 31B is placed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The operation promotion display 21TM150 for prompting the player to operate is displayed. In response to the operation of the push button 31B by the player while the operation promotion display 21TM150 is displayed, the cut-in notice effect is executed, and the display mode has a higher priority than the other effects being executed. A cut-in image (cut-in image 21TM200A, cut-in image 21TM200B) in which the characters "chance" are displayed is displayed on the image display device 5.

In this example, as an effect mode of the cut-in notice effect, the character displayed in the cut-in image is the character "chance", and the ratio of selection of execution / non-execution is different depending on the display result (FIG. 13-). (Refer to 10 (B)) An example is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are a plurality of production modes (“chance”, “super heat”, etc.) in which the displayed characters are different, and each production mode is determined according to the display result. May be selected in different proportions.

From the player's point of view, when an image related to another effect (reach effect, etc.) is displayed, suddenly, the display mode (display layer is higher) has a higher priority than the image related to the other effect, etc. Since the cut-in image (which appears to be displayed on the front side of the image related to other effects) is displayed, it is attracted to the screen change when the cut-in notice effect is executed. Further, in the case of a configuration in which a plurality of effect modes can be executed, it is also interested in which of the plurality of effect modes the cut-in notice effect is executed.

(Setting suggestion production)
In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the set value designation command for designating the set set value executes the effect according to the set value specified by the set value designation command. That is, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value.

In this example, the set value is suggested to the player by making the mode of the effect image displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R different according to the specified set value when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Execute the first setting suggestion effect. If the first setting suggestion effect is not executed, the effect image is not displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the first setting suggestion effect is executed, the effect image is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The decorative pattern when the first setting suggestion effect is executed is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed so that the player can see it in front). Will be done. That is, the display priority of the decorative symbol, the effect image, and the background image when the first setting suggestion effect is executed is higher in the order of background image <effect image <decorative symbol.

The mode of the effect image displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R when the first setting suggestion effect is executed includes a white mode, a blue mode, and a red mode. In this example, when the first setting suggestion effect of the white aspect is executed, the effect image emitted in white is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and when the first setting suggestion effect of the blue aspect is executed. , An effect image that emits blue light is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and when the first setting suggestion effect of the red aspect is executed, the effect image that emits red light is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. indicate.

Further, in this example, when the cut-in notice effect is executed, the mode of the cut-in image displayed on the image display device 5 is changed according to the designated set value, so that the player is set to the set value. The second setting suggestion effect that suggests is executed. When the cut-in notice effect is executed and the second setting suggestion effect is not executed, the cut-in image of the normal mode is displayed. The cut-in image in the normal mode is a cut-in image in which the characters "chance" displayed in the cut-in image are displayed in white characters. When the cut-in notice effect is executed and the second setting suggestion effect is executed, the cut-in image in the blue mode or the red mode is displayed. The blue-shaped cut-in image is a cut-in image in which the characters "chance" displayed in the cut-in image are displayed in blue characters, and the red-shaped cut-in image is a cut-in image. This is a cut-in image in which the characters "chance" displayed in the image are displayed in red characters.

(Production decision processing at the start of fluctuation)
When starting the variation display of the special symbol, the CPU 103 includes a display result specification command for specifying the display result, a variation pattern specification command for specifying the variation pattern, and a hold storage number subtraction specification command (first hold storage number subtraction designation). The command or the second hold storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

The effect control CPU 120 is a hold storage number subtraction designation command (first hold) that specifies that the hold storage number has been subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is started. Memory number subtraction specification command or second hold storage number subtraction specification command), display result specification command that specifies the display result (big hit or miss, big hit type when it becomes a big hit), and the variable display period and production contents of the special symbol A variation display of a special symbol is executed based on receiving a set of commands called a variation pattern specification command for specifying (reach, super reach, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU103). In addition, it is possible to specify the variable display period of the special symbol and the content of the effect (reach, super reach, etc.). Further, the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100 when the variation display of the special symbol is completed and the display result is confirmed, and the special symbol (first special symbol) is used. It is possible to specify that the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol) is completed and the display result is derived.

FIG. 13-9 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation. In this variation start effect determination process, the presence / absence and execution mode of each of the first setting suggestion effect, the cut-in notice effect, and the second setting suggestion effect are determined. In the following description, the game state is a high probability / high base state (probability change state) and the first period (50 fluctuations or less from the end of the special figure 1 jackpot, 100 fluctuations or less from the end of the special figure 2 jackpot). (Period) may be referred to as "the game state is a high probability / high base state (probability change state) [first period]", and the game state is a high probability / high base state (probability change state) and the second. The state (period) in which the period (51 fluctuations or more from the end of the special figure 1 jackpot, 101 fluctuations or more from the end of the special figure 2 jackpot) is set to "the game state is highly accurate / high base state (probability change state) [second period]. There is a case.

The effect control CPU 120 executes this variation start effect determination process in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-mentioned one set of commands (holding storage number subtraction designation command, display result designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command) accompanying the start of the variation display of the special symbol. , An effect control pattern for executing the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol based on the display result specification command and the variation pattern specification command (control for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect). A collection of data) is set, and an effect to be executed during the variation display of the decorative symbol based on the specified variation pattern is determined by the effect determination process at the start of the variation shown in FIGS. 13-9.

First, the effect control CPU 120 has either (i) a low probability / high base state (time saving state) in the game state, or (ii) a high probability / high base state (probability change state) in the game state [first period. ] Is determined (step S21TM1000). (I) When the gaming state is the low probability / high base state (time saving state), or (ii) when the game state is the high probability / high base state (probability change state) [first period] (step) YES in S21TM1000), and the process proceeds to step S21TM1010 and subsequent steps. On the other hand, when (i) the gaming state is neither the low accuracy / high base state (time saving state) nor (ii) the gaming state is the high accuracy / high base state (probability variation state) [first period] (step S21TM1000). NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM1070 or later.

Here, when the game state is the high probability / high base state (probability change state) [first period], a big hit occurs after the game state is controlled to the high probability / high base state (probability change state). This is the case where the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this example) within the first period until the special figure game is executed. In addition, when the game state is the high accuracy / high base state (probability change state) [second period], after the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / high base state, a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of times without a big hit) ( In this example, it is the case where it is in the second period (51 times or more or 101 times or more in this example) after the special figure game (50 times or 100 times) is executed.

Next, in the effect control CPU 120, (i) the gaming state is the low probability / high base state (time saving state), or (ii) the gaming state is the high probability / high base state (probability change state) [first period. ] (YES in step S21TM1000), the presence / absence of execution of the first setting suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined based on the execution / non-execution determination table of the first setting suggestion effect (see FIG. 13-10 (A)). (Step S21TM1010), and the process proceeds to step S21TM1020.

As shown in FIG. 13-10 (A), in the execution / non-execution determination table of the first setting suggestion effect, the determination for determining the execution / non-execution of the first setting suggestion effect and the effect mode according to the set setting value. A value has been assigned. When the set value is "1" or "2" (that is, when the set value specified by the set value specification command is "1" or "2"), the first setting suggestion effect is produced at a rate of 90%. Decided not to execute, decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect of the white aspect at a rate of 5%, and decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect of the blue aspect at a rate of 3%. It is decided to perform the first setting suggestion effect of the red aspect at a rate of 2%. If the set value is "3" or "4" (that is, if the set value specified by the set value specification command is "3" or "4"), the first setting is made at a rate of 90%. Decided not to execute the suggestion effect, decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect of the white aspect at a rate of 2%, and decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect of the blue aspect at a rate of 5%. Then, it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect of the red aspect at a rate of 3%. When the set value is "5" or "6" (that is, when the set value specified by the set value specification command is "5" or "6"), the first setting is performed at a rate of 90%. Decided not to execute the suggestion effect, decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect of the white aspect at a rate of 2%, and decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect of the blue aspect at a rate of 3%. Then, it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect of the red aspect at a rate of 5%.

As described above, when the set value is "1" or "2", the first setting suggestion effect of the white mode is executed as the effect mode of the first setting suggestion effect when the first setting suggestion effect is executed. The rate of being performed is the highest (5%), the rate of performing the first setting suggestion effect of the blue aspect is the next highest (3%), and the rate of executing the first setting suggestion effect of the red aspect is the lowest (5%). 2%). Further, when the set value is "3" or "4", the first setting suggestion effect of the blue mode is executed as the effect mode of the first setting suggestion effect when the first setting suggestion effect is executed. The ratio is the highest (5%), the ratio of the first setting suggestion effect of the red aspect is executed is the next highest (3%), and the ratio of the first setting suggestion effect of the white aspect is executed the lowest (2%). ). Further, when the set value is "5" or "6", the first setting suggestion effect of the red mode is executed as the effect mode of the first setting suggestion effect when the first setting suggestion effect is executed. The ratio is the highest (5%), the ratio of the first setting suggestion effect in the blue aspect is executed is the next highest (3%), and the ratio of the first setting suggestion effect in the white aspect is executed the lowest (2%). ).

That is, the rate at which the first setting suggestion effect is executed is the same rate (10% in this example) regardless of the set value, and there is no setting difference, but the first setting of each effect mode. Regarding the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed, when the setting is low (setting value is "1" or "2"), the rate at which the first setting suggestion effect in the white mode is selected is high, and when the setting value is intermediate (the setting value is set). At "3" or "4"), the ratio of the blue mode first setting suggestion effect is high, and at the time of high setting (setting value is "5" or "6"), the red mode first setting suggestion is performed. The rate at which the production is executed is high. Therefore, the player becomes interested in the effect mode when the first setting suggestion effect is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the fluctuation pattern is "super reach out" or "super reach jackpot" (step S21TM1020). When the fluctuation pattern is "out of super reach" or "super reach jackpot" (YES in step S21TM1020), the execution / non-execution of the cut-in notice effect is determined by the execution / non-execution determination table of the cut-in notice effect (FIG. 13-10 (FIG. 13-10) B)) is determined (step S21TM1030), and the process proceeds to step S21TM1040. On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern is not "super reach out" or "super reach jackpot" (NO in step S21TM1020), the process ends as it is.

As shown in FIG. 13-10 (B), in the execution / non-execution determination table of the cut-in notice effect, determination values for determining the execution / non-execution of the cut-in notice effect are assigned according to the display result. If the display result is "off" (that is, if the display result specified by the display result specification command is "off"), it is decided not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 80%, and 20 It is decided to execute the cut-in notice production at a rate of%. On the other hand, if the display result is a "big hit" (that is, if the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "big hit"), it is decided not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 40%. However, it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 60%. As described above, when the cut-in notice effect is executed, the ratio of big hits is higher than when the cut-in notice effect is not executed. Therefore, the player is interested in whether or not the cut-in notice effect is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect (step S21TM1040). When it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect (YES in step S21TM1040), the presence / absence of execution of the second setting suggestion effect and the effect mode are set in the execution / non-execution determination table of the second setting suggestion effect (FIG. 13-). 10 (C)) is determined (step S21TM1050), and the process ends as it is. If it is decided not to execute the cut-in notice effect (NO in step S21TM1040), the process ends as it is.

As shown in FIG. 13-10 (C), in the execution / non-execution determination table of the second setting suggestion effect, the determination for determining the execution / non-execution and the effect mode of the second setting suggestion effect according to the set setting value. A value has been assigned. When the set value is "1", "3", or "5" (that is, when the set value specified by the set value specification command is "1", "3", or "5"), It was decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 30%, it was decided to execute the second setting suggestion effect of the blue aspect at a rate of 50%, and the second setting of the red aspect was performed at a rate of 20%. Decide to perform a suggestive effect. Also, when the set value is "2", "4", or "6" (that is, when the set value specified by the set value specification command is "2", "4", or "6"). Decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 30%, decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect of the blue aspect at a rate of 20%, and decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 50%. 1 Decide to execute the setting suggestion effect.

As described above, when the set value is "1", "3", or "5", the second setting suggestion effect is produced in the blue aspect with respect to the effect mode of the second setting suggestion effect when the second setting suggestion effect is executed. The rate at which the setting suggestion effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the second setting suggestion effect in the red aspect is executed. Further, when the set value is "2", "4", or "6", the second setting suggestion of the red aspect is related to the effect mode of the second setting suggestion effect when the second setting suggestion effect is executed. The rate at which the effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the second setting suggestion effect in the blue aspect is executed. That is, the rate at which the second setting suggestion effect is executed is the same rate (30% in this example) regardless of the set value, and there is no setting difference, but the second setting of each effect mode. Regarding the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed, when an odd number is set (the set value is "1", "3", or "5"), the rate at which the second setting suggestion effect in the blue mode is selected is the second in the red mode. 2 The rate at which the second setting suggestion effect in the blue mode is executed is red, which is higher than the rate at which the setting suggestion effect is selected. The second setting suggestion effect of the aspect is higher than the selected ratio. Therefore, the player becomes interested in the effect mode when the second setting suggestion effect is executed.

Further, when (i) the gaming state is neither the low accuracy / high base state (time saving state) nor (ii) the gaming state is neither the high accuracy / high base state (probability variation state) [first period] (step S21TM1000). NO), (iii) It is determined whether the gaming state is the high accuracy / high base state [second period] (step S21TM1060). (Iii) If the gaming state is the high accuracy / high base state [second period] (YES in step S21TM1060), the process proceeds to step S21TM1070. (Iii) If the gaming state is not the high accuracy / high base state [second period] (NO in step S21TM1060), the process ends as it is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the display result of the variation display is a "big hit" (step S21TM1070). When the display result of the variation display is "big hit" (YES in step S21TM1070), the execution presence / absence of the first setting suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined by the execution / non-execution determination table of the first setting suggestion effect (FIG. 13-10 (FIG. 13-10). It is determined based on (see A)) (step S21TM1080), and the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the display result of the variable display is not "big hit" (NO in step S21TM1070), the process ends as it is.

As shown in FIG. 13-9, when the gaming state is the high accuracy / high base state [first period] (YES in step S21TM1000), it is determined whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed (YES). Step S21TM1020). That is, when the gaming state is the high accuracy / high base state [first period], whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined for each fluctuation display regardless of the fluctuation display result. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the high accuracy / high base state [second period] (YES in step S21TM1060), only when the variation display result is "big hit" (YES in step S21TM1070), the first Whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect is determined (step S21TM1020). That is, when the game state is the high accuracy / high base state [second period], it is determined whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed only in the final change of the second period when the variation display result is "big hit". ing.

Further, in the present embodiment, regardless of the set value, the rate at which the first setting suggestion effect is executed is 10% (see FIG. 13-10 (A)). As described above, when the game state is the high accuracy / high base state [first period], whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined for each fluctuation display regardless of the fluctuation display result. The execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect of each variation display in the first period is 10%. On the other hand, as described above, when the gaming state is the high accuracy / high base state [second period], whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed is determined only in the final variation of the second period. , In the second period, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect up to the fluctuation display one time before the final fluctuation where the fluctuation display result becomes "big hit" is 0%, and the final fluctuation display result becomes "big hit". The execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect of the fluctuation is 10%.

For example, when the variation display result of the second special symbol is "probability variation jackpot", the game state shifts to the high probability / high base state (probability variation state) after the end of the jackpot game, and then 100 special figures. If the jackpot game state is not reached until the game is executed, the first period is 100 times, and in this first period (100 rotations), whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed for each variation display. Since the determination is performed, the probability that the first setting suggestion effect is executed is [{1- (90/100) ^ 100} × 100 = 99.9%]. On the other hand, when the variable display result of the second special symbol is "probability variation jackpot", in the second period (101 times or later) after 100 special symbol games are executed without being in the jackpot game state. , Since it is determined whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed only in the final fluctuation of the second period when the display result is "big hit", which rotation speed is the final fluctuation of the second period. The probability that the first setting suggestion effect is executed is [(10/100) × 100 = 10%]. In this way, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect in the first period is higher than the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect in the second period, so that the game state is a high probability / high base state (probability change state). ) Can improve the interest of the game during the period controlled by.

As shown in FIG. 13-9, when the gaming state is the high accuracy / high base state [first period] (YES in step S21TM1000), it is determined in step S21TM1010 whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect. In step S21TM1050, it is determined whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13-9, when the gaming state is the high accuracy / high base state [second period] (YES in step S21TM1060), whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed in step S21TM1080. Has been decided. In this way, in the first period, two types of setting suggestion effects, the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect, are executed, and in the second period, only one type of setting suggestion effect is executed. Is executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the period when the game state is controlled to the high probability / high base state (probability change state).

Further, when the fluctuation display result is "out of alignment", as shown in FIG. 13-6 (A1), "out of super reach" is selected as the fluctuation pattern in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation]. Of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "out of super reach", so [{(997-901 + 1) / 997} x 100 = 10%. ]. On the other hand, when the fluctuation display result is "off", as shown in FIG. 13-6 (C1), the ratio of selecting "super reach out" as the fluctuation pattern in the second period is MR3. Since none of the judgment values in the range of judgment values 1 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "out of super reach", it is [(0/997) × 100 = 0%]. That is, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern with super reach (“super reach loss”) in the first period is higher than the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern with super reach (“super reach loss”) in the second period. ..

Further, when the fluctuation display result is "big hit", as shown in FIG. 13-6 (A2), "super reach jackpot" is selected as the fluctuation pattern in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation]. As for the ratio, 51 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super reach jackpot", so [{(997-51 + 1) / 997} x 100 = 95%. ]. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the variable display result is "big hit" in the second period, the ratio of selecting "super reach big hit" as the fluctuation pattern is determined by MR3. Since none of the determination values in the value range 1 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super reach jackpot", it is [(0/997) × 100 = 0%]. That is, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern with super reach (“super reach jackpot”) in the first period is higher than the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern with super reach (“super reach jackpot”) in the second period. ..

Further, as described above, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect in the first period is higher than the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect in the second period. In this way, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern with super reach (“super reach loss”, “super reach jackpot”) is different between the first period and the second period, and the first period and the second period are the second. Since the execution rate of the 1 setting suggestion effect is different, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the period when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / high base state (probability change state).

(Specific example of the first setting suggestion effect)
Next, a specific example of the first setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-11 (A1) to (A3) and (B1) to (B3). 13-11 (A1) to 13-11 (A3) are explanatory views showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the first setting suggestion effect of the white aspect is executed in the first period. 13-11 (B1) to 13-11 (B3) are explanatory views showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the first setting suggestion effect of the blue aspect is executed in the second period.

(1st setting suggestion production of the 1st period)
As shown in FIG. 13-11 (A1), when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / high base state (probability variation state) [first period], the effect mode is controlled to the chance time by the effect control CPU 120. Has been done. When the production mode is the chance time, the "evening image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the characters "chance time" are displayed at the upper part of the screen. When the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 determines the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. In the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, the variation display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed. In the first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, the variation display result of the first special symbol executed last time (most recently executed) was "missing". The combination of the first small symbols (“417” in this example) indicating that the variation display result is “out of place” is continuously stopped and displayed.

Since the first reserved storage number is 0 in the effect control CPU 120, "0" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 4. Therefore, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 21TM031 displays the active display 21TM030 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed, and the second hold display area 21TM021 displays four second hold displays 21TM020.

As shown in FIG. 13-11 (A2), at the timing when the variation display of the decorative symbol ends, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first setting suggestion effect of the white aspect, and the decorative symbol "is displayed in the symbol display area 5L. 2 ”, the decorative symbol“ 4 ”in the symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbol“ 5 ”in the symbol display area 5R are stopped and displayed, and the effect images that emit white light in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, respectively. 21TM100A is displayed. The decorative pattern when the first setting suggestion effect is executed is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed so that the player can see it in front). To do. That is, the display priority of the decorative symbol, the effect image, and the background image when the first setting suggestion effect is executed is higher in the order of background image <effect image <decorative symbol. At this time, in response to the continuous execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 has the second small symbol in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5. The variable display of the design is continued.

As shown in FIG. 13-11 (A3), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 has the effect image 21TM100A displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Is deleted to end the first setting suggestion effect, and the decorative symbol "2" is displayed in the symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol "4" is displayed in the symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbol "5" is displayed in the symbol display area 5R. In addition to stopping the confirmation, the second small symbol "2" is in the second small symbol display area 5l2, the second small symbol "4" is in the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol is in the second small symbol display area 5r2. The symbol "5" is fixedly stopped.

(1st setting suggestion production in the 2nd period)
As shown in FIG. 13-11 (B1), when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / high base state (probability variation state) [second period], the effect mode is set to "FEVERZONE" by the effect control CPU 120. It is controlled. When the effect mode is "FEVERZONE", the "typhoon image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the characters "FEVERZONE" are displayed in the center of the screen. When the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 determines the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. In the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, the variation display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed. In the first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, the variation display result of the first special symbol executed last time (most recently executed) was "missing". The combination of the first small symbols (“417” in this example) indicating that the variation display result is “out of place” is continuously stopped and displayed.

Since the first reserved storage number is 0 in the effect control CPU 120, "0" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 4. Therefore, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 21TM031 displays the active display 21TM030 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed, and the second hold display area 21TM021 displays four second hold displays 21TM020.

As shown in FIG. 13-11 (B2), the effect control CPU 120 suggests the first setting in the blue mode in response to the display result becoming a "big hit" at the timing when the variation display of the decorative symbol ends. The effect is executed, and the decorative symbol "7" is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol "7" is displayed in the symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbol "7" is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 5R, and the symbol display area 5L is displayed. The effect image 21TM100B that emits blue light is displayed on 5C and 5R, respectively. The decorative pattern when the first setting suggestion effect is executed is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed so that the player can see it in front). To do. That is, the display priority of the decorative symbol, the effect image, and the background image when the first setting suggestion effect is executed is higher in the order of background image <effect image <decorative symbol. At this time, in response to the continuous execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 has the second small symbol in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5. The variable display of the design is continued.

As shown in FIG. 13-11 (B3), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 has the effect image 21TM100B displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Is deleted to end the first setting suggestion effect, and the decorative symbol "7" is displayed in the symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol "7" is displayed in the symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbol "7" is displayed in the symbol display area 5R. In addition to stopping the confirmation, the second small symbol "7" is in the second small symbol display area 5l2, the second small symbol "7" is in the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol is in the second small symbol display area 5r2. The symbol "7" is fixedly stopped.

(Specific example of the second setting suggestion effect)
Next, a specific example of the second setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-12 (1) to (4). 13-12 (1), (2), and (3) show an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the cut-in notice effect is executed and the second setting suggestion effect is not executed. It is an explanatory view, and FIGS. 13-12 (1), (2), and (4) are displayed on the image display device 5 when the cut-in notice effect is executed and the second setting suggestion effect is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production image.

As shown in FIG. 13-12 (1), when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / high base state (probability variation state) [first period], the effect mode is controlled to the chance time by the effect control CPU 120. Has been done. When the production mode is the chance time, the "evening image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the characters "chance time" are displayed at the upper part of the screen. When the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 determines the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. In the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, the variation display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed. In the first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, the variation display result of the first special symbol that was executed last time (most recently executed) was "missing". The combination of the first small symbols (“417” in this example) indicating that the variation display result is “out of place” is continuously stopped and displayed.

Since the first reserved storage number is 0 in the effect control CPU 120, "0" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 4. Therefore, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 21TM031 displays the active display 21TM030 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed, and the second hold display area 21TM021 displays four second hold displays 21TM020.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (2), the effect control CPU 120 sets "5" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established. By stopping and displaying the decorative symbol of, the reach state is set, and the characters "reach !!" are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5. At this time, in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2, the variable display of the second small symbol is continued. That is, also in the first small symbol display area 5l1 corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the first small symbol display area 5r1 corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The first small symbol is continuously displayed in a variable manner without being stopped and displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the operation promotion display 21TM150 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B in the center of the screen while continuing the reach state. The operation promotion display 21TM150 includes an image imitating the push button 31B and a downward arrow displayed above the image imitating the push button 31B, and is a display prompting the user to press the push button 31B. It has become. Since the operation promotion display 21TM150 is an image having a higher display priority than the background image and the decorative symbol (the display layer is higher), it is displayed in front of the background image and the decorative symbol by the player. appear.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in notice effect in response to the operation of the push button 31B by the player while the operation promotion display 21TM150 is displayed. Here, in the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation, if it is determined that the cut-in notice effect is executed and the second setting suggestion effect is not executed, the cut-in notice effect is executed but the second setting suggestion effect is executed. Does not run. On the other hand, if it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect and the second setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect is executed together with the cut-in notice effect.

In the example shown in FIG. 13-12 (3), the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in notice effect in response to the operation of the push button 31B by the player while the operation promotion display 21TM150 is displayed. However, the second setting suggestion effect is not executed. In this example, the cut-in image 21TM200A (cut-in image in which the white character "chance" is displayed) in the normal mode is displayed on the image display device 5 in a display mode having a higher priority than other effects being executed. ing.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 13-12 (4), the effect control CPU 120 has a cut-in notice effect in response to the player operating the push button 31B while the operation promotion display 21TM150 is displayed. Is executed, and the second setting suggestion effect is executed. In this example, the cut-in image 21TM200B (cut-in image in which the red character "chance" is displayed) in the red mode is displayed on the image display device 5 in a display mode having a higher priority than other effects being executed. ing.

(Specific example of continuous challenge production)
Next, a specific example of the continuous challenge effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-13 (1) to (7). 13-13 (1) and (2) to (4) are explanatory views showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the continuous challenge effect of the failure mode is executed. 13-13 (1) and (5) to (7) are explanatory views showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the continuous challenge effect of the success mode is executed.

As shown in FIG. 13-13 (1), the final fluctuation of the first period (in this example, the 50th special figure game after the fluctuation display result of the first special symbol becomes a "big hit", or the fifth 2 When the 100th special figure game) after the variable display result of the special symbol becomes a "big hit" is being executed, the continuous challenge effect is executed by the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 displays the characters "continuation challenge" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 and the operation promotion display 21TM150 for urging the player to operate the push button 31B, and the character is displayed in the lower right part of the screen. 21TM300 is displayed. The operation promotion display 21TM150 includes an image imitating the push button 31B and a downward arrow displayed above the image imitating the push button 31B, and is a display prompting the user to press the push button 31B. It has become.

When the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 determines the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2. In the 1st small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1, 5r1, the variation display result of the 1st special symbol that was executed last time (most recently executed) was "missing". Correspondingly, the combination of decorative symbols (“417” in this example) indicating that the variable display result is “off” is continuously stopped and displayed.

Since the first reserved storage number is 0 in the effect control CPU 120, "0" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 4. Therefore, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5. In addition, during the period when the continuous challenge effect is being executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is not executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the hold display area (first hold display) is not executed. The hold display (first hold display 21TM010, second hold display 21TM020) is not displayed in the area 21TM011 and the second hold display area 21TM021). Further, the square object showing the active display area 21TM031 and the active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed are not displayed.

In FIGS. 13-13 (2) to (4), the currently controlled gaming state is low accuracy / according to the operation of the push button 31B by the player when the operation promotion display 21TM150 is displayed. Based on the high base state (time saving state), the continuous challenge effect of the failure mode is executed.

When the currently controlled gaming state is the low accuracy / high base state (time saving state), the operation promotion display 21TM150 is displayed on the effect control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 13-13 (2). In response to the operation of the push button 31B by the player while the image is being displayed, the continuous challenge effect of the failure mode is executed, and the characters "failure" and the object "?" Are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Is displayed, and the character 21TM300A is displayed at the lower right of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (3), at the timing when the CPU 103 finishes the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 shows that the display result is "off". The combination of small symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) (“245” in this example) is fixedly stopped in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (4), when the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / low base state (normal state), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the normal mode. When the effect mode is the normal mode, the "daytime image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. The effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the fact that the variation display result of the first special symbol that was executed last time (most recently executed) was "missing" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Then, the combination of decorative symbols (“417” in this example) indicating that the variable display result is “off” is stopped and displayed, and the previous execution was performed in the first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 ( Corresponding to the fact that the variation display result of the first special symbol (which was executed most recently) was "missing", the combination of the first small symbols indicating that the variation display result is "missing" (in this example, "" 417 ") is continuously stopped and displayed, and in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2, the variation display result of the second special symbol that was executed last time (most recently executed) is" off ". Corresponding to the fact, the combination of the second small symbols (“245” in this example) indicating that the variable display result is “out of place” is continuously stopped and displayed.

Since the first reserved storage number is 0 in the effect control CPU 120, "0" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 0. Therefore, "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, since there is no variable display currently being executed in the active display area 21TM031, the active display is not displayed.

On the other hand, in FIGS. 13-13 (5) to (7), the currently controlled gaming state is high in response to the operation of the push button 31B by the player when the operation promotion display 21TM150 is displayed. Based on the probability / high base state (probability change state), the continuous challenge production of the success mode is executed.

When the currently controlled gaming state is a high probability / high base state (probability change state), the operation promotion display 21TM150 is displayed on the effect control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 13-13 (5). In response to the operation of the push button 31B by the player while the image is being displayed, the continuous challenge effect of the success mode is executed, and the characters "success" and the object "○" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Is displayed, and the character 21TM300B is displayed at the lower right of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (6), at the timing when the CPU 103 finishes the variation display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 shows that the display result is "off". The combination of small symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) (“245” in this example) is fixedly stopped in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (7), when the gaming state is continuously controlled to the high accuracy / high base state (probability variation state), the effect mode is set to "FEVERZONE" by the effect control CPU 120. Be controlled. When the effect mode is "FEVERZONE", the "typhoon image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the characters "FEVERZONE" are displayed in the center of the screen. The effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the fact that the variation display result of the second special symbol (most recently executed) executed last time was "missing" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Then, the combination of decorative symbols (“245” in this example) indicating that the variable display result is “off” was fixedly stopped, and was executed last time in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 ( Corresponding to the fact that the variation display result of the second special symbol (which was executed most recently) was "missing", the combination of the second small symbols indicating that the variation display result is "missing" (in this example, "" 245 ") is continuously stopped and displayed, and in the first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1, 5r1, the variation display result of the first special symbol that was executed last time (most recently executed) is" off ". Corresponding to the fact, the combination of the first small symbols (“417” in this example) indicating that the variable display result is “out of place” is continuously stopped and displayed. Further, since the first reserved storage number is 0 in the effect control CPU 120, "0" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 0. Therefore, "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 13-13, the final fluctuation of the first period (in this example, the 50th special figure game after the change display result of the first special symbol becomes a "big hit", or the second special In the 100th special figure game after the change display result of the symbol becomes a "big hit", the effect control CPU 120 shifts from the first period to the second period (the high base state continues). A continuous challenge production is being executed as a suggestion production. According to such a configuration, the player continues regardless of whether the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / high base state (time saving state) or the high accuracy / high base state (probability variation state). You can play with the expectation of shifting to the second period until the final change in the first period when the challenge effect is executed.

(Other forms)
In a gaming machine whose set value can be changed as described above, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed in parallel at the same time. Further, the gaming machine whose set value can be changed may be in a gaming state different from the big hit gaming state and can be controlled to a small hit gaming state which is advantageous for the player. For example, in the small hit game state, the game ball can be won in a special variable winning ball device different from either the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning opening and the special variable winning ball device 7 forming the large winning opening. Become. Further, the gaming machine whose set value can be changed may be one that can be controlled to a state in which the frequency of small hits is increased (for example, a KT state described later).

For example, the special variable winning ball device is provided on the downstream side of the variable winning ball device in the right game area. When the variable winning ball device is in the open state, the frequency (ratio) of the game ball flowing into the special variable winning ball device on the downstream side which is in the open state becomes extremely low, and when the variable winning ball device is in the closed state, it is opened. Control may be performed to increase the frequency (ratio) of the game balls flowing into the special variable winning ball device on the downstream side in the state. According to such a configuration, in the high base state where the variable winning ball device is opened for a long time (or the opening frequency is high), the special variable winning ball device is in the open state even if the player hits right. The frequency (ratio) of inflow of game balls is low, but in the low base state where the variable winning ball device is opened for a short period (or the opening frequency is low), it is in the open state when right-handed. The frequency (ratio) of game balls flowing into the variable winning ball device increases.

For example, it is assumed that there are a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, it is assumed that there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. Then, the gaming state is controlled to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state), and a low probability state and a first KT state (low probability / first KT state: time saving state). When controlled, when controlled in the high probability state and the first KT state (high probability / first KT state; probability variation state), and when controlled in the high probability state and the second KT state (high probability / second KT state: small hit RUSH state). ) May be controlled.

In the first KT state of the KT state, small hits are likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device on the upstream side is extremely long, and even if a small hit occurs, the downstream side There are very few cases where a game ball wins a prize in the special variable winning ball device (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and is controlled to a high base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device becomes long. Further, in the second KT state of the KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is likely to win the special variable winning ball device on the downstream side. Specifically, in the second KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and is controlled to a low base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device is shortened.

In addition, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, the probability that the variable winning ball device will be in the open state is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. The KT state is changed because the ratio of small hits is low when the first special symbol changes, while the ratio of small hits is high when the second special symbol changes. , The game state is more likely to be a small hit than the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player.

In this way, as the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the variable winning ball device is controlled to a state in which small hits are likely to occur and a low base state. By shortening the opening time of, it becomes easier for the game ball to win the special variable winning ball device. According to such a configuration, as a high accuracy state advantageous for the player, it is possible to control a high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) different from the high accuracy / high base state (probability variation state), and the high accuracy. It is possible to improve the interest of the game in the state.

(Other variants)
(1) <Reverse breakthrough type small hit RUSH machine>
In the above embodiment, once the high probability / high base state (probability change state) is controlled after the end of the big hit game, the probability change state continues until the next big hit occurs. Regardless of the form, the game state changes from high accuracy / high base state to high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) at the timing when a predetermined period elapses after the end of the big hit game and before the next big hit occurs. It may change.

For example, when the game shifts to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state) after the end of the big hit game, the high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state) is reached until the next big hit occurs or the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed. ) Is maintained. Then, when the 100th variation display is completed without the next big hit, the 101st variation display shifts to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state), and the next big hit occurs. High accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is maintained until. On the other hand, when the game shifts to the low accuracy / first KT state (time saving state) after the end of the big hit game, the low accuracy / first KT state (time saving state) is reached until the next big hit occurs or the 100-time fluctuation display is completed. ) Is maintained, but from the 101st fluctuation display, it is assumed that the state shifts to the low accuracy / non-KT state (normal state). For the player, whether or not the 100th fluctuation display can be exceeded without falling into the normal state has a great influence on the subsequent advantage, so a game machine adopting such a configuration is used. It is called a reverse breakthrough type small hit RUSH machine.

In such a reverse breakthrough type small hit RUSH machine, the 100th change after the end of the big hit game (after being controlled to high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state) or low accuracy / first KT state (time reduction state)). There is a first period until the display ends and a second period from the 101st variation display to the occurrence of the next big hit. In this first period, the rate at which the variation pattern of the variation display period (for example, 10 seconds or more) longer than the predetermined variation display period (for example, 5 seconds) is selected is higher than that of the second period, and in the second period, it is predetermined. It is assumed that the rate at which the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display period (for example, 3 seconds) shorter than the fluctuation display period (for example, 5 seconds) is selected is higher than that of the first period.

In the first period of this example, the background image is common to any game state (high probability / first KT state (probability change state) or low probability / first KT state (time reduction state)) controlled after the end of the jackpot game. Since the "evening image" of is displayed, it is difficult for the player to grasp which gaming state is controlled in the first period. Here, after the end of the big hit game, the state shifts to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state), and if the next big hit does not occur in the 100th variation display, the success mode described above is continued in the 100th variation display. The challenge effect is executed, and the state shifts from the 101st variation display to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state). In addition, after the end of the big hit game, the state shifts to the low accuracy / first KT state (time saving state), and if the next big hit does not occur in the 100th variation display, the continuation challenge of the failure mode described above in the 100th variation display. The effect is executed, and the state shifts from the 101st variation display to the low accuracy / non-KT state (normal state).

In this way, when the gaming state is the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state), the gaming state is highly accurate in response to the execution of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times before the next big hit occurs. Since it is possible to shift to the / second KT state (small hit RUSH state), it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state). Further, by executing the continuous challenge effect at the time of the predetermined variation display, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the KT state (low accuracy / first KT state, high accuracy / first KT state).

Further, for example, when the state shifts to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state) after the end of the big hit game, the high accuracy / first KT is performed until the next big hit occurs or the number of small hits occurs 50 times. The state (probability change state) may be maintained. Then, when the number of small hits is 50 without the next big hit, the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH) is displayed from the fluctuation display after the 50th small hit game is completed. The state) may be entered and the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) may be maintained until the next big hit occurs. On the other hand, when the state shifts to the low probability / first KT state (time saving state) after the end of the big hit game, the low probability / first KT state (low probability / first KT state) until the next big hit occurs or the number of small hits occurs 50 times. The time saving state) is maintained, but after the 50th small hit game is completed, it is assumed that the state shifts to the low probability / non-KT state (normal state).

That is, the first period from the end of the big hit game to the occurrence of the 50th small hit (after being controlled to the high probability / first KT state (probability change state) or the low probability / first KT state) and the 50th time. There is a second period from the end of the small hit game to the occurrence of the next big hit. In the first period of this example, the background image is common to any game state (high probability / first KT state (probability change state) or low probability / first KT state (time reduction state)) controlled after the end of the jackpot game. Since the "evening image" of is displayed, it is difficult for the player to grasp which gaming state is controlled in the first period. Here, if the state shifts to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state) after the end of the big hit game and the next big hit does not occur in the variable display until the number of small hits occurs is 50 times, the small hit The continuous challenge effect of the success mode described above is executed in the variation display in which the number of occurrences is 50, and the high accuracy / second KT state (small) from the next and subsequent variation displays in the variation display in which the number of small hits is 50. It shifts to the hit RUSH state). In addition, if the next big hit does not occur in the variable display until the number of small hits occurs 50 times after shifting to the low accuracy / first KT state (time saving state) after the big hit game ends, a small hit occurs. In the variable display where the number of times is 50, the continuous challenge effect of the failure mode described above is executed, and from the next and subsequent variable display of the variable display where the number of small hits occurs is 50 times, the low accuracy / non-KT state (normal state) ).

In this way, when the game state is the high probability / first KT state (probability change state), the game state is changed in response to the fact that the number of small hits has reached a predetermined number before the next big hit occurs. Since it is possible to shift to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state), it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state). Further, by executing the continuous challenge effect at the time of the predetermined variation display, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the KT state (low accuracy / first KT state, high accuracy / first KT state).

(2) <Type 1 / Type 2 mixer>
In a type of gaming machine called a first-class type, a jackpot determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition, and if a jackpot is won, a jackpot game is executed. Further, in a type of gaming machine called a second type (blade), an opening / closing winning device having a blade accessory that can be opened / closed is provided, and a game ball wins a prize inside the opening / closing winning device, and the opening / closing winning device When a prize is won in a specific area (V winning opening) provided inside the player, a big hit game is executed. There is also a type of gaming machine called a type 2 mixer that combines a type 1 type and a type 2 type (blade).

For example, in a type 1 and type 2 mixer, a jackpot determination is made based on the establishment of the first starting condition (for example, a game ball wins in the first starting winning opening), and if the jackpot is won, the first special The variable display result of the symbol becomes the jackpot symbol, and the jackpot game is executed. In addition, a jackpot determination is made based on the establishment of the second starting condition (for example, the game ball has passed through the second starting region (gate)), and when the jackpot is won, the variation display result of the second special symbol is obtained. Becomes a big hit symbol and a big hit game is executed. Further, when a small hit is won, a small hit game in which the blade accessory provided in the opening / closing winning device is opened / closed is executed, and then the game ball wins a prize inside the opening / closing winning device while the feather accessory is open. , When a prize is won in a specific area (V winning opening) provided inside the opening / closing winning device, a big hit game is executed.

In such a type-two type mixer, the player makes a game ball win in the first start winning opening by hitting the left in the low base state, and is high after the big hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol. As the base state is controlled, the game is performed so that the game ball passes through the second starting area by switching to right-handed. For example, this high base state (right-handed period) is continued until the variation display of the second special symbol a predetermined number of times (for example, 6 times) is completed, and a big hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol a predetermined number of times. Otherwise, the gaming state will shift to a low base state.

Here, in the production based on the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol of the predetermined number of times (for example, the sixth time), the variation display result of the second special symbol of the predetermined number of times (for example, the sixth time) and the said The variation display result of the second special symbol of each of the second reserved memories (for example, each of the three second reserved memories) existing at the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol of the predetermined number of times is started is notified. You may do so. That is, when the second special symbol variation display of the predetermined number of times (for example, the sixth time) in the high base state is started and the second reserved storage number is 3, the second special of the predetermined number of times is started. It is assumed that the variation display result of the second special symbol for a total of four times is notified by the effect corresponding to the variation display of the symbol. Then, after the variation display of the second special symbol of the predetermined number of times (for example, the sixth time) is completed, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed three times, and these second special symbols are executed. With respect to the fluctuation display of, it is assumed that a fluctuation pattern having an extremely short fluctuation display period (for example, 1 second) is specified. That is, to the player, it seems as if the variation display for four times was executed by the effect corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol at the predetermined number of times (for example, the sixth time).

In the type 1 and type 2 mixer of this example, after the game state shifts to the high base state (time saving state), until the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (6 times) without a big hit, or the said The period until a big hit occurs before a predetermined number of special figure games are executed corresponds to the first period. In addition, after the game state shifts to the high base state (time saving state), the period after the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (6 times) without a big hit, that is, the special figure of the predetermined number of times. The period during which the special figure game for the number of second reserved memories at the start of the game is executed corresponds to the second period.

In such a type-and-two mixer, in the first period, the rate at which a variation pattern having a variation display period (for example, 10 seconds or more) longer than a predetermined variation display period (for example, 5 seconds) is selected is the second period. In the second period, the rate at which the variation pattern having the variation display period (for example, 1 second) shorter than the predetermined variation display period (for example, 5 seconds) is selected is higher than that in the first period.

(3) <Probability change fall machine>
As a pachinko gaming machine, in a state where the gaming state is controlled to a high probability state, a probability change fall determination is executed as to whether or not to shift the game state to a low probability state, and the game state is based on the result of the probability change fall determination. There is a pachinko machine that shifts to a low-accuracy state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 that executes such a probability change fall determination is referred to as a probability change fall machine.

For example, in a probabilistic fall machine, when a "probability change jackpot" occurs, it is controlled to a high probability / high base state (probability change state) after the end of the big hit game state, and a variation display starts in the high probability / high base state (probability change state). Probability change fall determination is executed when it is done. Here, (i) fluctuations up to the 100th time before the 100th fluctuation display is started without the display result of the fluctuation display executed in the high accuracy / high base state (probability change state) becoming a "big hit". If any of the probabilistic fall judgments executed in response to the display determines that there is a probable change fall, the fluctuation display corresponding to the probable change fall judgment (any of the first to 100th fluctuation displays) ) Is controlled from the start to the low accuracy / high base state (time saving state), and is maintained in the low accuracy / high base state (time saving state) until the end of the 100th fluctuation display, and then the low accuracy / low base state (time saving state). It is controlled to the normal state). Here, the period from when the big hit game state is controlled to the high accuracy / high base state (probability change state) until the 100th variation display is executed without falling to the normal state and without the occurrence of the big hit. Corresponds to the first period.

On the other hand, (ii) If it is not determined that "there is a probability change fall" in any of the probability change fall judgments executed in response to the fluctuation display up to the 100th time, the probability is high until at least the 100th change display is completed. / When the probability change fall judgment that is maintained in the high base state (probability change state) and executed in response to the 101st and subsequent fluctuation displays determines that there is a probability change fall judgment, the fluctuation display corresponding to the probability change fall judgment. It is controlled to a low accuracy / low base state (normal state) from the start of. Here, the period from the end of the 100th variation display in the high accuracy / high base state (probability change state) to the fall to the normal state or the occurrence of the next big hit corresponds to the second period.

In such a probabilistic fall machine, in the first period, the ratio of selecting a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation display period (for example, 10 seconds or more) longer than a predetermined fluctuation display period (for example, 5 seconds) is higher than that in the second period. In the second period, the rate at which a variation pattern having a variation display period (for example, 3 seconds) shorter than a predetermined variation display period (for example, 5 seconds) is selected is higher than that in the first period.

(4) In the above embodiment, in the first period, the rate at which a variation pattern having a variation display period (for example, 10 seconds or more) longer than a predetermined variation display period (for example, 5 seconds) is selected is higher than that of the second period. In the second period, a variation pattern having a variation display period (for example, 1 second) shorter than a predetermined variation display period (for example, 5 seconds) is selected at a higher rate than in the first period. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the period other than the variable display period may be different between the first period and the second period. For example, in the first period, the symbol confirmation stop period (for example, 1.0 second) is longer than the predetermined period (for example, 0.7 seconds), and in the second period, it is longer than the predetermined period (for example, 0.7 seconds). It may be a short symbol confirmation stop period (for example, 0.5 seconds).

(5) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-6 (A), in the first period, the ratio of “non-reach off (high-speed fluctuation)” selected as the fluctuation pattern is 0%. As shown, not limited to such a form, "non-reach loss (high-speed fluctuation)" may be selected as the fluctuation pattern even in the first period.

For example, when a jackpot of the type "2R probability variation jackpot [next time]" is provided in addition to the jackpot type shown in the present embodiment (see FIG. 13-3), there is no normal jackpot of 2R, so a round of jackpot games. When the number is 2 rounds, the player can recognize that the jackpot type is "2R probability variation jackpot [next time]" and is controlled to the high accuracy / high base state (probability variation state) after the jackpot game is completed. Become. Temporarily, in the first period of transition after the end of this "2R probability variation jackpot [next time]", a variation pattern having a variation display period (for example, 10 seconds or more) longer than a predetermined variation display period (for example, 5 seconds) is selected. If the ratio is made higher than the second period, the game state is a high probability state (probability change state), and the variable display is performed even though the player recognizes that the state will continue until the next big hit. The long period reduces the interest. Therefore, a specific jackpot type such as "2R probability variation jackpot [next time]", for example, a type in which it is confirmed that the probability variation state will continue until the next jackpot when the jackpot game ends without the same number of normal jackpots. In the first period after the end of the big hit game, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table similar to the second period. As a result, it is possible to increase the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern as "non-reach out of reach (high-speed fluctuation)", shorten the fluctuation time in the first period, and prevent a decrease in interest.

(6) In the above embodiment, an example in which the selection ratio of the variable display period in the first period and the selection ratio of the variable display period in the second period are different is shown, but further, the advance notice effect in the first period is shown. The execution rate may be different from the execution rate of the advance notice effect in the second period.

For example, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display (hold display, active display) based on the determination result at the start winning or the determination result at the start of fluctuation. Here, the execution rate of the change effect in the first period and the execution rate of the change effect in the second period may be different. Since the change effect can be executed in both the first period and the second period, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the high probability / high base state (probability change state). Further, in the first period, since the variable display period is long, the change effect requiring a predetermined period can be executed at a high rate, and in the second period, the variable display period is short, so that the execution rate of the change effect may be low. As a result, in the first period, the period required until the next big hit occurs becomes longer, so that it is possible to suppress excessively high gambling, realize sound playability, and change the effect. By executing at a high rate, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to a long variable display period. In addition, in the second period, by lowering the execution rate of the change effect than in the first period, the change effect is executed at a high rate even though the big hit has not occurred for a long period of time, which reduces the interest. Can be prevented.

Further, in the present embodiment, based on the determination result at the start winning or the determination result at the start of fluctuation, the action effect (for example, the character is on hold display or active display) acting on the corresponding display (hold display, active display). It is assumed that the effect of executing the action) can be executed. Here, the execution rate of the action effect in the first period and the execution rate of the action effect in the second period may be different. Since the action effect can be executed in both the first period and the second period, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the high probability / high base state (probability change state). Further, in the first period, since the variable display period is long, the action effect requiring a predetermined period can be executed at a high rate, and in the second period, the action effect execution rate may be low because the variable display period is short. As a result, in the first period, the period required until the next big hit occurs becomes longer, so that it is possible to suppress excessively high gambling, realize sound playability, and produce an action effect. By executing at a high rate, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest due to a long variable display period. In addition, in the second period, by lowering the execution rate of the action effect than in the first period, the action effect is executed at a high rate even though the big hit has not occurred for a long period of time, which reduces the interest. Can be prevented.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot expectation of the variable display (variable display whose execution is suspended) that has not been executed. Here, the execution rate of the look-ahead notice effect in the first period may be different from the execution rate of the look-ahead notice effect in the second period. Since the pre-reading notice effect can be executed in both the first period and the second period, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the high accuracy / high base state (probability change state). Further, in the first period, since the variable display period is long, the pre-reading notice effect that requires a predetermined period can be executed at a high rate, and in the second period, the variable display period is short, so that the execution rate of the pre-reading notice effect may be low. As a result, in the first period, the period required until the next big hit occurs becomes longer, so that it is possible to suppress excessively high gambling, realize sound playability, and pre-read notice effect. By executing at a high rate, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to a long variable display period. Also, in the second period, by lowering the execution rate of the look-ahead notice effect than in the first period, the look-ahead notice effect is executed at a high rate even though no big hit has occurred for a long period of time. Can be prevented from decreasing.

In the above embodiment, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect may be different between the first period and the second period. For example, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 13-10 (A) may be 10% in the first period and 2% in the second period. On the contrary, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect may be 10% in the second period while it is 2% in the first period. Further, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect may be different according to the number of fluctuation display times executed in the second period. For example, as the number of variable display times executed in the second period increases (so-called probability change). (As the interval becomes longer), the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect may be increased. Specifically, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect is 2% during the period of 101 to 150 fluctuations from the end of the jackpot game based on the fluctuation display result of the second special symbol, but the period of 151 fluctuations to 200 fluctuations is the second. The execution rate of the one setting suggestion effect may be 5%, and the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect may be 10% after the 201 fluctuation. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest due to a prolonged probabilistic change.

In the above embodiment, as a special effect regarding the suggestion of the setting, the first setting suggestion effect suggesting which of the low setting (1, 2), the intermediate setting (3, 4), and the high setting (5, 6) is used. And, the second setting suggestion effect which suggests whether it is an odd number setting (1,3,5) or an even number setting (2,4,6) is illustrated, but it is not limited to this, and a special effect about the suggestion of a setting May be an effect suggesting that the set value has been changed or that the set value has not been changed. For example, when the setting change mode for changing the set value is controlled when the power is turned on, the display of the change of the special symbol or the existence of the hold memory is displayed during the subsequent demo display or the game. When it is being executed), an effect suggesting that the setting value has been changed may be executed. In addition, when it is controlled to the setting change mode and the setting value is changed according to the setting change operation, during the subsequent demo display or the game (for example, whether the hold memory exists or the special symbol change display is displayed. When it is being executed), an effect suggesting that the setting value has been changed may be executed.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 effect display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 effect control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and can be set to any of a plurality of set values having different advantages.
Variable display means that can execute variable display and
The game area where the game medium can flow down, and
A discharge area in which the game medium can be discharged outside the game area,
A state control means that can control the game state,
Equipped with a value-giving means to give value
The state control means can control at least one of a game state including a normal state, a special state, and the advantageous state.
The game area includes a first area and a second area different from the first area.
In the second region,
Based on the variable display result of the normal identification information, a normal variable device capable of changing into a first state in which the game medium is easy to enter and a second state in which the game medium is difficult or impossible to enter,
A specific area is provided in which the variable display of the ordinary identification information can be executed when the game medium enters.
Based on the fact that the state control means controls the special state, the normal variable device is more likely to be controlled to the first state than the normal state.
The value-giving means imparts a value equal to or less than a predetermined value required for the game medium to enter the specific area based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area.
The specific area is provided at a position downstream of the ordinary variable device.
The game medium that has flowed down the second region in the special state has a higher rate of entering the specific region than being discharged in the discharge region.
The selection ratio of the variable display pattern is common regardless of the set value,
The special condition includes a first period and a second period after the first period.
In the first period, the selection ratio of the variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined period is higher than that in the second period.
In the second period, the game machine is characterized in that the selection ratio of the variable display pattern having a shorter variable display period than the predetermined period is higher than that of the first period.